JP2022146097A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing a game.SOLUTION: A stopping order of a reel for enabling satisfaction of bell winning is reported in a pseudo bonus state or an AT state. In the pseudo bonus state, a shift lottery to the AT state is executed, and control is shifted to the AT state after completion of the pseudo bonus state when shift winning occurs. In this case, when a final game in a pseudo bonus state not accompanying a shift to the AT state is executed, a caution display for urging a player to prevent absorption in a game is executed in an image display device 63. The caution display can be continued even if a next game is started for the final game in the pseudo bonus state. Even in the final game in the AT state, the caution display is executed in the image display device 63. A freeze period for preventing start of a new game occurs after a reel stops rotating in the final game, the caution display is performed during the freeze period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2020-044062 A

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that games are played appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately playing a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the invention according to claim 1 is arranged so that a game round is started based on occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity, and the game round is ended based on occurrence of a predetermined end opportunity. game round control means for controlling the execution of game rounds;
caution event control means for executing a predetermined caution event capable of calling a predetermined caution to a player in response to occurrence of a game round of a predetermined target;
with
It is characterized in that the execution of the predetermined attention event can be continued when the next game round is started with respect to the predetermined target game round while the predetermined caution event is being executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to appropriately play a game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when betting 3 coins; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing advantageous state processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT state processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for AT performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the base effect of the AT state on the image display device, and (b) an example of a display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the main portent state on the image display device. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state in the image display device. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how an effect corresponding to a precursory state progresses. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that result in a normal replay winning prize, a first special replay winning prize, and a second special replay winning prize in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when betting 3 coins; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order in which the reels are stopped and the winning mode to be established; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification prompting establishment of a first special replay prize is made on the main line, and (b) A notification prompting establishment of a second special replay prize is made on the main line. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of being separated; It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the information control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) to (k) are time charts showing operation details when a first special replay winning prize or a second special replay winning prize is established in each game state. 14 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing executed by the main MPU in the third embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing AT state processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing processing for an add-on period executed by the main MPU; FIG. A mode of selection of the number of grants when an extra lottery process for the extra period is executed with reference to the lottery table for the first extra period, and an extra lottery for the extra period with reference to the lottery table for the second extra period. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of selecting the number of grants when processing is executed; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of effects executed by the image display device during the first addition period. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of effects executed by the image display device during the second addition period. FIG. 4 is an electrical configuration diagram for enabling image display in a first additional period and a second additional period; It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the production|presentation setting process for additional periods performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display control processing for additional periods performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing drawing processing of divided images executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 8A to FIG. 9D are explanatory diagrams for explaining how drawing data is created in a drawing target frame area of a frame buffer by executing drawing processing of divided images; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing divided image drawing processing executed in the VDP in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the image display device when the pseudo-bonus state without transition to the AT state ends in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a pseudo-bonus effect control process executed by the effect-side MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the effect-side RAM. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing control processing of various end displays executed by the effect-side MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the caution display performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the bonus end display and caution display are executed when the pseudo-bonus state without transition to the AT state ends. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the AT state ends, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the resurrection effect. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for AT performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing resurrection corresponding effect processing executed by the effect side MPU; FIG. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the AT end display and caution display are executed in the AT state. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing resurrection corresponding effect processing executed by the effect side MPU in the seventh embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the resurrection effect when bet setting of game media for starting a new game is performed before the resurrection effect generation timing. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the reel stop operation is performed in accordance with the stop order notified by the image display device in the eighth embodiment, and (B) an image; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when reel stop operations are performed in a stop order different from the stop order notified by the display device; It is a flowchart which shows the stop order monitoring process performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the medium provision processing performed by main side MPU. (a) is a flow chart showing display information update processing executed by the effect side MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the effect side RAM. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT state processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for AT performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how the AT end display and caution display are executed in the AT state. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for AT performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the explicit end display setting process is executed; (b) after the explicit end display setting process is executed; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device when the result display setting process and the caution display setting process are executed with the reception of the change command as a trigger. FIG. 20 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel in the tenth embodiment; (a) is a connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor, and (b) is a diagram showing drive characteristics of the stepping motor. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an excitation order table; (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an acceleration table, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a stop table. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of a main side RAM used for executing rotation control of each reel; 4 is a flowchart showing stepping motor control processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing acceleration control processing executed by the main MPU; 7 is a flowchart showing stop control processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing return processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing reel control processing of the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing acceleration control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-stop start process executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a table during pseudo stop. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how each reel moves up and down in small steps while a combination of symbols for pseudo-stop exists on the main line during pseudo-stop. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how a pseudo-stop is performed in the starting game in a pseudo-bonus state. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing advantageous state processing at the start of a game of the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an AT transfer lottery table; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing lottery processing for the initial grant number of the main MPU in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first initial grant number lottery table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second initial grant number lottery table, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial grant number table. It is an explanatory diagram for. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM and the addresses of the main ROM in the fourteenth embodiment, and (b) is for explaining the data structure of a 3-byte CALLS instruction; (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of a 2-byte CALLS instruction; (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a program to be read when the 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a circuit configuration provided in the main MPU for providing a 2-byte start address to the management controller of the main ROM; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process of the main MPU in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between programs stored in a main ROM and addresses of the main ROM; FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM and the addresses of the main ROM in the sixteenth embodiment; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the CALLV instruction, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an index table, and (c) a program to be read when the CALLV instruction is executed. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a circuit configuration provided in the main side MPU for providing a 2-byte start address of the main side ROM to the management controller of the main side ROM; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 15 provided on the left side of the housing 11 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated when a predetermined number or more of game media (or game value), which are either medals or virtual medals, are betted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML, which will be described later. have. Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and a button for inserting two virtual medals at once. A second credit input button 48 is provided. In this slot machine 10, there are situations where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be betted (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual tokens are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

If the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the current bet number and the bettable number, and the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the bet number will be the number of the virtual medals. The number of virtual medals is increased, and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

Note that if the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of virtual medals stored is one and the current bet number is "0", the bet number will be "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48 when the player operates the button. Thereby, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . The slot machine 10 has a credit function of accumulating and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a set value of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". , a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers can be viewed by the main controller 70, which will be described later, through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol in the state of being in a bad state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate in a state where a predetermined number or more of game media are betted, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media. , the benefit of replaying, or the transition of the game state.

That is, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a combination of symbols to be a winning target is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

The small winnings to which the game media are given include the first compensation winning, the second compensation winning, the third compensation winning, the fourth compensation winning, the fifth compensation winning, the sixth compensation winning, the seventh compensation winning, and the eighth compensation winning. There are supplemental prizes, ninth supplemental prizes, first bell prizes, second bell prizes, first watermelon prizes, second watermelon prizes and cherry prizes. Specifically, in the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, It will be the first supplementary prize. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the fourth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the fifth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Bell" symbol, the sixth supplementary prize is awarded. Become. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, the seventh compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the eighth compensation winning prize becomes. In the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the ninth compensation prize is won. becomes. If any one of the first to ninth supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “1”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first bell wins. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell wins. becomes. When either the first bell prize or the second bell prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “15”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon wins. becomes. When either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. When the player wins a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “4”.

Winnings that give the privilege of replaying the next game without betting game media include normal replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, and second chance replay winnings. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the main line On the ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, on the main line ML When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, or the left reel on the main line ML. When the stopped symbol on the reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the normal replay prize is won. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay. Win a prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which "3" game media are betted, the betting of the game media is not required, and the next game is started with the "3" game media being betted. A game can be started. Also, if any of the replay wins in the game in which the game medium "2" is betted, the next game is started with the game medium "2" betted, while the game medium is not required to be bet. It becomes possible to

A first CB prize and a second CB prize are available as state transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "White 7" symbol. If there is, it will be the 1st CB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol, 2CB award. When the first CB win is established, the game state shifts to the first CB state ST2, and when the second CB win is established, the game state shifts to the second CB state ST3 (see FIG. 19).

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are gaming states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning of a minor combination stops on the main line ML, medals are paid out as a winning regardless of whether there is a winning combination. For example, even if the win flag corresponding to the first bell win is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell win stops on the main line ML, the game medium will be sent to the player. Granted. On the other hand, the replay winning prize is established on the condition that the corresponding combination is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reels within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are controlled as described above, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the left reel 32L is not controlled. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the reel control to slide only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the first operated stop button is the maximum reel. Control may be performed to allow only one symbol to slide, or reel control may be performed to allow only a maximum of one symbol to slide only on predetermined reels. Furthermore, a stop operated in a certain order is performed such that the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is controlled to slide only up to one symbol. Reel control may be performed such that the reel corresponding to the button is slid only for a maximum of one symbol.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, when a winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is given priority, and when the replay winning is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. Also, the first bell winning can be established even when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning has not been won.

Both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the relevant game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the relevant game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be given when a small winning combination is won. In order to display the number of game media, display corresponding to the notified content when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, and further notify the management result of the game history. and a section display section 67 for displaying corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and a section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), a combined display section 66 in which two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side, and a section display section composed of one light emitting section. 67 are aggregated.

When any of the small wins (1st to 9th compensation wins, 1st bell wins, 2nd bell wins, 1st watermelon wins, 2nd watermelon wins or cherry wins) corresponding to the provision of game media is established , the combined display unit 66 displays the number of given game media corresponding to the small winning combination when the game in which the small winning combination is established is finished. Specifically, when any one of the first to ninth compensation winnings is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By being displayed, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been awarded. When either the first bell win or the second bell win is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By being displayed, it is notified that "15" game media have been awarded. Further, when either the first watermelon winning prize or the second watermelon winning prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game media of "5" have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry prize is won in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed, and "2" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. is given.

In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media provided by winning a small winning combination is "1". Therefore, when a small winning combination is established in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By doing so, it is notified that the game medium of "1" has been provided.

On the other hand, even if a winning such as a replay winning or a CB winning that does not give a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not displayed on the combined display unit 66. The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display was performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. The stop order where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order where the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are There is a stop order that is arbitrary and a stop order where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is made when a winning combination including the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data is won in the winning lottery process in the non-CB state, or It can be executed when a winning combination containing any of the seventh to ninth complementary winning data as well as the second bell winning data is won. Specifically, when winning a combination that includes the first bell winning data and any of the first to sixth complementary winning data, the reel 32L is selected in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. , 32M, and 32R are stopped, the first bell winning is established, and if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, the first to sixth compensation winnings are established. Either can be established. When the first bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When a winning combination including the second bell winning data and any of the seventh to ninth complementary winning data is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are played in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order of stopping corresponding to the winning combination of this time, any one of the seventh to ninth complementary winnings is established. obtain. When the second bell win is established, as already explained, "15" game media are given to the player. of game media is given to the player.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display contents of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 are different from the display contents to be displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-use display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-use display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, on the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, even if the shared display unit 66 displays the content of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the player can be made to pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63. FIG.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . Also, the combined display section 66 is located on the opposite side of the image display device 63 across the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The shared display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , while the section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section SC2 out of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2 (see FIG. 19). The second section SC2 includes the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result of the notification of the stop order, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game") becomes "0 ” (specifically, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5) can be started and the advantageous game state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section SC1 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state does not start and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The interval display section 67 is displayed when winning a combination with different winnings to be established according to the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a combination with different winnings depending on the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables establishment of a prize advantageous to the player, is notified to the player, so that when the expected value of acquisition of the game medium exceeds "0", the lighting state is established. becomes. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 correspond to the advantageous gaming state, while the second section SC2, which is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, does not correspond to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when the first section SC1 shifts to the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. When the section display unit 67 is maintained in the off state when the transition to the second section SC2 is performed, when the pseudo bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 is started in the second section SC2, the section display unit 67 is turned off from the off state. Lights up. When the section display portion 67 is in the lighting state, the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends, and when the second section SC2 ends and transitions to the first section SC1, the section display section 67 is turned off. Become.

As described above, once the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section SC2, the lighting state is maintained until the second section SC2 ends. The shared display unit 66 is turned on when a game medium is awarded and turned off when the next game starts, and the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. When the game is finished, it is turned on and turned off when the game ends. Therefore, in a configuration in which the interval display portion 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the interval display portion 67 is displayed in the common display area 68 in the second interval SC2. It is possible to positively create a lighting state, which facilitates confirmation of the section display section 67 for the manager of the game hall.

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the section display section 67 during the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the second section SC2. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 as shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11. As shown in FIG. The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71 . The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and It is possible to see the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82 .

The substrate box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent the case bodies from separating and to leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented by using some of the joints 83, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, another joint may be used after that. By connecting 83, separation of the case body can be prevented again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting portion 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting portion 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . In addition, the production control device 90 has a control board housed in a board box in the same manner as the main control device 70 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a random number circuit 75 for sequentially updating random numbers within a predetermined numerical range based on a clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 also incorporates an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal insertion sensor. Inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted through slot 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a for individually detecting operation of credit insertion buttons 47 and 48, and settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting operation of settlement button 51. , a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, a setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the section display section 67, the effect control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

The MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. Further, the MPU 72 performs display control of the section display unit 67 so that the notification of the second section SC2 is performed when the notification start trigger occurs in the case of the second section SC2. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the presentation and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. It monitors the voltage being applied, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done.

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 will be referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73 and main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 will be referred to as the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power has been turned on while the ON operation was performed using the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 was not pressed when the power was turned on (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clear process (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing all clear processing (step S105), set value update processing is executed (step S106). Partial clear processing (step S104) initializes a partial area of the main RAM 74, and all clear processing (step S105) initializes the entire area of the main RAM 74. FIG. In the partial clear process, areas other than the area in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" and initialized. The area is cleared to "0" and initialized.

In the set value update process, the current set value is read under the condition that the set key is inserted and turned on, and the current set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the all clear process (step S105) has been executed before that, a credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the fact that the set value is "1" is displayed in the portion 65. FIG. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by “1” each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update processing, and the set value update processing ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is terminated. After that, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be explained later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onward is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". is set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is examined to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S113), the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S114).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S116), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and the power failure processing is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S209, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively.

In step S213, a management process is executed for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each setting value. After that, in step S214, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, if any of the replay wins have been established in the previous game, the same number of bets as the previous bet is set by the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 (see FIG. 9). set to The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the number of bets for the game to be executed by the main side MPU 72 . If no replay winning has been established in the previous game, if the current gaming state is not the second CB state ST3, the upper limit bet number for the current game is set to "3", and the current gaming state is the second CB state. If it is the 2CB state ST3, "2" is set as the maximum bet number for this game. On the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is not the current bet upper limit number, it is determined whether or not there are one or more virtual medals stored and a valid betting operation has been performed. The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. If a valid bet operation is performed when the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, a bet setting process is executed.

In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is changed. In addition to setting the bet upper limit number, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the bet upper limit number. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a. In addition, in the bet amount setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a is is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2 If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a.

In the start waiting process, when one medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a due to the insertion of medals into the medal slot 45, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is the bet upper limit. If it is less than the number, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1, and if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number, the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1. When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50"), acceptance prohibition processing is executed. By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

In the start waiting process, if the settlement button 51 is operated, the settlement process is executed. In the settlement process, the hopper device 53 is operated so that the number of medals corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 unless the replay winning has been established. Drive control. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, after the replay winning has been established, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

After the start waiting process is executed in step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for starting the game has been set (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, a setting process at the time of starting for performing various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, a winning lottery process for performing a lottery for the winning combination in the current game is executed. , in step S308, a reel control process is executed to drive and control the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the current combination.

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S309). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage memory number. drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S311). Thereafter, reception permission processing is executed (step S312). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S401, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. The slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the random number at that time is latched from the random number circuit 75 . The random number circuit 75 generates a random number from “0” to “65535”, and the main MPU 72 stores the latched value in the random number circuit 75 in the main RAM 74 when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S402). In this slot machine 10, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance. It is possible to set whether the lottery process for the winning combination is to be executed based on the winning probability corresponding to which set value. A set value of "n+1" is more advantageous to the player than "n" in winning probability. Specifically, the set value of "n+1" is more advantageous for the player than the set value of "n" because the winning probability of the predetermined combination is higher than the set value of "n". . Also, even if the set value is the same level, the number of betted game media of "3" is more advantageous for the player than the number of bets of "2". In addition, there are a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3 as game states. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current bet number, and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table in the non-CB state will be described using the case where the set value is "3" as an example. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination lottery table when betting 3 cards, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 15 is selected when the number of bets is "2". FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table when two cards are bet; In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 16 will be referred to as appropriate.

The index value IV is set in the combination lottery table as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 regardless of whether 3 coins are bet or 2 coins are bet. Each index value IV is associated with winning data (that is, a winning combination), and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding index value IV in relation to the maximum value of the random number circuit 75 (“65535”). In addition, the number of index value IVs is the same when betting 3 cards and when betting 2 cards. It is the same at time and at the time of betting two cards.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the first bell winning data and any one of the first to sixth compensation winning data are set. In the case of winning with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. When the reel 32M is the middle reel 32M and the reel 32R is the third stop (reel where the last stop command is issued), the first bell win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Otherwise, the first compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with index value IV=2, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the fourth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=3, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the third complementary winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=4, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the sixth compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=5, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is established without fail, and in other cases, the second compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=6, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each of the stop buttons 42-44. Regardless of the operation timing of (1), the first bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the fifth compensation winning can be established.

In the present slot machine 10, as already explained, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. done. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this phenomenon is also known as "dropout"). Say). The 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning and various replay winnings are a winning mode in which no loss occurs when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first CB prize, and the second CB prize are prize modes in which failure can occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The index values IV=7 to 9 are set with the second bell winning data and any one of the seventh to ninth compensation winning data. When winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. The second bell winning prize is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the seventh compensation winning prize can be established. When winning with the index value IV=8, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 9th compensation winning can be established. When winning with index value IV=9, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 Regardless of the timing, the 2nd bell winning is surely established, and in other cases, the 8th compensation winning can be established.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the index value IV=10 is set with the first bell winning data. When winning with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 16, the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. .

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=11. If a win is made with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 16, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=12. If a win is made with the index value IV=12, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only cherry-winning data is set for the index value IV=13. If a win is made with the index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 16, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=14. When winning with index value IV=14, as shown in FIG. 16, 1st chance replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=15. When winning with index value IV=15, as shown in FIG. 16, the second chance replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=16. When winning with index value IV=16, as shown in FIG. 16, normal replay winning is established without regard to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

For the index value IV=17, only the 1st CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. Only the second CB winning data is set as shown. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". can be established. The second CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". can be established. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "3", as shown in FIG. 16, the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be established. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "2", the second CB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the second CB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning has been established, and are deleted in the games following the winning game. is not carried over. On the other hand, the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are cleared by the main side RAM 74 (the 1st CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), the 2nd CB winning data is stored until the corresponding prize is established, even in the games following the winning game, except when the all clearing process (step S105) is performed. In this case, in a game in which one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, as a result of playing the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. In addition, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. Thus, to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored although either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is already stored. is possible, and it is possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

14 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 , the probability of winning when the index value IV=4, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 are each about 1/ 21.8. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 are approximately 1/21.8. be. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is about 1/9.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=14 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15 is about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 is about 1/7.3. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3.

On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 2 in FIG. 15 is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is higher than when the combination lottery table for betting 3 is selected. low probability. Specifically, when the combination lottery table is selected when a two-coin bet is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is the probability when the combination lottery table is selected when the three-coin bet is selected. is less than 2/3 of the probability. As a result, the game executed with the game medium "3" bet is accompanied by the awarding of the game medium, rather than the game executed with the game medium "2" bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a replay prize in which a minor winning prize and a replay are awarded.

However, when the combination lottery table for betting two cards is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/2.2. On the other hand, when the combination lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/3.3. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game executed in the state where "2" game media is betted is executed in the state where "3" game media are betted. It is possible to increase the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game played.

In addition to the combination lottery table for 3-coin bet and the combination lottery table for 2-coin bet, the main-side ROM 73 stores the lottery process for the combination in each of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (FIG. 13). ) is stored in the CB lottery table. Only one index value IV is set in the lottery table for CB, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and when winning with the index value IV, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Regardless of the order, regular replay prizes are established. When the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing even though the index value IV is won, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell win can be established.

Here, the index values IV other than the index values IV=12 and 15 have the same winning probability among the setting values "1" to "6". This applies both when the number of game media bet is "3" and when it is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of index values IV=12 and 15 are different between set values of "1" to "6". Specifically, the probability of winning with the index value IV=12 is lowest when the setting value is "1", the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of winning is, and the higher the setting value is, the highest when the setting value is "6". high. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=15 is lowest for the set value of "1", the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning, and the higher the set value is, the highest for the set value of "6". As a result, it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the set values "1" to "6".

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), after selecting the lottery table in step S402 and setting the index value IV to "1" (step S403), the determination value used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong. DV is set (step S404). In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the value of the random number obtained in step S401 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV, is set to this random number value. is added to obtain a new determination value DV.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S405). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535" (step S405: YES), winning data acquisition processing for setting winning data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S406).

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S407), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S404 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S405, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If the process of step S406 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S408, this means that the determination of whether the winning combination is correct has ended. In this case, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S409). Thereafter, in step S410, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, and in step S411, a first control process for the game section is executed. The processing contents of these steps S410 and S411 will be described later.

Thereafter, stop order notification control processing is executed (step S412). In the stop order notification control process, if the current gaming state is a pseudo-bonus state ST4 or an AT state ST5 (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, an index value IV of any of 1 to 6 is selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). If one wins, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize on condition that the number of bets in this game is "3". is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and a command for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize on the image display device 63. It is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 . In addition, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13), the second Display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the bell winning is performed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, A command for notifying the stop order of 32R by the image display device 63 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives a command corresponding to the notification of the stop order as described above, the display control of the image display device 63 is performed so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the command is notified. . It should be noted that if the number of bets in the current game is "2", it is assumed that one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. Also, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported on the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported in the same manner as when the number of bets is "3". may be configured to be executed.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S413). In the transmission process, if any winning combination is won in the current lottery process (FIG. 13), information corresponding to the winning combination and information corresponding to the current game state. , and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S410 and S411 are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. . When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps various information about the current game from the game start command, and determines the contents of the effect in a mode according to the grasped various information. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S501). In the rotation start process, it is confirmed whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. In that case, wait until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 . By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44. Players and the like are notified of this.

After that, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. (step S503). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S504). The stop instruction command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is transmitted, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S505). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S506).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S506, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the arrival symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S508), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S509). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S510). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting processing executed in step S409 of the combination lottery processing (FIG. 13) and the reel control processing (FIG. 17) executed in step S511. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

When it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, a prize determination process is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won and the winning handling process is executed. In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 18, a description will be given of the handling process at the end of the game, which is executed in step S310 of the normal process (FIG. 12). Since the process of step S310 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S308), the process to deal with the end of the game is to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. will be executed after

First, a CB process is executed for performing transition control and progress control for the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S601). In the CB processing, if the first CB winning has been established in the current game, the first CB status flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the first CB winning data of the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a first CB prize winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the game is executed only when "3" game media are bet. In the CB processing, if the second CB winning has been established in the current game, the second CB status flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" and the second CB winning data of the main side RAM 74 is cleared. Then, a second CB prize winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the second CB state ST3 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the game is executed only when "2" game media are betted. In the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, if the first bell win has been established in the current game, the value of the total grant counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by one. The total given counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media given in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main side MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. Cleared to "0" when When the value of the total grant counter after adding 1 becomes "30" which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the CB state flag corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3 is set to "0". clear. Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92.例文帳に追加

After executing the CB process in step S601 in the corresponding process at the end of the game, on the condition that it is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S602: NO), it corresponds to the current game state. Jump to the processing to be performed (step S603). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, normal processing is executed (step S604), and when the gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing is executed (step S605). ), when the game state is the AT state ST5, AT processing is executed (step S606), and when the game state is the end preparation state ST6, the second control processing of the game section is executed (step S607). . Further, when any one of the normal process of step S604, the pseudo bonus process of step S605, and the AT process of step S606 is executed, the second control process (step S607) of the game section is executed. In addition, the second control process (step S607) of the game section is executed also when it is in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. Details of the processing in steps S604 to S607 will be described later.

When the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, by making an affirmative determination in step S602, normal processing in step S604, pseudo-bonus processing in step S605, and AT processing in step S606 Take no action. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing for advancing the normal game state ST1, the processing for advancing the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the processing for advancing the AT state ST5 are executed. not. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second control process for the game section in step S607 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for advancing the second section SC2 is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals existing in the slot machine 10. FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as game states, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a pseudo-bonus state ST4, an AT state ST5, and an end preparation state ST6. These game states ST1 to ST6 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main side RAM 74 is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105). Further, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, the game state changes to the normal game state ST1 when the end preparation state ST6 ends. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2".

The normal game state ST1 is the expected net increase in game media in one game ("Expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "Game media bet in one game number of media”) is 0 or less. Further, in the normal game state ST1, there is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the first CB winning is established while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "3", while one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "2". can't Also, the second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the second CB winning is established in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the bet number of game media is "2", while the upper limit bet number is set to "2", so "3" game media are bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced.

The pseudo-bonus state ST4 is a game state that is shifted to when conditions for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are established in the normal game state ST1. The pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 becomes "0". When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 are not satisfied, the state shifts to the end preparation state ST6.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST4 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. There is a stored internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Further, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when any one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified. A game medium of “15” is awarded when the first bell prize or the second bell prize is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the situation of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game exceeds "0" if three are bet, and if two are bet in the situation of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game is played in one game. The expected value of net increase in media becomes 0 or less.

The AT state ST5 is a game state that is shifted to when conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 are established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of game media to be given becomes "0" or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. When the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the state transitions to the end preparation state ST6. Further, when the AT state ST5 is terminated by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the normal game state ST1 is entered.

In the AT state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The AT state ST5 is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There exists an internal state where

In the AT state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Also, in the AT state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=7 to 9 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified. A game medium of “15” is awarded when the first bell win or the second bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the AT state ST5. In the AT state ST5, if 3 coins are bet, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game exceeds "0", and in the AT state ST5, if 2 coins are bet, the amount of game media in 1 game Net increase expected value becomes 0 or less.

The ready-to-end state ST6 is a game state that is shifted to when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without satisfying the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5. Also, the end preparation state ST6 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later.

The end preparation state ST6 ends when one game is executed. When the ready-to-end state ST6 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST6 is a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game is 0 or less regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet. Further, the end preparation state ST6 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored on the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST6. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the number of game media bets of "2" and "3", set values of "1" to "6", various game states ST1 to ST6, and There are game sections of the first section SC1 and the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 includes the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to win a prize that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination that is to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By notifying the stop order of , the expected value of the net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be given in one game") becomes "0 is not started, and the advantageous game state does not continue. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the game state is the normal game state ST1 and the first section SC1. In addition, when the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 also occurs.

In the first section SC1, a shift to the second section SC2 occurs based on the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), thereby shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2. In this case, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the bet number of the first section SC1 is "2". Even if a certain game is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2. Therefore, a player who expects to shift from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 needs to play a game with a bet number of "3" instead of a game with a bet number of "2". There is The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued. The second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, or the end preparation state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the second section SC2 ends, the process proceeds to the first section SC1.

As a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). The total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media reaches the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400) by reaching and continuing the second section SC2 without transitioning to the first section SC1. An ending condition is set that either one of these conditions is satisfied. The restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0 when no game media are awarded"). ")" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed)" In the case of the difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is the increase of the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, the AT state ST5 is ended in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the AT state ST5, the second section SC2 is ended, and the first section SC2 is ended. The state shifts to the state of the normal game state ST1 in the section SC1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

In the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the player can stay in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the pseudo bonus state ST4, the AT state ST5, and the end preparation state ST6 do not stay in the first section SC1, but stay only in the second section SC2.

In the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, a transition lottery process to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 can be executed based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in each game. is executed in games where the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, every time one game is executed, the value of the unlocked game number counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is decremented by 1, and after the decrement by 1, the unlocked game number counter is reduced by 1. If the value is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is confirmed. It is not executed in games where the number is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second interval SC2, a game with a bet number of "3" is better to be executed than a game with a bet number of "2". It is advantageous for the player.

In the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, even if it is advantageous to execute the game with the number of bets "3", the second section SC2 The number of game media given in a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in SC2 is the limited total net increase of game media in the second section SC2. The number of bets is added as the number of coins, and the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is executed by continuing the second section SC2. added as the total number of games played. In other words, a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player. It ends up contributing to the side that satisfies the ending condition of section SC2. From this point of view as well, in the case of any of the normal game state ST1, the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the AT state ST5 in the second section SC2, it is better to execute a game with a bet number of "3". It is more advantageous to the player than having the game with the number "2" run.

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB winning can be established and the second CB winning can be established in the same manner as in the first section SC1. When the first CB win is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 enters the first CB state ST2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and after the first CB state ST2 ends. be. In addition, when the second CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the second CB state ST3, and the second section SC2 continues even after the second CB state ST3 and when the second CB state ST3 ends. maintained. In both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, as already explained, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. This is a game state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, although the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, the games contribute to fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2. . Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it is more disadvantageous for the player.

<Regarding the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S411, which is a process executed after completion of the win/loss determination of the win in the win lottery process (FIG. 13).

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S701). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the processing after step S702 is not executed. As a result, in the case of the second section SC2, the direct hit lottery process in step S706 and the lottery process for the number of unlocked games in step S710 are not executed.

If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S701: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S702: YES), the processing after step S703 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery process in step S706, and step S710 The lottery process for the number of unlocked games is not executed.

If the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". Then, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S703). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S703: NO), the processing after step S704 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S705, the direct hit lottery process in step S706, and the cancellation game in step S710. The number lottery process will not be executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S703: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the current combination (step S704). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 13) for this combination is lost (step S704: NO), the processes after step S705 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is lost in the role lottery process (FIG. 13), the process for setting it to the second section SC2 in step S705 and the direct hit lottery process in step S706 And the lottery process for the number of games to be unlocked in step S710 is not executed.

In the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the current role, if any index value IV is won (step S704: YES), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the main side RAM 74 The continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total winning number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the are each cleared to "0" (step S705). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number-of-continued-games counter 74c is for specifying the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. is a counter of When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, the reached game can be played even during the AT state ST5. Then, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d informs the main side MPU 72 of the restricted total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the "total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards) in the second section SC2, even in the middle of the AT state ST5, the reached game Then, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, a direct hit lottery process is executed (step S706). In the direct hit lottery process, a direct hit lottery table provided in the main-side ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main-side RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether or not to win a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. do. In the lottery process (Fig. 13) for the winning combination in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 2% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won directly, and the index value IV = 12 will be won. If the index value IV=13, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be won directly with a probability of 10%, and the index value IV=13. If 14 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 5%, and if the index value IV=15 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is won directly with a probability of 2%. . In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning a direct hit in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S707: YES), the first transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). The first transition confirmation flag is for the main side MPU 72 to specify that transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 was won in the direct hit lottery process (step S706) executed when transitioning to the second section SC2. is a flag. When the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 when the current game ends.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S709). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S707: NO), the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is executed (step S710). The number of unlocked games is the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 occurs. In the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, first, the lottery table for the number of unlocked games pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 . Then, the number of unlocked games is selected by collating the numerical information acquired from the lottery counter against the lottery table of the number of unlocked games. In this case, one of 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, 300 games, 400 games, 500 games, 600 games, 700 games, and 800 games is selected as the number of unlocked games. In addition, the selection probabilities for each number of unlocked games are the same. After executing the lottery process for the number of unlocked games, the number of unlocked games selected in the lottery process for the number of unlocked games is set in the number of unlocked games counter of the main RAM 74 (step S711). The unlocked game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining unlocked games in the main MPU 72 .

Thereafter, a lighting lottery process for the section display section 67 is executed (step S712). In the lighting lottery process of the section display unit 67, the lighting lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to set the second section SC2 from the beginning. It is determined by lottery whether the section display section 67 is to be turned on (that is, to be turned on immediately) or that the section display section 67 should be to be turned on (that is, to be on standby) upon transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 thereafter. In the lottery process (Fig. 13) for the role in this game, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 50%, and standby lighting is selected with a probability of 50%. is selected, and if the index value IV=11 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 65%, and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%. is selected with a probability of 62% and the standby mode is selected with a probability of 38%. When lighting standby is selected and index value IV=14 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 75% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25% and index value IV=15 is won. , the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 70%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%. Lighting standby is selected with a probability, and when index value IV=17 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 30% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 70%. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) of the section display section 67 (step S713: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S714). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S712) of the section display unit 67 (step S713: NO), the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S715). The lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second control process for the game section is executed at step S607 in the corresponding process (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. is executed after all

When "1" is set to the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S801: YES), the state of the flag of the main side RAM 74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST6 (step S802). When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends without transition to the AT state 5, or when the AT state ST5 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied, the state transitions to the end preparation state ST6.

If it is in the termination preparation state ST6 (step S802: YES), it is determined whether or not the termination preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S803). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST6. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S605) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 18), it is specified that the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is 0, and then the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. In this case, a flag is set to enter the termination preparation state ST6, and the termination preparation completion flag is cleared to "0". In addition, in the AT process (step S606) in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18), it is specified that the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 becomes "0" and shifts to the normal game state ST1. In this case, a flag is set to enter the termination preparation state ST6, and the termination preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), the termination preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S804), and then the processing from step S805 is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6. In this case, a process for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed (step S814). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is maintained. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating . Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S815). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S816). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2.

If it is not the end preparation state ST6 (step S802: NO), or if the process of step S804 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S805). As already explained, the number-of-continued-games counter 74c informs the main MPU 72 of the number of times the game has been executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c after adding one is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S806). If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S806, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S814 to S816 is executed. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S806: NO), is any one of the first-chance replay winning, second-chance replay winning, and normal replay winning achieved in the current game? It is determined whether or not (step S807). In this case, even if the number of bets in the current game is either "2" or "3", the determination in step S807 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S807.

If none of the replay wins have been established (step S807: NO), the number of bets for this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S808). . In this case, even if a replay win was established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to a replay due to the establishment of the replay win, the number of bets for this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a value) is subtracted from the total win counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d counts the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

After that, in this game, any small role winning prize (1st to 9th supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize and cherry prize) ) is established (step S809). In this case, even if the number of bets in the current game is either "2" or "3", the determination in step S809 is made, and the current game is normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S809. When an affirmative determination is made in step S809, the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S809, or when the process of step S810 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S811). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S811: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S812).

As described above, in step S808, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d. Therefore, for example, in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, any small win is established. Otherwise, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S811, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S812. As a result, "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" in the situation where no game medium is awarded)" to "the second section When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game while SC2 is being continued (“0” when the game is not being executed) is set as the predetermined difference number, Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, the total net increase number with limitation of game media, which is the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, or if the process of step S812 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number of "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S813). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S813, and processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed in steps S814 to S816. The processing contents of steps S814 to S816 have already been explained. As a result, the second section SC2 ends and becomes the first section SC1, and even if the AT state ST5 is in the middle, the AT state ST5 is forcibly ended and the normal game state ST1 is entered.

Here, if any of the replay prizes are established, affirmative determination is made in step S807, and the processing of steps S808 to S812 is not executed. In a game in which a replay winning prize is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game is used for setting bets, but as a profit from the replay winning establishment, the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay winning prize was established A new game can be played again with the number of bets. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S808 to S812 in a game in which a replay winning has been established, in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total winning number counter 74d is calculated. It is possible to omit the execution of processing for changing , and to omit the execution of useless processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been established, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, the second Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. , and the initialization process of the second section SC2 can be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S813, ending handling processing is executed (step S817). In the ending correspondence process, on condition that the first ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 and the AT provided in the main RAM 74 are set. It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the continuation counter 74e and the value obtained by dividing the expected value of game media acquisition in the AT state ST5 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. The AT continuation counter 74e is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5. The expected acquisition value of game media in one game in the AT state ST5 is about five. The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set to 1500 games as already explained. The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is not limited to 1500 games, and may be less than 1500 games or more than 1500 games.

When the value of the sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2, the first ending flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The first ending flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the number-of-continued-games counter 74c, will reach the upper limit number of games. is. When the first ending flag is set to "1", the AT state ST5 is in a state where the remaining number of grants is not added. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the remaining number of AT states ST5 to be added from occurring.

In the slot machine 10, the value of the sum does not exceed the upper limit number of games of the second section SC2 during the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74, the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main side RAM 74 are used for the game in the AT state ST5. The first ending flag may be set to "1" when the sum of the value obtained by dividing by the acquisition expected value of the medium is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2.

When the first ending flag is set to "1", the first ending command is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and if the game state at that time is the AT state ST5, the first ending command is received. Triggered by this, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the first ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet been started and the game state is not the AT state ST5, it shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period.

In the ending correspondence process, on the condition that the second ending flag provided in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 and the AT continuation counter of the main RAM 74 It is determined whether or not the sum with the value of 74e is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2. The upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is set to 2400 sheets as already explained. Note that the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2 is not limited to 2400 sheets, and may be less than 2400 sheets or more than 2400 sheets.

When the value of the sum is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2, the second ending flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The second ending flag is for the main MPU 72 to specify that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit number of net additions. is a flag. When the second ending flag is set to "1", the AT state ST5 is in a state where the remaining number of grants is not added. As a result, in a situation where the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the remaining number of AT states ST5 to be added from occurring.

In the slot machine 10, the value of the sum does not exceed the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2 during the pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, the value of the total win counter 74d of the main RAM 74, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 multiplied by the expected value of the game media to be acquired in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the The second ending flag may be set to "1" when the sum with the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is equal to or greater than the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2.

When the second ending flag is set to "1", the second ending command is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started, and if the game state at that time is the AT state ST5, the second ending command is received. Triggered by this, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period. On the other hand, when the effect-side MPU 92 receives the second ending command in a situation where the effect in the execution mode corresponding to the ending period has not yet started and the game state is not the AT state ST5, it shifts to the AT state ST5. In this case, the performance mode of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is made to correspond to the ending period.

<Regarding normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be explained.

In the normal game state ST1, in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". On the condition that the state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3, and that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3", in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for this hand It is determined whether or not any of the index values IV=11 to 15 has been won, and if the lottery has been won, a transfer lottery process is executed. In the transition lottery process, a transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and a lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to determine by lottery whether to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) has a higher probability of winning a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the transition lottery process, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 transition is won, the second transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1".

In the normal game state ST1, "1" is set to the first transition confirmation flag or the second transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 in the normal processing (step S604) in the corresponding processing (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. If so, a process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed. As already explained, the first transition confirmation flag is set to "1" when the direct hit lottery process (step S706) in the first control process (FIG. 20) of the game section is won directly, and the second transition confirmation flag is set. is set to "1" when a transition lottery process in the transition lottery process in the advantageous lottery process (step S410) at the start of the game is won as already explained. When "1" is set in the first transition confirmation flag, "50" is set in the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, so that the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed 50 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until the When the second transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "20", so that the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed 20 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until the Also, a command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the normal process (step S604), if "1" is not set to both the first transition confirmation flag and the second transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74, the second interval flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". set, the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3". 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-released-games counter. When the value of the unlocked game number counter after subtracting 1 is "0", by setting "20" to the pseudo bonus continuation counter of the main side RAM 74, the game with the bet number of "3" is executed 20 times. A pseudo-bonus state ST4 that continues until the Also, a command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo bonus state ST4.

In the normal process (step S604), when the process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed and the lighting standby flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the interval display section 67 is displayed. Switch from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display section 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2.

<Regarding Pseudo-Bonus State ST4>
Next, the details of processing in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing advantageous state processing at the start of the game, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a step that is executed after the winning judgment is completed in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) and before the first control process (step S411) of the game section. It is executed in S410. Then, the advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed when the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S901). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S901: NO), the processing after step S902 is not executed. As a result, even if the player is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, the process after step S902 is not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2".

When the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S901: YES), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: YES), the processing after step S903 is not executed. As a result, even if the pseudo-bonus state flag or the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", if the state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the processing after step S903 is executed. will not be executed.

If the current gaming state is not the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the pseudo bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903). If the current gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903: NO), it means that the current gaming state is the AT state ST5, so the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed (step S904). . The AT state processing at the start of the game will be described later.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S903: YES), it is determined whether or not the AT transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S905). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not the condition for transition to the AT state ST5 has already been satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4. If the AT shift determination flag is already set to "1" (step S905: YES), it means that the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 have already been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4, so step S906. After that, the process for determining whether or not to shift to the AT state ST5 is not executed.

If the AT transition determination flag is not set to "1" (step S905: NO), one of the index values IV = 11 to 15 has been won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in this game. Under this condition (step S906: YES), AT shift lottery processing is executed (step S907). In the AT transition lottery process, the AT transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to shift to the AT state ST5 after the current pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. A lottery will decide whether or not to allow it. In the lottery process (Fig. 13) for the role in this game, if the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 20% probability that the AT transition will be won, and if the index value IV = 12 is won, has a probability of 10% to win the AT transition, and if the index value IV = 13 is elected, the AT transition will be elected with a probability of 40%, and if the index value IV = 14 is elected, the probability is 30%. AT shift wins with a probability, and when the index value IV=15 is won, AT shift wins with a probability of 20%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) has a higher probability of winning an AT transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

If the AT transition is won (step S908: YES), the AT transition determination flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S909). After that, an AT transition winning command indicating that the AT transition has been won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S910). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, the performance indicating that the AT transition winning has been executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁

Next, the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus process is executed at step S605 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the pseudo-bonus processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating in one game. is executed after

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S1001). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1001: NO), the processing after step S1002 is not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 23) itself is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the transition to the CB state occurs in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is resumed from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state. .

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S1001: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1002). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003). When the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1003: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the AT transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 (step S1004).

If the AT shift determination flag is set to "1" (step S1004: YES), it means that the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 have been met in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1005). After that, the information corresponding to "200", which is the initial assignment number of the AT state ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1006). Also, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007). Then, an AT shift command indicating that the shift to the AT state ST5 will occur is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1008). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition determination flag is not set to "1" (step S1004: NO), the processing for setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1009). In the setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Also, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1010). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already described in the end preparation state ST6, if the affirmative determination is made in step S802 in the second control process (FIG. 21) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in the current game ( 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S814 to S816). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended ends.

After executing the process of step S1010, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1011). When receiving the bonus end command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

<Regarding AT state ST5>
Next, the contents of processing in the AT state ST5 will be explained. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing AT state processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. As already described, the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed at step S904 in the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 22).

First, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1101). As described above, the first ending flag indicates to the main MPU 72 that there is a high possibility that the number of times the game has been executed in the second section SC2, which is counted using the number-of-continued-games counter 74c, will reach the maximum number of games. This is a flag for specifying. As already explained, the second ending flag indicates by the main MPU 72 that there is a high possibility that the limited total number of net additions of game media measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d will reach the upper limit number of net additions. This is a flag for specifying. If "1" is set to either the first ending flag or the second ending flag (step S1101: YES), the processes after step S1102 are not executed. As a result, in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is highly likely to reach the upper limit number of games, or in a situation where the total number of net increases with restrictions on game media is highly likely to reach the upper limit number of net increases, After step S1102, the processing for adding the remaining number of grants in AT state ST5 is not executed.

If "1" is not set to both the first ending flag and the second ending flag (step S1101: NO), the index value IV=11 to 15 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in this game. On the condition that one of them is won (step S1102: YES), an additional lottery process is executed (step S1103). In the additional lottery process, the additional lottery table provided in the main-side ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main-side RAM 74 are used to increase the remaining number of given game media in the AT state ST5. It is determined by lottery whether or not to generate a different addition. In this case, as modes for increasing the number of remaining rewards in the event of an additional winning, there is a direct hit mode in which the number is increased immediately in the game, and the number of waiting games (specifically, 10 games) corresponding to the premonitory state from the game. Two types are set: one is this precursor state mode in which the number of remaining grants is increased when the game is completed. In addition, in the add-on lottery process, even if the add-on win is not achieved, a false omen win can occur. In the event that a false omen is won, the false omen state is generated until the above number of standby games (specifically, 10 games) from the game concerned are completed.

In both the real omen state and the false omen state, as the effect contents of each game on the image display device 63, an effect with a high degree of expectation that an increase in the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 occurs is easily executed. , the effect content is determined according to a table corresponding to the portent state. In this case, in the main omen state and the false omen state, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games, including the final game of this omen state and false omen state, an effect in which the same character is displayed between multiple games, or an effect in accordance with a series of stories is executed. can be In addition, an effect with a higher degree of expectation is more likely to be executed in this portent state than in the false portent state. In the real sign state, an effect is displayed to make the player aware that the remaining number of grants will increase in the final game of the game with the above waiting game number, and in the false sign state, the final game in the game with the above waiting game number is displayed. An effect is displayed for making the player recognize that the remaining number of grants will not be increased in .

Specifically, for the additional lottery process, if the index value IV = 11 is won, a direct hit winning with a probability of 5% that the number of grants will be 30 is selected, and the number of grants is selected with a probability of 5%. Winning of this omen state with 30 is selected, direct hit winning with 50 grant targets is selected with a probability of 5%, and the number of grant targets is 50 with a probability of 5%. A win is chosen, a win with a false omen state is chosen with a probability of 10%, and a loss with a probability of 70%. If the index value IV = 12 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 5% that the number of grant targets is 20 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 20 with a probability of 5%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with a probability of 5% for granting 40 tokens is selected, winning in this omen state with a probability of 5% for granting target of 40 tokens is selected, and probability of 10%. , the election in the false omen state is selected, and it is lost with a probability of 70%. If the index value IV = 13 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 30 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 30 with a probability of 10%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 50 is selected, and winning of this omen state with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 50 is selected, and a probability of 10%. Direct hit winning with 100 tokens to be granted is selected, 10% chance of winning with this omen with 100 tokens to be granted, and 20% chance of winning with false omen status. , with a probability of 20%. If the index value IV = 14 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 10% that the number of grant targets is 20 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 20 with a probability of 10%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with 40 tokens to be granted is selected with a probability of 10%, winning in this omen state with a probability of 10% being 40 tokens to be granted is selected, 10% probability Direct hit winning with 90 tokens to be granted is selected, 10% chance of winning with this omen condition with 90 tokens to be granted, and 20% probability of winning with false omen status. , with a probability of 20%. If the index value IV = 15 is won, the direct hit winning with a probability of 5% that the number of grant targets is 30 is selected, and the number of grant targets is 30 with a probability of 5%. Winning is selected, direct hit winning with a 5% probability of granting 50 tokens is selected, and winning of this omen state with a 5% probability of granting 50 tokens is selected, 10% probability , the election in the false omen state is selected, and it is lost with a probability of 70%.

As described above, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the lower the probability of winning an index value IV, the higher the probability of winning an additional win. In addition, the expected value of the number of grants to be added increases as the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). In addition, in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination, the probability of winning in the false portent state increases as the index value IV has a lower probability of winning. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

If direct hit winning is selected in the add-on lottery process (step S1103) (step S1104: YES), the value of the grant number selected as direct hit win in this add-on lottery process (step S1103) is set to AT It is added to the continuation counter 74e (step S1105). After that, a direct hit winning command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1106). The direct hit winning command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the direct hit winning has been made in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the grant number in the direct hit winning. When the effect side MPU 92 receives the direct hit winning command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 has been added. to

If winning of this portent state is selected in the additional lottery processing (step S1103) (step S1107: YES), the value of the number of grants selected as winning of this portent state is added to this additional lottery processing (step S1103). It is added to the planned number counter 74f (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1108). The planned number counter 74f is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the number of grants to be added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the number of waiting games in this portent state.

After that, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the present precursor flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1109). The present portent flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the current state is the present portent state. If this portent flag is not set to "1" (step S1109: NO), it is determined whether or not the false portent flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1110). The false portent flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the current state is the false portent state. If the false portent flag is not set to "1" (step S1110: NO), the value corresponding to the number of waiting games for which this portent state will continue is set to "10" in the standby state provided in the main RAM 74. A counter 74g (see FIG. 9) is set (step S1111). The standby counter 74g is a counter for the main side MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining standby games in the case of the real precursor state or the false precursor state.

If any of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the situation where the present sign state is already present, the additional lottery process is executed. Then, when a direct hit win is obtained in the additional lottery process, the number of grants selected as the direct hit win is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 even in the middle of this precursory state.

In the event that the additional lottery process executed in the state of the present portent state already results in winning of the present portent state, the given number selected as the winning of the present portent state is stored in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74. Because of the addition, when the current precursor state ends, the value of the expected number counter 74f after the addition is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In other words, if the winning of the present sign state occurs in the middle of the present sign state, the given number added to the AT continuation counter 74e when the current sign state ends is the newly won sign. Increases by the number of grants selected in the state. However, even if it is newly won in this omen state, if the main omen flag in the main side RAM 74 is already set to "1", by making an affirmative determination in step S1109, The number of standby games is not set for the standby counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the win for the present portent state is won in the additional lottery process during the present portent state, the number of standby games for the present portent state is not extended. This makes it possible to prevent this precursor state from continuing excessively.

In the event that the addition lottery process executed in a situation where the false portent state is already present results in winning of the present portent state, the number of grants selected as the winning of the present portent state is stored in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74. Since it is added, the false portent state is promoted to the real portent state on the way. Then, when this portent state after the promotion ends, the value of the planned number counter 74f is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. However, even if the winning of the present omen state occurs in the middle of the false omen state, if the false omen flag of the main side RAM 74 has already been set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S1110. By doing so, the number of standby games is not set for the standby counter 74g in step S1111. Therefore, even if the player wins the prize for the real omen state in the additional lottery process in the middle of the false omen state, the number of waiting games remaining in the false omen state before the promotion is exhausted in the real omen state after the promotion. exit if This makes it possible to prevent excessive continuation of the false portent state and the actual portent state.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1109, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1110, or when the process of step S1111 is executed, this portent command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1112). This portent command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the present portent state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) and the number of grants in the winning of this portent state. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives this portent command, the effect corresponding to this portent state is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁After that, "1" is set to the real portent flag in the main RAM 74, and "0" is cleared to the false portent flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1113).

If winning in the false sign state is selected in the additional lottery process (step S1103) (step S1114: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1115). . When the value of the standby counter 74g is "0" (step S1115: NO), "10" is set in the standby counter 74g as a value corresponding to the number of standby games in which the false precursor state continues (step S1116). ). After that, a false portent command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1117). The false portent command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the false portent state has been won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the false portent command, the effect corresponding to the false portent state is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁After that, the false portent flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1118).

On the other hand, if the value of the standby counter 74g is equal to or greater than 1 (step S1115: YES) even if the false portent state is won, the processing for starting the false portent state in steps S1116 to S1118 is executed. do not do. Therefore, even if the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in the situation where the real portent state or the false portent state is already present, the false portent state is not newly set, and furthermore, the false portent state is not set. Also, the number of waiting games in the real precursor state or the false precursor state is not increased. This makes it possible to prevent the precursor state from continuing excessively.

FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The AT process is executed in step S606 in the corresponding process (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed later.

First, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S1201). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1201: NO), the processes after step S1202 are not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the bet number is "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining given number in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and furthermore, in the AT state ST5, the real precursor state or the false precursor state If a state has occurred, the number of standby games for that premonitory state is not decremented.

Note that the AT process (FIG. 25) itself is not executed in the CB state (first CB state ST2 or second CB state ST3). The number of games played is not treated as the number of games played in AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the state is shifted to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of grants immediately before the shift to the CB state after the end of the CB state.

If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1201: YES), a small winning combination has been established in the current game, and game media have been awarded in a number exceeding the number of bets of "3". It is determined whether or not (step S1202). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first bell winning, second bell winning, first watermelon winning and second watermelon winning has been established. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, on condition that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203: YES), subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S1204). . In the subtraction process, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and if game media are awarded in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the awarded number itself is counted by the AT continuation counter without subtracting the number of bets. It may be configured to subtract from the value of 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media to be paid out becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number. Further, if game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded or a replay prize is not established, the number of game media of the player reduced by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net increase in game media reaches the end reference number or more.

When a negative determination is made in step S1202, when a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the processing of step S1204 is executed, the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1205 : YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is subtracted by 1 (step S1206). Then, if the value of the standby counter 74g after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main-side RAM 74 flag (step S1208). ).

If the main precursor flag is set to "1" (step S1208: YES), it means that the precursor state to end this time is the main precursor state. In this case, processing for adding the remaining number to be given is executed (step S1209). In the addition process, the value set in the planned number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game in the present precursor state ends, the number of game media to be awarded in the present precursor state is added to the remaining number of game media to be awarded in the AT state ST5.

When a negative determination is made in step S1208 or when the process of step S1209 is executed, the main-side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" for each of the real precursor flag and the false precursor flag (step S1210). As a result, if the current state is the actual portent state, the actual portent state ends, and if the current state is the false portent state, the false portent state ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, or if the process of step S1210 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0". (step S1211). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S1211: YES), it means that the remaining number of game media to be given in the current AT state ST5 is "0". In this case, by determining whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is "0", it is determined whether or not the current state is the true portent state or the false portent state (step S1212).

If the current state is neither the actual portent state nor the false portent state, and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1212: YES), the process of setting the termination preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1213). ). In the setting process, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1214). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST6.

As already described in the end preparation state ST6, if the affirmative determination is made in step S802 in the second control process (FIG. 21) of the game section and the end preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S803: NO), after setting the end preparation completion flag to "1", a process for specifying whether or not the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied is executed, and the second control process of the game section in the current game ( 21) is terminated. On the other hand, if the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S803: YES), processing for ending the second section SC2 and shifting to the first section SC1 is executed (steps S814 to S816). ). As a result, the second section SC2 ends when the game following the game in which the AT state ST5 has ended ends.

After that, an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1215). The AT end command is a command for making the effect side MPU 92 recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display are executed so that the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is started after the performance indicating that the AT state ST5 is completed. Control device 63 .

On the other hand, if the current state is the actual portent state or the false portent state and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1212: NO), the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" and the current AT Even if the remaining number of game media to be given in the state ST5 is "0", the processing for terminating the AT state ST5 in steps S1213 to S1215 is not executed. As a result, even if the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without being terminated in the case of the real precursor state or the false precursor state. In the case of the present portent state, the value of the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e in the final game of the present portent state. continues. In the case of a false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is not incremented in the final game of the false portent state, but in the middle of the false portent state, if a direct hit is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, the AT state ST5 can continue even after the false portent state ends.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for AT executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The effect control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

When the AT transition command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1301: YES), the AT base table pre-stored in the effect side ROM 93 is read out to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1302). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the base table for AT, so that the upper lamp 61 performs light emission performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5, and the speaker 62 produces sound output performance corresponding to the base performance of the AT state ST5. is performed, and the image display device 63 performs a display effect corresponding to the base effect of the AT state ST5.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the base effect in the AT state ST5 in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(a), in the base effect for the AT state ST5, a moving image display of the base image G11 by the base character image is performed. In addition, a remaining number display image G12 for informing the remaining number of game media to be awarded in the AT state ST5 is displayed, and an acquired number display image G13 for informing the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 is displayed. Is displayed. Based on commands received from the main MPU 72, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 and the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and according to the grasped information. The display contents of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are updated as appropriate.

If a direct hit winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1303: YES), the grant number for this direct hit winning is grasped from the information included in the direct hit winning command (step S1304), and the grasped grant number The corresponding direct hit winning table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1305). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the direct hit winning table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission performance corresponding to the direct hit winning, and the speaker 62 performs the sound output performance corresponding to the direct hit winning in the AT state ST5, In the image display device 63, a display effect corresponding to direct hit winning is performed. In this case, in the image display device 63, an image for notifying the award number for the direct hit winning this time is displayed superimposed on a part of the base effect of the AT state ST5, and after the display is performed, the award number is displayed. A display that is added to the number of the remaining given number display image G12 is performed. In the remaining award number display image G12, a number resulting from adding the award number in the current direct hit win to the remaining award number up to that point is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp that the number of remaining grants has increased due to direct hit winning.

Here, in a game in which a direct hit win is achieved in the main or false omen state, the image display device 63 superimposes part of the production of the main omen state or the false omen state on this time. is displayed, and after the display is performed, a display is performed in which the number of awards is added to the number of the remaining number of awards display image G12. Therefore, even in the middle of the real omen state or the false omen state, the player can grasp that the remaining given number has increased due to the direct winning.

If a false portent command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S1306: YES), the false portent table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1307). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the false portent table, the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission effect corresponding to the false portent state, the speaker 62 performs the sound output effect corresponding to the false portent state, and the image is displayed. A display effect corresponding to the false portent state is performed in the device 63 .

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the real portent state in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(b), in the display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the main portent state, the remaining given number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are displayed in the same manner as the base effect for the AT state ST5. In addition, in the display effect corresponding to the false portent state or the real portent state, a moving image display of the portent effect image G14 by the portent effect character image is performed. In the portent effect image G14, an effect with a high degree of expectation that an increase in the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 occurs is likely to be executed. Also, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side of the false omen state or the real omen state. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game, an effect in which the same character is displayed in a plurality of games or an effect in accordance with a series of stories can be executed. In addition, in the final game in the false portent state, an image is displayed that allows the player to recognize that the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 will not increase. In the situation shown in FIG. 27(b), the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the middle of the false portent state. 0” is displayed, but the AT state ST5 continues without ending because it is in the middle of the false precursor state.

If the present portent command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1308: YES), the grant number selected by the present portent state winning that triggered the transmission of the present portent command is obtained from the information included in the present portent command. It grasps and adds the grasped planned number to the provision planned number counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1309). After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is in execution of the actual portent state or the false portent state (step S1310).

If the effect of the main omen state or false omen state is not being executed (step S1310: NO), the main omen table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1311). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the main portent table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission performance corresponding to the main portent state, the speaker 62 performs the sound output performance corresponding to the main portent state, and the image is displayed. In the device 63, a display effect corresponding to this precursor state is performed. The contents of the display effect of the image display device 63 corresponding to the present precursor state are the same as the contents of the display effect corresponding to the false precursor state, except for the final game, and the display of the remaining given number is shown in FIG. 27(b). An image G12, an acquisition number display image G13, and an omen effect image G14 are displayed as moving images. In the final game in this precursory state, an image for notifying the number of grants corresponding to the value of the expected number counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is displayed. is added to the number of . In the remaining given number display image G12, a number obtained by adding the given number at the end of the current precursor state to the remaining given number until then is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp that the remaining given number has increased due to this precursor state.

If the production of the real portent state or the false portent state is being executed (step S1310: YES), correction processing is executed (step S1312). In the correction process, if the current state is in the middle of the false portent state, the data corresponding to the final game effect in the false portent table read out to the effect side RAM 94 is replaced with the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5. It is changed to data that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the increase in and also enables the notification of the number of grants corresponding to the value of the grant constant counter of the performance side RAM 94. - 特許庁Further, if the current state is in the middle of the present portent state, the data corresponding to the final game effect in the present portent table read out to the effect-side RAM 94 is added in step S1309, and then added to the effect-side RAM 94. Change the data to enable notification of the number of grants corresponding to the value of the constant counter.

As already explained, even if the winning state is won in the middle of the false omen state or the main omen state, the value of the standby counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 is not changed, so the number of remaining standby games in the current omen state is changed. After the winning of this portent state, the remaining number of standby games is consumed, and this portent state ends. Therefore, even if the effect-side MPU 92 wins for the actual portent state in the middle of the false portent state or the actual portent state, the final game data in the portent table for executing the effect corresponding to the current portent state is changed. Only by correcting, the process of increasing the number of games in which the effect corresponding to the premonitory state is executed is not performed. As a result, in the game in which the value of the planned number counter 74f of the main RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 in the main MPU 72, the player is informed of the given number to be added. becomes possible.

When the AT end command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1313: YES), the AT end table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1314). Execution control of the effect is performed according to the AT end table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, and the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5. Then, the image display device 63 performs a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5.

FIG. 27(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5 on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 27(c), in the display effect corresponding to the end of the AT state ST5, a moving image display of the end image G15 by the end character image is performed. In addition, a character image G16 of "END" is displayed to indicate that the AT state ST5 has ended, and a total number of game media image G17 is displayed to notify the total number of game media acquired in the current AT state ST5. is displayed.

In the effect control process for AT (FIG. 26), in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed (step S1315). In the other processing, data to be referred to in various tables are updated as the game progresses, and processing for updating the effect content is executed. Further, when game media are given, a process of updating the display contents of the remaining given number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 is executed accordingly. Also, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process for performing an ending effect is executed.

Next, how the presentation corresponding to the portent state progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 28(a) shows the period of the AT state ST5, FIG. 28(b) shows the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 28(c) shows the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74. FIG. 28(d) shows the timing of direct hit winning in the additional lottery process (step S1103), FIG. 28(e) shows the period of this precursor state, and FIG. 28(f) shows the false precursor state. indicates a period of time.

First, a case will be described where the AT state ST5 ends when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" during the false portent state and the false portent state ends.

At the timing of t1, the AT state ST5 is started as shown in FIG. 28(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the AT continuation counter 74e is set to "200", which is the initial assignment number of the AT state ST5. As the game is repeatedly executed in the AT state ST5 and game media are awarded in excess of the number of bets in the game, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 28(d), direct hit winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1103). Therefore, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e increases at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t3, the addition lottery process (step S1103) is won, so that the present portent state is started as shown in FIG. "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g. Even in this precursor state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. Further, by executing the game in this precursor state, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c).

After that, at the timing t4, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and this precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the AT continuation counter 74e is added to the given number set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 when the present precursor state is started, so that the AT The value of the continuation counter 74e is incremented.

After that, at the timing of t5, the addition lottery process (step S1103) wins the false portent state, thereby starting the false portent state as shown in FIG. "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g. Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media in excess of the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state. After that, at the timing t6, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since addition of the given number does not occur in the false portent state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b).

After that, at the timing of t7, the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), so that the false portent state is started as shown in FIG. "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g. Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media in excess of the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state.

After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b) at the timing t8 during the false precursor state. However, at the timing t8, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without termination. After that, at timing t9, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since addition of the given number does not occur in the false portent state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). At the timing t9, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is already "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b). Therefore, at the timing of t9, the AT state ST5 ends as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false portent state and a direct hit winning occurs in the middle of the false portent state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), at the timing of t10, which is AT state ST5, the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false portent state is displayed as shown in FIG. 28(f). When the game is started, "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media in excess of the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state.

After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" at the timing t11 in the middle of the false portent state, as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t11, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without termination.

After that, as shown in FIG. 28(d), at the timing of t12, which is in the middle of the false portent state, a direct hit is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(b) at the timing of t12, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more by adding the award number selected in direct hit winning to the AT continuation counter 74e. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes 1 or more, the game is executed in the false portent state, and game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded, and as shown in FIG. is subtracted.

After that, at the timing of t13, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and the false precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(f). Since addition of the given number does not occur in the false portent state, the AT continuation counter 74e does not increase as shown in FIG. 28(b). However, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 28B, the number of grants increased at the timing of t12 is not "0", so the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more. Therefore, the AT state ST5 continues even if the false portent state ends. After that, at the timing of t14, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), thereby ending the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 28(a).

Next, the case where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" in the middle of the false portent state and the winning of this portent state is won in the middle of the false portent state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), at the timing of t15, which is AT state ST5, the false portent state is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103), and the false portent state is generated as shown in FIG. 28(f). When the game is started, "10" corresponding to the number of waiting games is set in the waiting counter 74g as shown in FIG. 28(c). Even in the false portent state, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(b) by executing the game and awarding game media in excess of the number of bets. Further, the value of the standby counter 74g gradually decreases as shown in FIG. 28(c) by executing the game in the false portent state.

After that, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" at the timing t16 in the middle of the false portent state, as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t16, the value of the standby counter 74g is 1 or more as shown in FIG. AT state ST5 continues without termination.

After that, at the timing of t17 in the middle of the false portent state, the additional lottery process (step S1103) wins the real portent state, so that the false portent state is shown in FIGS. is promoted to this omen state. However, as shown in FIG. 28(c), the number of waiting games is not reset to the waiting counter 74g, and the remaining number of waiting games is taken over as it is.

At the timing of t18, the value of the standby counter 74g becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(c), and this precursor state ends as shown in FIG. 28(e). In this case, the AT continuation counter 74e is added to the given number set in the scheduled number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 when the present precursor state is started, so that the AT The value of the continuation counter 74e is incremented. Therefore, the AT state ST5 continues even if this precursor state ends. After that, at the timing of t19, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 28(b), thereby ending the AT state ST5 as shown in FIG. 28(a).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If the AT state ST5 is in the real precursor state or the false precursor state, the AT state is maintained even if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", that is, even if the remaining number of game media provided in the AT state ST5 is "0". ST5 continues without ending. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the AT state ST5 can continue even if the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". In addition, it is possible to prevent the execution of the effect in the main portent state or the false portent state from ending halfway along with the end of the AT state ST5.

In particular, in the case of a false sign state that does not trigger an increase in the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5, even if the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", the AT state ST5 continues without ending. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of game media to be provided is not "0", the false sign state, which has only a role as an effect that does not change the profit of the player, is set to "0". , the AT state ST5 can be continued, and the player's attention to the false portent state can be increased.

Even if the remaining given number of game media in the AT state ST5 is "0" due to the false portent state, if the AT state ST5 is continued, the remaining given number remains "0" and remains in the false portent state. is completed, the AT state ST5 is also completed. This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If a direct hit is won in the additional lottery process in the AT state ST5, the remaining number of game media given in the AT state ST5 increases, so the player expects that a direct hit will occur in the AT state ST5. Become. In this case, if the AT state ST5 continues even if the remaining number of grants is "0" due to the false omen state, if the direct hit win is made in this continued situation, the above Increases the number of remaining grants. This makes it possible for the player to expect a direct hit win even in the situation where the AT state ST5 continues due to the false portent state.

Even if the main omen win or the false omen win occur in the main omen state or the false omen state, the number of remaining games in the omen state is maintained without increasing. This makes it possible to prevent the false portent state from continuing excessively.

<Second embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in terms of the manner in which the replay win is established and the contents of the game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of symbols that result in a normal replay winning prize, a first special replay winning prize, and a second special replay winning prize.

As shown in FIG. 29, in this embodiment, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol. In the case of the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. , on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. In this case, on the main line ML, if the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol, On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, on the main line ML. , the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, or the left reel on the main line ML When the stopped symbol on the reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the normal replay wins.

In this embodiment, in addition to normal replay winning, first chance replay winning and second chance replay winning, first special replay winning and second special replay winning are set as replay winning. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol, 1 special replay prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "BAR" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second special replay. Win a prize.

In the present slot machine 10, as in the first embodiment, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, each reel 32L is controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. , 32M and 32R. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for establishing a prize. If there are five or more symbols between constituent symbols, the corresponding constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42-44. The first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are prize modes that may not be established depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination lottery table for a 3-coin bet in this embodiment, which is selected when the set value is "3" and the number of bets is "3". In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 31 will be referred to as appropriate.

Index values IV=1 to 16 are set with winning data and point values PV which are the same as those in the winning combination lottery table (FIG. 14) for betting 3 cards in the first embodiment. Also, the same winning data and point value PV as the index value IV=17 in the combination lottery table (FIG. 14) for the three-coin bet in the first embodiment are set for the index value IV=19.

The normal replay winning data and the first special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=17. When winning with index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 31, when the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R The normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the type of the game and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop, either the first special replay prize or the normal replay prize is guaranteed. To establish. In this case, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the timing at which the first special replay winning can be established, establishment of the first special replay winning is given priority. If the operation timing is such that it is impossible to establish the first special replay prize, the normal replay prize is established.

The normal replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the second special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=18. When winning with index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 31, when the first stop is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R The normal replay prize is surely established regardless of the type of the game and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first special replay winning prize, the second special replay winning prize, and the normal replay winning prize regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop. Either of the above is surely established. In this case, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the timing at which the first special replay winning can be established, establishment of the first special replay winning is given priority. , If the operation timing is the timing at which the second special replay prize can be established, establishment of the second special replay prize is prioritized, and the operation timing establishes the first special replay prize and the second special replay prize. If the timing is such that it is impossible to do so, a normal replay prize is established.

Here, the symbol arrays of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this embodiment are the same as the symbol arrays of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the first embodiment shown in FIG. In the configuration where it is necessary to stop the right reel 32R as the first stop in order to establish the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize when the index value IV=18 is won as described above, the configuration shown in FIG. Thus, on the right reel 32R, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay prize. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay prize will not be established if the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the second special replay prize when the index value IV=18 is won. In this case, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize will not be established if the "red 7" symbol does not stop. That is, when the right reel 32R is stopped first when the index value IV=18 is won, the reels 32L and 32M are arranged such that the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are given priority over the normal replay winning prize. , 32R in which the stop control is performed, the priority between the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is not set in the stop control, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is established depending on the timing.

As shown in FIG. 30, the point value PV of "600" is set for the index value IV=17, and the point value PV of "200" is set for the index value IV=18. =17, the probability of winning is about 1/109, and the probability of winning with the index value IV=18 is about 1/328. In other words, the index value IV=18, in which both the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize can be established, has only the first special replay winning prize among the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize. The winning probability is set lower than the obtained index value IV=17.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=17 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13), a notification is made on the main line ML to prompt establishment of the first special replay prize. Also, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the establishment of the first special replay prize on the main line ML is established in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. A notification to prompt is made, and in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a notification to prompt establishment of the second special replay prize is made on the main line ML. These notifications will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b). FIG. 32(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification prompting establishment of the first special replay prize is made on the main line ML, and FIG. 32(b) is a second special replay on the main line ML. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a notification prompting establishment of a prize is made; The first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the state until half of the initial number of continuous games (20 games or 50 games) is completed when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started. The latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the state after half of the initial continuous games have been completed.

In case of winning index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or winning index value IV=18 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. A display corresponding to the order is performed, and a display indicating that the "red 7" symbol should be aimed at each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is also performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 32(a2), the dual-use display unit 66 has a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary. A corresponding display is made. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As shown in (a3), a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

When the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or when the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the AT state ST5 is entered. is determined. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped at the first stop, and a notice to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is given, and the player follows the notice. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order and operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. As shown in a3), a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed by using the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, to which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13), the right reel has a predetermined probability (for example, 20%). 32R is first stopped, and a notice to aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML is provided for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the information, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if it is operated, although the "red 7" symbol will stop on the main line ML for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R up to the second stop, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for the third stop will not be displayed on the main line ML. "Red 7" symbol does not stop. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect to expect a transition to the AT state ST5 by using the notification to aim at the "red 7" symbol as described above.

When the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or when the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, there is a notification to aim for the "red 7" symbol as described above. Even if it occurs, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped in the order according to the notification, or if the "red 7" symbol is displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated to stop at the timing of stopping, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol will not be stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Usually replay prizes are established. However, even in this case, the game shifts to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the benefit of the transition to the AT state ST5 from disappearing due to the player's stop operation mode.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the winning index value IV=18 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the first stop is the right reel 32R on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 32(b1). A display corresponding to the stop order in which the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped and the reels to be stopped are arbitrary is performed, and the symbols "BAR" should be aimed at the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. A display indicating that In addition, as shown in FIG. 32(b2), the dual-purpose display unit 66 has a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped for the second stop and the reels for the third stop are arbitrary. A corresponding display is made. Then, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "BAR" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. As shown in b3), the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won, it is confirmed that the player will shift to the AT state ST5 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the index value IV=17 in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In the case of winning and in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the game shifts to the AT state ST5, which is more advantageous than the case of winning with the index value IV=18. Specifically, the number of initial grants in AT state ST5 is larger than in the case of shifting to AT state ST5 under other conditions. In this case, in such a situation, the right reel 32R is stopped at the first stop, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are notified to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, and the order according to the notification is given. 32 (b3) by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As shown in FIG. 2, a "BAR" pattern, a "BAR" pattern and a combination of "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the transition to the AT state ST5, which is more advantageous, is confirmed by utilizing the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even if the index value IV=16, to which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) is obtained. , the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time, and a notice to aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML is given on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in the order according to the notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop until the second stop, the "BAR" symbols stop on the main line ML, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the third stop stop "BAR" on the main line ML. ” The pattern does not stop. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that makes the player expect a shift to the more advantageous AT state ST5 by utilizing the notification of aiming at the "BAR" symbol as described above.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=18 is won, and even if there is a notification to target the "BAR" symbol as described above, the reels are reeled in the order according to the notification. If the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not stopped, or if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated at the timing when the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, The "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are never stop-displayed on the main line ML, and a normal replay prize is established. However, even in this case, after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends, the game shifts to a more advantageous AT state ST5. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage of shifting to the AT state ST5, which is more advantageous, from being lost due to the player's stop operation mode.

Here, the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won, the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML are stopped. Notification is made. On the other hand, in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won, a notice is given to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbols, the "BAR" symbols and the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML. will be As a result, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of the "BAR" symbols, the "BAR" symbols and the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is used to achieve the pseudo-bonus state. In the first half of ST4, it is possible to increase the probability that the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols will stop on the main line ML.

When the index value IV=17 is won, the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Even in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combinations of the "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Even if a combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player will not receive any profit other than the replay. Not granted. In this case, in a configuration in which the first special replay winning data is not set to the index value IV=18, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red" symbol are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. 7" symbol combination to be stopped and displayed, it is necessary to increase the winning probability of the index value IV=17. In the gaming state which is not the bonus state ST4, the probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML increases. On the other hand, as described above, not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=18, and the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the winning probability of the index value IV=17 is provided by notifying to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. The probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is prevented from becoming too high. A predetermined probability can be set.

Further, as already explained, on the right reel 32R, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay prize. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay prize will not be established if the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the second special replay prize when the index value IV=18 is won. In this case, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize will not be established if the "red 7" symbol does not stop. That is, when the right reel 32R is stopped first when the index value IV=18 is won, the reels 32L and 32M are arranged such that the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are given priority over the normal replay winning prize. , 32R in which the stop control is performed, the priority between the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is not set in the stop control, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is established depending on the timing. As a result, when the index value IV=18 is won, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML is stopped. In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV is set to 18 by notifying to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. In the configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set, it is possible to stop display a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing stop order notification control processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the stop order notification control process is executed in step S412 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S1401). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401: NO), the processing after step S1402 is not executed. If the number of bets in the current game is "3" (step S1401: YES), and if the current game state is AT state ST5 (step S1402: YES), an advantageous state notification control process is executed (step S1403). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, the reel 32L that enables the establishment of the first bell prize when any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is notified by the image display device 63 while the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32M and 32R is displayed on the combined display unit 66. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to make it possible. In addition, in the notification control process for the advantageous state, reels that enable establishment of the second bell prize if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 are won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13). Display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is displayed on the image display device 63. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 so as to be notified at .

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), if the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination has won the index value IV=17 (step S1405: YES), the right A setting process of the display data for the first stop is executed (step S1406). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. . The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a red 7 notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1407). FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The notification control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short period (for example, a period of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command (step S1501: YES), it reads the red 7 notification table from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1502). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R The image display device 63 starts to display that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

Returning to the description of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), the index value IV= If 18 is won (step S1408: YES), it is determined whether or not the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1409). As already explained, the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the situation until half of the initial number of continuous games (20 games or 50 games) is completed when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started. The latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is the state after half of the initial continuous games have been completed.

If the situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1409: YES), display data setting processing for the right first stop is executed (step S1410). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. . The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a red 7 notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1411). When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be of any type. The image display device 63 is caused to start the display corresponding to a certain stop order and the display indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

If the situation is the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1409: NO), the display data setting process for the right first stop is executed (step S1412). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. . The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, a BAR notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1413). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command in the notification control process (FIG. 34) (step S1503: YES), it reads the BAR notification table from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1504). As a result, the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be the second and third stop targets are arbitrary, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R The image display device 63 starts to display that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 33), if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1404: YES), the index value IV= If neither 17 nor 18 is won (step S1408: NO), other processing is executed (step S1414). In other processing, if any of the index values IV=1 to 6 is won in the winning lottery processing (FIG. 13), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of the first bell prize are selected. A display corresponding to the stop order is displayed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified by the image display device 63. A command for doing so is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . In other processes, if the role lottery process (FIG. 13) is elected to either the index value IV = 7 to 9, the reel 32L, 32m, which will be able to establish a second bell prize. A display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32R is displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second bell prize is notified by the image display device 63. A command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 to make it so.

In the other processes, if the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV=16 for which only the normal replay winning data is set, the information lottery process is executed. 7" Information When winning (the winning probability is 20%, for example), a red 7 informing command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . When the production side MPU 92 receives the red 7 notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be of any type. The image display device 63 is caused to start the display corresponding to a certain stop order and the display indicating that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated. In this case, the display data setting process for the right first stop is not executed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop reels 32L and 32M are displayed on the combined display section 66. , 32R are not displayed in any stop order.

In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=16, to which only the normal replay winning data is set, is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination, the information lottery process is executed. When "BAR" notification winning (the probability of winning is, for example, 10%) is obtained, a BAR notification command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the BAR notification command, as already explained, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for the second stop and the third stop are arbitrary. The image display device 63 is caused to start the display corresponding to the stop order and the display indicating that the player should aim for the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated. In this case, the setting processing of the display data for the right first stop is not executed, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second and third stop reels 32L and 32M are displayed on the combined display section 66. , 32R are not displayed in any stop order.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The pseudo-bonus process is executed at step S605 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18).

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S1601). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1601: NO), the processes after step S1602 are not executed. As a result, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is not subtracted.

In the case of the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 35) itself is not executed. The number of games played in the state is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Therefore, even if the transition to the CB state occurs in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is resumed from the state of the remaining number of continuous games immediately before the transition to the CB state after the end of the CB state. .

If the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S1601: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1602). After that, it is determined whether or not the player has won the index value IV=17 in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game (step S1603). If the index value IV=17 is won (step S1603: YES), 1 is added to the value of the transfer advantage counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1604). The transition-time advantage counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is terminated, and to specify the advantage of the AT state ST5 when transitioning to the AT state ST5. is a counter. The transition advantage counter is cleared to "0" when transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Also, in step S1604, the value of the transition-time advantage counter is incremented by 1, and the larger the value of the transition-time advantage counter, the greater the number of initial grants of the AT state ST5 after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Become. Therefore, the more times the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the more advantageous the AT state ST5 will occur after that.

After that, a first advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the 1 addition is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1605). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous occurrence command in the effect control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), the table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous occurrence command is retrieved from the effect-side ROM 93. It is read out to the effect side RAM 94 . As a result, when the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 produce an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed. If the value of the transition advantage counter becomes 2 or more after the addition of 1, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker provide an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, in which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous. 62 and image display device 63 .

Returning to the description of the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 35), if the winning of the index value IV=18 is made in the lottery processing (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game (step S1606: YES), the current situation is the pseudo-bonus state ST4. (step S1607: NO), 1 is added to the transition-time advantage counter in the main RAM 74 (step S1608). If 1 is added in step S1608 in a situation where the value of the advantageous transition counter is "0", the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed, and the value of the advantageous transition counter is 1 or more. If 1 is added in step S1608, the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

After that, a first advantageous generation command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 1 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after the 1 addition is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1609). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the first advantageous occurrence command in the effect control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), the table corresponding to the information of the first advantageous occurrence command is retrieved from the effect-side ROM 93. It is read out to the effect side RAM 94 . As a result, when the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 produce an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed. If the value of the transition advantage counter becomes 2 or more after the addition of 1, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker provide an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, in which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous. 62 and image display device 63 .

Returning to the description of the pseudo-bonus process (FIG. 35), in the case of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game, the index value IV=18 is won (step S1606: YES), and the current situation is a pseudo-bonus. If it is in the second half of the bonus state ST4 (step S1607: YES), 2 is added to the transition advantage counter value of the main RAM 74 (step S1610). If 2 is added in step S1610 when the value of the advantageous transition counter is "0", the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 is confirmed, and the value of the advantageous transition counter is 1 or more. If 2 is added in step S1610 in a certain situation, the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

Thereafter, a second advantageous occurrence command including information that the transition advantageous counter has been incremented by 2 and the value of the transition advantageous counter after 2 is added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1611). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the second advantageous occurrence command in the effect control process (FIG. 34), in other processing (step S1513), the table corresponding to the information of the second advantageous occurrence command is retrieved from the effect-side ROM 93. It is read out to the effect side RAM 94 . As a result, if the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes "2" after adding 2, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 provide an effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 is confirmed. , and if the value of the transition advantage counter becomes 3 or more after the addition of 2, the upper lamp 61 displays an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, in which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous. , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 .

If the process of step S1605 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, if the process of step S1609 is executed, or if the process of step S1611 is executed, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0". ” (step S1612). If the value of the pseudo bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S1612: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the transfer advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1613).

If the transition-time advantage counter value is 1 or more (step S1613: YES), it means that the conditions for transitioning to the AT state ST5 have been met in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1614). Thereafter, setting processing for the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S1615). In the setting process, the initial grant number corresponding to the value of the transfer advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is selected, and the selected initial grant number is set in the AT continuation counter 74 e of the main RAM 74 . Specifically, if the value of the advantageous transition counter is "1", "200" is selected as the initial grant number, and if the value of the advantageous counter during transition is "2", "300" is selected as the initial grant number. If the value of the advantageous counter at the time of transition is "3", then "400" is selected as the initial grant number. Each time you do, the initial grant number is increased by "100". As a result, the greater the value of the transition-time advantage counter, the more advantageous the AT state ST5 is generated.

After that, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1616). Then, an AT shift command indicating that the shift to the AT state ST5 occurs is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1617). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the value of the transition-time advantage counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1613: NO), the process of setting the end preparation state ST6 is executed (step S1618). In the setting process, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST6 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST6. Also, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1619). Also, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S1620). When receiving the bonus end command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the winning determination process is executed in step S512 of the reel control process (FIG. 17).

If the first special replay winning prize (the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML is stopped) in this game (step S1701: YES), If the current situation is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1702: YES), the first special establishment command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1703). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), the first special establishment table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, the effect indicating that the first special replay winning prize has been established, that is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed on the upper lamp. 61 , speaker 62 and image display device 63 .

As already explained, when the index value IV=17 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, regardless of the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the pseudo-bonus processing (Fig. 35 ) in step S1605, based on the transmission of the first advantageous generation command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, if the value of the transition time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, the AT state The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 produce an effect indicating that the transition to ST5 has been confirmed. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the established AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. In addition, when the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing (Fig. 35) based on the transmission of the first advantageous generation command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 in step S1609 of 35), if the value of the transition time advantage counter becomes "1" after adding 1, AT The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the transition to the state ST5 has been confirmed. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 in which is determined has become more advantageous. Further, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, if the index value IV=18 is won, regardless of the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the pseudo-bonus processing (Fig. In step S1611 of 35), based on the transmission of the second advantageous generation command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92, it is advantageous if the value of the transition time advantage counter becomes "2" after adding 2. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed, and if the value of the advantage counter at the time of transition becomes 3 or more after adding 2, The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

On the other hand, when the first special replay prize is established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as described above, the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML are stopped. The upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute a red 7 completion effect indicating that the red 7 has been displayed. In this case, the red 7 establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. After the red 7 establishment effect is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed or indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. The effect shown is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Also, in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=17 is won, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. When the notification was executed but the first special replay prize was not established, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol were not stop-displayed on the main line ML. is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 has been confirmed or an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous is performed for a specific period (eg, 10 seconds). Also, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 is won, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be aimed. If the first special replay winning prize is not established even though the notification indicating that is executed, the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML. After an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has not occurred is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 is confirmed or the AT state ST5 becomes more advantageous. is performed for a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (Fig. 36), if the second special replay winning (the combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols, and "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is stopped) in this game, If there is (step S1705: YES), if the current situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1706: YES, step S1708: YES), the second special establishment command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1709). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second special establishment command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1507: YES), the second special establishment table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1508). As a result, the effect indicating that the second special replay winning prize has been established, that is, the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern, and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML are the upper lamp 61 and the speaker. 62 and image display device 63 .

As already explained, when the index value IV=18 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the pseudo-bonus processing is performed after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating regardless of the stop result of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Based on the transmission of the second advantageous occurrence command from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 in step S1611 of FIG. Effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and the value of the transition-time advantage counter becomes 3 or more after 2 is added. If there is, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

On the other hand, when the second special replay prize was established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as described above, the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol were stopped and displayed on the main line ML. A BAR establishment effect indicating that is executed by the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 . In this case, the BAR establishment effect is executed before the effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed or the effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. . After the BAR establishment effect has been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed or that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. is performed for a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Also, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 is won, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be aimed. is executed, but if the second special replay winning prize is not established, it means that the combination of "BAR" symbols, "BAR" symbols and "BAR" symbols was not stop-displayed on the main line ML. After the shown effect has been performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an effect indicating that the transition to the advantageous AT state ST5 has been confirmed or indicates that the AT state ST5 has become more advantageous. An effect is performed over a specific period (for example, 10 seconds).

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 36), when the first special replay winning has been established in the current game (step S1701: YES), and the current situation is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1702: NO). , the first irregular command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1704). In addition, when the second special replay prize has been established in the current game (step S1705: YES) and the current situation is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1706: NO), the first irregular command is sent to the production side MPU 92. (step S1707). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first irregular command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1509: YES), the first irregular table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1510). When the first irregular table is read out, a notification sound is output from the speaker 62 as the first irregular notification sound so that the player can recognize that the replay winning has been established. The content of the notification sound is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the replay winning has been established.

Even if the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the gaming state which is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the privilege of replaying is provided. Benefits other than replay benefits are not granted. In this case, when a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo bonus state ST4, a first irregular notification is given. By outputting a sound, benefits other than the privilege of replaying are provided even though the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. It is possible to make the player recognize that it will not be done.

When the first irregular table is read out, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are not on the main line ML in the gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The notification corresponding to the stopped display of the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol is not executed. As a result, the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML in the gaming state which is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is too conspicuous. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

Returning to the description of the winning determination process (FIG. 36), if the second special replay winning has been established in the current game (step S1705: YES) and the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1706 : YES, step S1708: NO), the second irregular command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1710). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the second irregular command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1511: YES), the second irregular table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1512). When the second irregular table is read out, the speaker 62 emits a second irregular notification sound, and the combination of the "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML stops. A notification sound is output that enables the player to recognize that the same profit as that displayed is given. The content of the notification sound is to inform the player that the same profit as when the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is given. Although it is optional if it can be recognized, for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when Red 7 is established." is output.

Even if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the privilege of replaying is given and the main-side RAM 74 is stored. Only 1 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter, and 2 is not added to the value of the transition advantageous counter. In this case, when the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output. By doing so, although the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "RED 7" symbol and the "RED 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible for the player to recognize that only the same profit as when the combination of the symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stop-displayed is awarded.

When the second irregular table is read out, the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not emit any sound on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. The notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns is not executed. As a result, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is prevented from becoming too conspicuous. It becomes possible to

In the winning judgment process (FIG. 36), other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S1711). In other processing, processing other than steps S1701 to S1710 among the processing corresponding to the winning result in the current game is executed.

Next, the operation contents when the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize is established in each game state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 37(a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 37(b) shows the period of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and FIG. 37(c) shows the period of the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. 37(d) shows the timing when the index value IV=17 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), and FIG. 37(e) shows the winning of the index value IV=18 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). FIG. 37(f) shows a notification indicating that the first stop is the right reel 32R and that the symbol "red 7" should be aimed at on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (hereinafter referred to as "red 7"). 7 notification) is performed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 37(g) shows that the first stop is the right reel 32R, and "BAR 37(h) shows a period during which the image display device 63 is performing notification indicating that the symbol should be aimed at (hereinafter referred to as BAR notification), and FIG. Fig. 37(i) shows the timing when the combination of the "7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed. FIG. 37(j) shows the period during which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, and FIG. 37(k) illustrates the period during which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62. Indicates a period.

First, the case of the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c), a new game is started at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination wins the index value IV=17. be started. Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R according to the Red 7 notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop, aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the first special replay prize is established at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stop-displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the game will shift to the AT state ST5 after the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends.

After that, a new game is started at the timing t3 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV=18. Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 37(f). Then, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R according to the Red 7 notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop, aiming at the "Red 7" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the first special replay prize is established at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stop-displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the AT state ST5, to which the transition has already been confirmed, has become more advantageous.

After that, at time t5, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV=18. Since the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, red 7 notification is started at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 37(f). However, although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to stop the right reel 32R at the first stop, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are pressed aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML without following the Red 7 notification. By performing the stop operation, the second special replay prize is established at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the "BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(k), the sound "It's the same as when Red 7 is established." As a result, although the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "RED 7" symbol, the "RED 7" symbol and the "RED 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. 7” It is possible to make the player aware that only the same profit as when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed is awarded.

Next, the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

In the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 37(b) and 37(c), a new game is started at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination wins the index value IV=18. Since the current situation is the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the BAR notification is started at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 37(g). Then, the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R according to the BAR notification, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. As a result, the second special replay prize is established at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the "BAR" pattern are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a more advantageous AT state ST5 will occur.

Next, the case where the state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a new game is started at timing t10 as shown in FIG. 37(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination wins the index value IV=17. However, since the situation is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f). Although the red 7 notification is not executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R, and the stop button 42 is aimed at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. . . 44 is operated to stop, the first special replay prize is established at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 37(h). That is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stop-displayed on the main line ML. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(j), the sound "Replay!" is output from the speaker 62 as the first irregular notification sound from timing t11 to timing t12. As a result, although the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the player is made aware that no benefit other than the benefit of replaying is given. It is possible to

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37(b), a new game is started as shown in FIG. 37(a) at the timing of t13 in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 37(e), the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination wins the index value IV=18. However, since the situation is not in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the red 7 notification is not started as shown in FIG. 37(f), and the BAR notification may be started as shown in FIG. 37(g). do not have. Although the BAR notification is not executed, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped so as to first stop the right reel 32R, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 aim at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. is operated to stop, the second special replay prize is established at the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 37(i). That is, the combination of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the "BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed on the main line ML. In this case, the sound "Replay!" is output from the speaker 62 as the first irregular notification sound from timing t14 to timing t15 as shown in FIG. 37(j). As a result, although the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the player can be made aware that no benefit other than the benefit of replaying will be given. It becomes possible.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=17, and the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set to the index value IV=18. In the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won, the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols on the main line ML are stopped. Notification is made. On the other hand, in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the index value IV=18 is won, a notice is given to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbols, the "BAR" symbols and the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML. will be As a result, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=18 for stopping the combination of the "BAR" symbols, the "BAR" symbols and the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is used to achieve the pseudo-bonus state. In the first half of ST4, it is possible to increase the probability that the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols will stop on the main line ML.

When the index value IV=17 is won, the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Even in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combinations of the "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Even if a combination of ``red 7'', ``red 7'' and ``red 7'' symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in a gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player is provided with a profit other than replaying. not. In this case, in the situation where the first special replay winning data is not set to the index value IV=18, the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. 7" symbol combination to be stopped and displayed, it is necessary to increase the winning probability of the index value IV=17. In the gaming state which is not the bonus state ST4, the probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML increases. On the other hand, as described above, not only the second special replay winning data but also the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=18, and the index value IV=18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, the winning probability of the index value IV=17 is provided by notifying to stop the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML. The probability that the combinations of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is prevented from becoming too high. A predetermined probability can be set.

On the right reel 32R, between the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol, there are more symbols than 4 symbols, which is the number of symbols corresponding to the maximum sliding number. Therefore, when the index value IV=18 is won, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the first special replay prize. In this case, the "BAR" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the second special replay prize will not be established if the "BAR" symbol does not stop. In addition, the right stop button 44 is operated to stop the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML of the right reel 32R with the aim of establishing the second special replay prize when the index value IV=18 is won. In this case, the "red 7" symbol will not stop on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize will not be established if the "red 7" symbol does not stop. That is, when the right reel 32R is stopped first when the index value IV=18 is won, the reels 32L and 32M are arranged such that the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize are given priority over the normal replay winning prize. , 32R in which the stop control is performed, the priority between the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is not set in the stop control, and the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44. It is possible to select which one of the first special replay winning prize and the second special replay winning prize is established depending on the timing. As a result, when the index value IV=18 is won, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML is stopped. In the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV is set to 18 by notifying to stop the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. In the configuration in which the first special replay winning data and the second special replay winning data are set, it is possible to stop display a combination of symbols suitable for each situation on the main line ML.

Winning index value IV=17 or 18 in a gaming state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" or "BAR" on the main line ML; Even if the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are stop-displayed, the privilege of replaying is given, but the benefit other than the privilege of replaying is not given. In this case, in a gaming state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" or "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" on the main line ML. By outputting the first irregular notification sound when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol and the "Red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. or a combination of 'BAR' patterns, 'BAR' patterns and 'BAR' patterns are stop-displayed, but the player can be made to recognize that no profit other than the privilege of replaying is given.

In particular, as the first irregular notification sound, a voice saying "It's a replay" indicating that a replay privilege has been given is output. As a result, in a game state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the index value IV=17 or 18 is won, and a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols or "BAR" is displayed on the main line ML. symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbol are stop-displayed, the player can be made to recognize that only the benefit of replaying has been awarded.

Although the right reel 32R is first stopped when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won in the gaming state which is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the symbols "RED 7", "RED 7" and "RED 7" are displayed on the main line ML. If the combination of "Red 7" symbol or the combination of "BAR" symbol, "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol are not stop-displayed, the first irregular notification sound is not output. This makes it possible to prevent excessive output of the first irregular notification sound.

When the first irregular table is read out, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are not on the main line ML in the gaming state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols or the combination of "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" symbols are stopped and displayed. . As a result, in a gaming state that is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" or "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" on the main line ML. It is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the symbol combination from being too conspicuous.

When the second special replay prize is established in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the speaker 62 emits a second irregular notification sound, and "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" are displayed on the main line ML. A notification sound is output that enables the player to recognize that the same profit as when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed is awarded. The content of the notification sound is to inform the player that the same profit as when the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is given. Although it is optional if it can be recognized, for example, a voice saying "It's the same as when Red 7 is established." is output. Even if the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the privilege of replaying is given and the main-side RAM 74 is stored. Only 1 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter, and 2 is not added to the value of the transition advantageous counter. In this case, when the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the combination of the "BAR" symbols are stop-displayed on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output. By doing so, although the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are displayed on the main line ML. It is possible for the player to recognize that only the same profit as when the combination of the symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stopped is displayed.

When the second irregular table is read out, the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 do not emit any sound on the main line ML in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern and the combination of the "BAR" patterns is not executed. Thus, in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbols on the main line ML is prevented from becoming too conspicuous. It becomes possible to

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in the processing configuration of the winning determination process. The configuration different from that of the second embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the second embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing winning determination processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

The processing contents of steps S1808 to S1812 when the second special replay winning has been established (step S1807: YES) and the other processing contents of step S1813 are the same as the winning judgment processing (FIG. 36) in the second embodiment. are the same as steps S1706 to S1711 of . In addition, when the first special replay prize is established in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the processing in step S1803 is the same as the prize determination processing in the second embodiment (Fig. 36) is the same as step S1704.

When the first special replay winning (combination of "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "red 7" symbol on the main line ML is stopped) is established in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S1801: YES, Step S1802: YES), the current situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and it is determined whether or not the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the current game has won the index value IV=18 (step S1804). . If the current situation is the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, or if the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in the current game has won the index value IV=17 (step S1804: NO), the first special establishment command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1805). When the effect side MPU 92 receives the first special establishment command in the effect control process (FIG. 34) (step S1505: YES), the first special establishment table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S1506). As a result, the effect indicating that the first special replay winning prize has been established, that is, the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML is displayed on the upper lamp. 61 , speaker 62 and image display device 63 .

If the current situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the winning combination in the current game has won the index value IV=18 (step S1804: YES), the first stop is the right reel. 32R, the right reel 32R is first stopped and each reel 32R, 32L, 32M, and 32R, despite the fact that BAR notification indicating that a "BAR" symbol should be aimed on the main line ML is being performed. At 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stop buttons 42 to 44 were operated to stop aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML, and the first special replay prize was established. 7” symbol, “red 7” symbol and combination of “red 7” symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, the third irregular command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1806).

When the effect side MPU 92 receives the third irregular command, it reads out the third irregular table from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 . When the third irregularity table is read out, the "BAR" pattern, the "BAR" pattern, and the combination of the "BAR" patterns are stopped and displayed on the main line ML as the third irregularity notification sound from the speaker 62. A notification sound is output so that the player can recognize that the same profit as in the case is awarded. The content of the notification sound is such that the player can recognize that the same profit as when the "BAR" symbol, the "BAR" symbol, and the combination of the "BAR" symbol are stopped and displayed on the main line ML. If there is, it is optional, but for example, a voice saying "It's the same as BAR establishment" is output.

According to the above configuration, in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R is set to the first position even though the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) and the BAR is notified. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are stopped while aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the first special replay prize is established, that is, the main line When the combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the ML, the combination of "BAR", "BAR" and "BAR" symbols on the main line ML. A third irregular notification sound is output, which enables the player to recognize that the same profit as when is stopped is displayed. As a result, although the combination of "Red 7", "Red 7" and "Red 7" symbols was stopped and displayed on the main line ML, "BAR", "BAR" and " It is possible to make the player recognize that the same profit as when the combination of "BAR" symbols is stopped is displayed.

When the third irregular table is read out, the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, but the index value IV=18 in the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. In spite of winning , the notification corresponding to the stopped display of the combination of the 'red 7' pattern, the 'red 7' pattern and the 'red 7' pattern on the main line ML is not executed. As a result, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the combination of "red 7", "red 7" and "red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed on the main line ML even though the index value IV=18 is won. It is possible to prevent the notification corresponding to what has been done from being too conspicuous.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the game contents of the AT state ST5 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing AT state processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . As already described, the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed at step S904 in the advantageous state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 22).

On condition that both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S1901: NO), the value of the additional period counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not the present condition is the add-on period by determining whether or not (step S1902). The add-on period is a period during which the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is more likely to increase than in the situation where the add-on period does not occur in the AT state ST5. The add-on period counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current situation is the add-on period, and if it is the add-on period, the remaining number of continuous games during the add-on period.

If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is not the add-on period (step S1902: NO), one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in this game. (Step S1903: YES), lottery processing for shifting to the additional period is executed (Step S1904). In the lottery process for transitioning to the addition period, a lottery counter periodically updated in the table for addition transition lottery provided in the main-side ROM 73 and the main-side RAM 74 is used to determine by lottery whether or not to shift to the addition period. decide.

The add-on period includes a first add-on period and a second add-on period. In the second addition period, the expected value for increasing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is set higher than in the first addition period. Therefore, both the first addition period and the second addition period are more advantageous for the player than the situation where the addition period is not in the AT state ST5, but the second addition period is more advantageous for the player than the first addition period. be advantageous.

Specifically, regarding the lottery process for transition to the additional period, if the index value IV = 11 is won, the transition to the first additional period will be won with a probability of 8%, and the second addition period will be won with a probability of 2%. It will be elected to transition to the period, and it will be out with a probability of 90%. If the index value IV = 12 is won, there is a probability of 4% that it will be elected to transition to the first additional period, a probability of 1% will be elected to transition to the second additional period, and a probability of 95% will be lost. becomes. If the index value IV = 13 is won, there is a 30% probability that it will be elected to transition to the first additional period, a 10% probability will be elected to transition to the second additional period, and a 60% probability will be lost. becomes. If the index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 25% probability that it will be selected for the transition to the first additional period, a 5% probability that it will be selected for the transition to the second additional period, and a 70% probability that it will be lost. becomes. If the index value IV = 15 is won, there is a probability of 8% that it will be elected to transition to the first addition period, a probability of 2% will be elected to transition to the second addition period, and a probability of 90% will be lost. becomes.

When the transition to the first addition period is won in the lottery process for transition to the addition period (step S1905: YES), the first addition winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906 ). The first add-on win flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the transition to the first add-on period has been won. Also, a winning command for the first addition period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1907). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the winning command for the first additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the effect indicating that the transition to the first additional period has been won. do.

If the transition to the second addition period is won in the lottery process for the transition to the addition period (step S1905: NO, step S1908: YES), the second addition winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". set (step S1909). The second add-on win flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the transition to the second add-on period has been won. Also, a winning command for the second addition period is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S1910). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the winning command for the second additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the effect indicating that the transition to the second additional period has been won. do.

In addition, when the lottery process for transition to the additional period results in a loss (step S1905: NO, step S1908: NO), other processes are executed (step S1911). In the other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1103 to S1118 of the AT state processing (FIG. 24) at game start in the first embodiment is executed.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . The AT process is executed in step S606 in the corresponding process (FIG. 18) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed later.

When the value of the bet number setting counter of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2001: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter of the main RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether it is the first addition period or the second addition period (step S2002). If the value of the add-on period counter is "0" and it is neither the first add-on period nor the second add-on period (step S2002: YES), either the first add-on winning flag or the second add-on winning flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003).

If either the first add-on win flag or the second add-on win flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), the add-on period counter of the main side RAM 74 is set to "10" (step S2004). This results in an add-on period. Also, a start command for the additional period is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2005). In this case, if the first add-on win flag is set to "1", information indicating that it is the first add-on period is included in the add-on period start command, and the second add-on win flag is set to "1". If it is set, information indicating that it is the second add-on period is included in the add-on period start command. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the start command of the additional period including the information of the first additional period, the effect corresponding to the first additional period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. , when a start command of the additional period including information of the second additional period is received, the performance corresponding to the second additional period is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁

When the value of the additional period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2002: NO), the value of the additional period counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2006). Then, if the value of the add-on period counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2007: YES), the first add-on winning flag and the second add-on winning flag in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0" ( step S2008). In addition, it transmits the end command of the additional period to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2009). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the end command of the additional period, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect corresponding to the end of the additional period.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, if the process of step S2005 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2007 or if the process of step S2009 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2010). In other processing, processing corresponding to steps S1202 to S1215 of the AT processing (FIG. 25) in the first embodiment is executed. In this case, if the value of the add-on period counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more, that is, if it is the first add-on period or the second add-on period, the subtraction process of the AT continuation counter 74e in step S1204 is not executed. As a result, the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 does not decrease during the first extra period or the second extra period.

Returning to the description of the AT state processing at the start of the game (FIG. 39), when the value of the addition period counter of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more, that is, when it is the first addition period or the second addition period (step S1902: YES), the process for the additional period is executed (step S1912). FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing processing for an additional period.

If the second addition winning flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), it means that the current addition period is the first addition period. The lottery table for the period is read (step S2102). On the other hand, if the second addition winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), it means that the current addition period is the second addition period. The lottery table for the second addition period is read out to the side RAM 74 (step S2103).

When the processing of step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, the additional lottery processing for the additional period is executed (step S2104). In the additional lottery process, lottery numerical information is acquired from the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired lottery numerical information is stored in the lottery table read out to the main RAM 74 in step S2102 or step S2103. match against. In the addition lottery process for the addition period, the number of grants of 10 or more is selected without being lost.

After that, the addition number selected in the addition lottery process for the addition period (step S2104) is added to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 (step S2105). In addition, a command during the addition period including the information of the added grant number is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2106). When the command is received during the addition period, the MPU 92 on the performance side executes the performance that enables the player to recognize the given number added this time by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁

FIG. 42 shows the selection mode of the number of grants when the extra lottery process for the extra period (step S2104) is executed with reference to the lottery table for the first extra period, and the lottery table for the second extra period. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of selection of the number of grants when the addition lottery process for the addition period (step S2104) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the first additional period, 10 tokens are selected with a probability of 25%, 20 tokens are selected with a probability of 25%, and 30 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%. is selected, 40 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 50 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 60 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 5 A given number of 80 is selected with a probability of 5%, and a given number of 100 is selected with a probability of 5%. In this case, the lottery table for the first addition period is set so that a game in which an index value IV with a low winning probability is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 13) is likely to select a larger number of awards. there is In the first addition period, the number of grants that can be selected are all multiples of "2".

As shown in FIG. 42, in each game during the second addition period, 60 tokens are selected with a probability of 20%, 80 tokens are selected with a probability of 20%, and 100 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%. is selected, 120 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 140 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 160 cards are selected with a probability of 10%, 10 180 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%, and 200 tokens are selected with a probability of 10%. In this case, the lottery table for the second addition period is set so that a game in which an index value IV with a low winning probability is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 13) is likely to select a larger number of awards. there is In the second addition period, the number of grants that can be selected are all multiples of "4". Also, the expected value of the number of grants selected in each game and the expected value of the number of grants granted in the entire add-on period are higher in the second add-on period than in the first add-on period.

Next, the contents of the effects executed by the image display device 63 during the first additional period and the second additional period will be described.

FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the effects executed by the image display device 63 during the first addition period.

As shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c), the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into left and right halves during the first addition period. The left area A1 and the right area A2 divided into two have substantially the same shape and size. In the left area A1 and the right area A2, moving image displays G21 and G22 for effects and a given number notification display G23 are performed, respectively. and the right area A2. Specifically, in FIG. 43(a), the moving image display G21 for effect is performed in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2. It is the same as A2. Also, in FIG. 43(b), the moving image display G22 for effect is performed in each of the left area A1 and the right area A2. are identical. In addition, in FIG. 43(c), the given number notification display G23 is performed in each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2. It's becoming

Specifically, regarding the given number notification display G23 shown in FIG. 43(c), an image of "+40" is displayed as the given number notification display G23 in each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2. This indicates that 80 tokens were awarded in the game during the first extra period. As already explained, the number of grants that can be selected in the first addition period is all multiples of "2". Therefore, regardless of the number of grants selected in the first addition period, the number of grants notification display G23 corresponding to the number of grants obtained by dividing the number of grants by "2" is displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2. Each can be done.

In the configuration in which the same moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are performed respectively in the left area A1 and the right area A2 in which the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two in the first addition period, these Various information displays G31 to G35, which are not images with the same content, are displayed in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c), a remaining continuous game number image G31 for reporting the remaining number of continuous games during the first addition period is displayed only in the left area A1. . In addition, the acquired number display image G32 for reporting the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining awarded number display image G33 for reporting the remaining number of given game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the right area A2. Is displayed.

In AT state ST5, reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing a first bell prize or a second bell prize when any one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). However, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order is the left area A1 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. and across the boundary of the right area A2. Also, the operation device 121 for presentation (see FIG. 45) may be operated to change, add, or advance the content of moving image display on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 43(b). Thus, the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the effect operation device 121 is displayed straddling the boundary between the left area A1 and the right area A2 regardless of the division of the left area A1 and the right area A2. The effect operating device 121 is provided on the front face of the slot machine 10 . As shown in FIG. 43(b), the situation in which the operation notification image G35 is displayed is the operation effective period during which the operation of the production operation device 121 is valid, and the production operation device 121 is operated during the operation effective period. 43(c), the given number notification display G23 is performed in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2.

FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution contents of the effects executed by the image display device 63 during the second addition period.

In the second addition period, as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided vertically and horizontally into four. The upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 that are divided into four have substantially the same shape and size. In the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, moving image displays G41 and G42 for effects and a given number notification display G43 are performed, respectively. The contents of G42 and the given number notification display G43 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Specifically, in FIG. 44A, the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 each display a moving image G41 for effect. The contents of the moving image display G41 are the same in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. Also, in FIG. 44(b), the moving image display G42 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The contents of G42 are the same for the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. In addition, in FIG. 44(c), the given number notification display G43 is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The contents of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 are the same.

In detail, the given number notification display G43 shown in FIG. 44(c) is "+50 sheets" as the given number notification display G43 in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. image is displayed. This indicates that 200 tokens were awarded in the game during the second extra period. As already explained, the number of grants that can be selected in the second addition period is all multiples of "4". Therefore, regardless of the number of grants selected in the second addition period, the number of grants corresponding to the number of grants obtained by dividing the number of grants by "4" is displayed in the upper left region A11 and the upper right region. A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, respectively.

In the second addition period, the same animation display G41, G42 for effect is performed in each of the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 obtained by dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into four. and in the configuration in which the given number notification display G43 is performed, various information display G31 that is not an image displayed with the same content in each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14 ~G35 is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c), a remaining continuous game number image G31 for reporting the remaining number of continuous games during the second addition period is displayed only in the upper left area A11. be. In addition, the acquired number display image G32 for reporting the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5 and the remaining awarded number display image G33 for reporting the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 are displayed only in the upper right area A12. to be displayed.

Reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing a first bell prize or a second bell prize when any one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the AT state ST5. As shown in FIG. 44(a), the stop order notification image G34 for notifying the stop order includes an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower left area A13. It is displayed across the boundary between the lower left area A13 and the lower right area A14 regardless of the division of the lower right area A14. Also, the operation device 121 for presentation (see FIG. 45) may be operated to change, add, or advance the content of moving image display on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 44(b). Thus, the operation notification image G35 for prompting the operation of the production operation device 121 is divided into the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. It is displayed straddling the boundaries of the side area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14. The effect operating device 121 is provided on the front face of the slot machine 10 . As shown in FIG. 44(b), the situation in which the operation notification image G35 is displayed is the operation effective period during which the operation of the production operating device 121 is valid, and the production operating device 121 is operated during the operation valid period. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(c), a given number notification display G43 is performed in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14.

An electrical configuration for enabling image display in the first additional period and the second additional period as described above will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

45, a memory module 101, a VRAM 102, and a video display processor (VDP) 103 are mounted on the performance control board 91 of the performance control device 90 in addition to the performance side MPU 92.

The production side MPU 92 has a function as a main control section in the production control device 90, and reads, interprets and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the effect side MPU 92 is connected via a bus to an input port 104 mounted on the effect control board 91, and various commands transmitted from the main side MPU 72 are input to the effect side MPU 92 through the input port 104. be done. Receiving a command from the main MPU 72 in the production side MPU 92 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the main side MPU 72, but includes the configuration of receiving the command relayed to the relay board.

The effect-side MPU 92 is connected to the VDP 103 via a bus, and instructs the image display device 63 to output an image signal based on the command received from the main-side MPU 72 . The VDP 103 reads the image data stored in the memory module 101 to the VRAM 102 based on the drawing instruction from the production side MPU 92, and uses the read image data to specifically process the image display device 63. It is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 63b incorporated in the image display device 63 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 63a. Since the VDP 103 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing.

The memory module 101 preliminarily stores various image data including sprite data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the image display device 63, background data, moving image data, and the like. The memory module 101 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply to retain data. Also, the memory module 101 is used as a read-only memory (ROM) when the slot machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. there is Background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which still image data is compressed. The moving image data is stored and held as MPEG format data in which a plurality of still image data are compressed.

The VRAM 102 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the image display device 63 . The VRAM 102 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. Although the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the effect control device 90 is executed satisfactorily. The VRAM 102 is used for both reading and writing when using the slot machine 10 .

The VRAM 102 has a development buffer 105 . Image data is transferred from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 103 to the memory module 101 . The VRAM 102 is also provided with a frame buffer 106 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 103 . Note that the VRAM 102 may be incorporated in the VDP 103 .

The VDP 103 will be explained in detail. The VDP 103 includes a control section 111 , a register 112 , a video decoder 113 and a display circuit 114 . These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 115 for the MPU 92 on the production side and the I/F 116 for the VRAM 102 .

The VDP 103 causes the register 112 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the production side MPU 92 . By storing the drawing list in the register 112, the control unit 111 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes predetermined processing. It should be noted that all of the control programs for the operation of the control unit 111 may be provided by the drawing list. may be configured such that the control unit 111 executes a predetermined process. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 101 in advance.

As the above process, the control unit 111 reads the image data stored in the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 . Also, the control unit 111 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 106 using (or by processing) the image data read out to the expansion buffer 105 . Drawing data for one frame means data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface of the image display device 63 is updated at a predetermined update timing. .

The frame buffer 106 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 106a and 106b. Specifically, a first frame region 106a and a second frame region 106b are provided. Each of these frame areas 106a and 106b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 106a and 106b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 63a (that is, the display surface) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

Since the frame buffer 106 is provided with the first frame area 106a and the second frame area 106b, the drawing data created in one of the frame areas is used to perform drawing on the image display device 63. , creation of drawing data to be used in the future for other frame regions is executed. In other words, the frame buffer 106 employs a double buffer method.

In the display circuit 114, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 63a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 106a or the second frame area 106b. It is output to the image display device 63 via the connected output port 107 . Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 114 from the frame regions 106a and 106b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the image display device 63 and converted into gradation data. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the image display device 63 is generated and output. The video decoder 113 also decodes the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 .

Next, a processing configuration for enabling image display in the first additional period and the second additional period will be described. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, effect setting processing for setting data used for executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 is executed (step S2201). Thereafter, display control processing (step S2202) for outputting a drawing list to the VDP 103 based on the data set in the effect setting processing, and light emission control of the upper lamp 61 based on the data set in the effect setting processing. light emission control processing (step S2203) and sound output control processing (step S2204) for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the data set in the effect setting processing. Also, pointer update processing is executed (step S2205). In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the table read out to the effect side RAM 94 in the effect setting process is updated to the pointer information of the next order.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing the effect setting process for the add-on period for performing the process related to the add-on period in the effect setting process of step S2201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 46).

When the winning command for the first addition period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the first winning correspondence table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2302). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the first winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs light emitting performance corresponding to winning during the first additional period, and the speaker 62 indicates winning during the first additional period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to winning in the first extra period is performed on the image display device 63 . After that, "1" is set to the first addition effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2303). The first add-on effect flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that a win has been made during the first add-on period.

If the winning command for the second addition period has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the second winning correspondence table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2305). Execution control of the performance is performed according to the second winning correspondence table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs light emitting performance corresponding to winning during the second extra period, and the speaker 62 announces winning during the second extra period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to winning during the second extra period is performed on the image display device 63 . After that, the second addition effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2306). The second addition effect flag is a flag for specifying that the effect side MPU 92 wins during the second addition period.

When the start command of the additional period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2307: YES), the period start table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2308). In this case, when the first additional period is newly started, the period start table corresponding to the first additional period is read, and when the second additional period is newly started, the period corresponding to the second additional period is read. Read start table. By controlling the execution of the effect according to the period start table, the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission effect corresponding to the first additional period or the second additional period, and the speaker 62 performs the first additional period or the second additional period. A corresponding sound output effect is performed, and a display effect corresponding to the first additional period or the second additional period is performed on the image display device 63 . After that, the addition period flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2309). The add-on period flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the effect corresponding to the first add-on period or the second add-on period is being executed.

When the command during the addition period is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2310: YES), the number of grants selected this time is grasped from the information included in the command during the addition period (step S2311). After that, when "1" is set to the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2312: YES), readout processing of the first addition effect table is executed (step S2313). A plurality of types of first addition effect tables are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93 for each of the number of grants (see FIG. 42) that can be selected in the first addition period. In the reading process of the first addition effect table, the first addition effect table to be used this time is determined by lottery from among the first addition effect table group corresponding to the given number grasped in step S2311. Then, the determined type of first addition effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 . By controlling the execution of the effects according to the first additional effect table, the upper lamp 61 performs light emission effects for one game during the first additional effect period, and the speaker 62 outputs sound for one game during the first additional effect period. An effect is performed, and a display effect for one game is performed on the image display device 63 in the first additional period. In this case, when the image display device 63 performs the display effect for one game in the first additional period, the image display as shown in FIGS. 43(a) to 43(c) is performed.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set to the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94, that is, if "1" is set to the second addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2312: NO) , read processing of the second addition effect table is executed (step S2314). The effect-side ROM 93 stores in advance a plurality of types of second addition effect tables for each of the number of grants (see FIG. 42) that can be selected in the second addition period. In the reading process of the second addition effect table, the second addition effect table to be used this time is determined by lottery from the second addition effect table group corresponding to the number of grants grasped in step S2311. Then, the second addition effect table of the determined type is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 . By performing execution control of the effect according to the second additional effect table, the upper lamp 61 performs light emission effect for one game during the second additional effect period, and the speaker 62 outputs sound for one game during the second additional effect period. An effect is performed, and a display effect for one game is performed on the image display device 63 in the second additional period. In this case, when the image display device 63 performs the display effect for one game in the second additional period, the image display as shown in FIGS. 44(a) to 44(c) is performed.

In the situation where the addition period flag of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2315: YES), if it is the operation effective period of the production operation device 121 (step S2316: YES), the production operation It is determined whether or not the device 121 has been operated (step S2317). The operation effective period of the effect operating device 121 is set as a period in the middle of one game in the first additional period or the second additional period. An operation notification image G35 as shown in FIG. 43(b) or FIG. 44(b) is displayed on the image display device 63 during the operation valid period.

When the operating device 121 for production|presentation is operated (step S2317: YES), an operation corresponding process is performed (step S2318). In the operation gymnastics process, the part to be referred to in the first additional effect table or the second additional effect table read out to the effect side RAM 94 is changed to the corresponding part after the operation of the operation device 121 for effect. As a result, the image display device 63 performs the given number notification display G23 or G43 as shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c).

If the addition period end command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2319: YES), the period end table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S2320). By controlling the execution of the effect according to the period end table, the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission effect corresponding to the end of the first additional period or the second additional period, and the speaker 62 performs the first additional period or the second additional period. A sound output effect corresponding to the end of the second addition period is performed, and a display effect corresponding to the end of the first addition period or the second addition period is performed on the image display device 63. - 特許庁Thereafter, flag clear processing is executed (step S2321). In the flag clearing process, the addition period flag, the first addition effect flag and the second addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing display control processing for the additional period for performing processing related to the additional period among the display control processing in step S2202 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 46).

When "1" is set in the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2401: YES), the 2-split specification information is stored in the register of the effect side MPU 92 (step S2402), and read out to the effect side RAM 94. From the data to be referred to in this processing round in the table to be referred to among the period start table and the first additional effect table, animation display G21 for effect is displayed in the left area A1 and right area A2 of the image display device 63. , G22 or the number-of-additions notification display G23 (step S2403), and parameters to be applied to the image data on the division side are grasped (step S2404). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to the image data on the division side.

When the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referred to, and when the game is currently being executed, the first addition effect table is the table to be referred to. In the period start table and the first additional effect table, the division-side image data corresponding to the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 are not individually set, but the division side image data corresponding to the left side area A1 is set. Only data is set, and in step S2403, the image data on the divided side is grasped. Information about the image data on the divided side thus grasped is set in a drawing list and transmitted to the VDP 103 . Based on the rendering list, the VDP 103 reads out the image data on the divided side from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and uses the read image data on the divided side to display a moving image display G21 for effect in the left area A1. Drawing data for performing G22 or G23 for notifying the number of additions is created, and the drawing data is copied as drawing data for the right side area A2. As a result, it is not necessary to separately set the information of the image data on the division side corresponding to the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 in the period start table and the first additional effect table. It is possible to suppress the data capacity of the table. In addition, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data separately for each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, it is possible to reduce the processing load of drawing processing.

As described above, in the first addition effect table, the information of the image data on the division side necessary for performing the award number notification display G23 is set only for the left side area A1. On the other hand, in the effect setting process for the addition period (FIG. 47), when the command is received during the addition period, the number of grants selected in the addition lottery process for the current addition period (step S2104) is grasped. The given number is the sum of the given number notified by the given number notification display G23 in the left area A1 and the given number notified by the given number notification display G23 in the right area A2. Therefore, the information of the division-side image data necessary for performing the award number notification display G23 set in the first addition effect table is the award number set in the command during the addition period, that is, in step S2311. It is image data information indicating a quotient value obtained by dividing the grasped number of grants by "2".

When "1" is not set to the first addition effect flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S2401: NO), the 4-division designation information is stored in the register of the effect side MPU 92 (step S2405), and read to the effect side RAM 94. From the data to be referred to in this processing cycle in the table to be referred to among the period start table and the second addition effect table, the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, and lower left area A13 of the image display device 63 And grasp the image data on the division side necessary to perform the animation display G41, G42 for effect or the number notification display G43 for effect in the lower right area A14 (step S2406), and apply it to the image data on the division side The parameters to be used are grasped (step S2407). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to the image data on the division side.

When the game is not currently being executed, the period start table is the table to be referred to, and when the game is currently being executed, the second addition performance table is the table to be referred to. In addition, in the period start table and the second additional effect table, image data on the division side corresponding to the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13 and lower right area A14 are individually set. Instead, only the image data on the division side corresponding to the upper left area A11 is set, and in step S2406, the image data on the division side is grasped. Information about the image data on the divided side thus grasped is set in a drawing list and transmitted to the VDP 103 . Based on the drawing list, the VDP 103 reads out the divided image data from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and utilizes the read divided image data to display a moving image G41 for effect in the upper left area A11. , G42 or G43, and copy the drawing data to the upper right area A12 side, the lower left area A13 side, and the lower right area A14 side. . Accordingly, it is necessary to individually set the information of the division side image data corresponding to the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14 in the period start table and the second additional effect table. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the data capacity of the period start table and the second addition effect table. In addition, since the VDP 103 does not need to create drawing data individually for each of the upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13, and lower right area A14, the processing load of the drawing process can be reduced. becomes possible.

As described above, in the second addition effect table, the information of the image data on the division side necessary for performing the award number notification display G43 is set only for the upper left area A11. On the other hand, in the effect setting process for the addition period (FIG. 47), when the command is received during the addition period, the number of grants selected in the addition lottery process for the current addition period (step S2104) is grasped. The number of grants is the number of grants notified by the number of grants notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the number of grants notified by the number of grants notification display G43 in the upper right area A12, and the number of grants in the lower left area A13. It is the total amount of the number of grants notified by the notification display G43 and the number of grants notified by the number of grant notification display G43 in the lower right area A14. Therefore, the information of the image data on the division side necessary for performing the grant number notification display G43 set in the second addition effect table is the grant number set in the command during the addition period, that is, in step S2311. It is information of image data indicating the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the grasped number of grants by "4".

When the process of step S2404 or step S2407 is executed, the history image data corresponding to the game history is grasped (step S2408). The history image data includes image data for displaying the remaining continuous game number image G31, image data for displaying the obtained number display image G32, and image data for displaying the remaining given number display image G33. . Based on the various commands received from the main MPU 72, the effect-side MPU 92 determines the number of remaining continuous games in the first additional period or the second additional period, the number of game media acquired in the AT state ST5, and the remaining game media in the AT state ST5. can be specified, and history image data corresponding to the specified various information is grasped in step S2408. Also, parameters to be applied to the grasped history image data are grasped (step S2409). This parameter includes information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to history image data, and is fixed information. This fixed information is preset in the performance-side ROM 93 .

After that, if the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified (step S2410: YES), the stop order image data for displaying the stop order notification image G34 to be displayed this time is grasped ( step S2411). Based on various commands received from the main side MPU 72, the effect side MPU 92 determines whether or not the situation is such that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be notified. The type can be specified, and the stop order image data is grasped in step S2411 according to the specified various information. Also, parameters to be applied to the grasped stopping order image data are grasped (step S2412). This parameter includes information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to stop-order image data, and is fixed information. This fixed information is preset in the performance-side ROM 93 .

When a negative determination is made in step S2410 or when the process of step S2412 is executed, it is determined whether or not the operating device 121 for presentation has been operated during the operation effective period of the operating device 121 for presentation (step S2413). Whether or not it is the operation effective period of the operation device 121 for production is specified from the first addition production table or the second addition production table read out to the production side RAM94. When the effect operating device 121 is operated during the operation effective period (step S2413: YES), the first additional effect table or the second additional effect table read out to the effect side RAM 94 is referred to in this processing cycle. Operation effect image data for displaying the operation notification image G35 is grasped from the data to be applied (step S2414), and parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are grasped (step S2415). The parameters include information such as coordinates, magnification, and α value applied to the operation effect image data, and are fixed information.

If a negative determination is made in step S2413 or if the process of step S2415 is executed, a drawing list output process is executed (step S2416). In the drawing list output process, information of various image data grasped in steps S2401 to S2415, parameters to be applied to the various image data, and other information are set in the drawing list, and the drawing list after setting is transmitted to the VDP 103. do. In this case, if the 2-split designation information is stored in the register of the effect-side MPU 92 in step S2402, the 2-split designation information is set in the drawing list, and in step S2405 the 4-split designation information is set in the effect-side MPU 92. When stored in the register, the 4-division designation information is set in the drawing list.

The VDP 103 reads the image data from the memory module 101 into the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 according to the received rendering list, and creates rendering data in the frame buffer 106 in a state in which parameters are applied and various processing is performed on the read image data. It is set in the target frame areas 106a and 106b. As a result, the drawing data corresponding to the drawing list is created in the frame areas 106a and 106b, and the created drawing data is set in the image processing device 63b of the image display device 63, whereby the image corresponding to the drawing data is generated. It is displayed on the image display device 63 .

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing the divided image rendering process executed by the VDP 103 in the first superimposed period or the second superimposed period. FIGS. 50(a) to 50(d) are explanations for explaining how drawing data is created in the drawing target frame areas 106a and 106b of the frame buffer 106 by executing the drawing processing of the divided image. It is a diagram.

If the received drawing list has 2-split designating information (step S2501: YES), the image data on the split side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. Along with this (step S2502), parameters to be applied to the image data on the division side are grasped from the drawing list (step S2503). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2503 applied, the image data on the division side read out to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2502 is selected from the first and second frame regions 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 as the drawing target. is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b (step S2504). In this case, the parameters grasped in step S2503 are set with the coordinates and magnification for drawing the image data on the divided side grasped in step S2502 in the left area A1 of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. ing. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(a), among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered, a first section area DA1 corresponding to the left side area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two. The image data D1 is drawn. The image data D1 on the division side is data for displaying the moving image display G22 for effect, and the same applies to the case where the moving image display G21 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are performed.

After that, the image data D1 on the division side drawn in the first section area DA1 at the time of division into two is divided into two corresponding to the right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. It is copied to the second interval area DA2 of the hour (step S2505). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same division side is applied to each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. The image data D1 is drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, parameters to be applied to the history image data are read out from the drawing list, and the history image data read out in step S2506 are drawn in the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn (step S2506). S2507). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(c), image data D2 corresponding to the number-of-remaining-games image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the number-of-acquired-games display image G32, and image data D3 corresponding to the number-of-acquired-games display image G32 are displayed in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The image data D4 corresponding to the given number display image G33 is drawn. In this case, the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, and the remaining given number display image G33 are displayed in front of the effect animation displays G21 and G22 and the given number notification display G23. D2 to D4 are overwritten in the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn with the opaque α value applied to the image data D1 on the divided side. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the stop order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2508: YES). S2509). Then, parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read out from the drawing list, and in step S2509 the read stop order image data are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be the drawing target in a state in which the read parameters are applied. (Step S2510). Therefore, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in the frame area to be drawn so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G21 and G22 for effect and the number notification display G23. In 106a and 106b, the image data D1 on the division side is overwritten with an opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the operation effect image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation effect image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2511: YES). S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are read out from the drawing list, and the operation effect image data read out in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn in a state in which the read parameters are applied. (Step S2513). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is rendered in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. In this case, the image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is displayed in the frame area 106a to be drawn so that the operation notification image G35 is displayed in front of the moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the number notification display G23. , 106b, the image data D1 on the division side is overwritten with the opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

If 2-split designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2501: NO), that is, if 4-split designation information is set, the split-side image data set in the drawing list is The data is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2514), and the parameters to be applied to the image data on the divided side are grasped from the drawing list (step S2515). Then, in a state in which the parameters grasped in step S2515 are applied, the image data on the divided side read out to the expansion buffer 105 in step S2514 is selected from the first and second frame regions 106a and 106b in the frame buffer 106 as the drawing target. are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b (step S2516). In this case, the parameter grasped in step S2515 is set with the coordinates and magnification for drawing the image data on the divided side grasped in step S2514 in the upper left region A11 of the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn. It is Therefore, the image data on the divided side is drawn in the first section area at the time of the 4-division corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn.

After that, the image data on the division side drawn in the first section area at the time of the 4-division is applied to the image data at the time of the 4-division corresponding to the upper right area A12 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. , the third divided area corresponding to the lower left area A13, and the fourth divided area corresponding to the lower right area A14 (step S2517). As a result, each of the first divided area when divided into four, the second divided area when divided into four, the third divided area when divided into four, and the fourth divided area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn is obtained. , the image data of the same divided side is drawn.

After that, the history image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2506). Then, parameters to be applied to the history image data are read out from the rendering list, and the history image data read in step S2506 are rendered in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered (step S2506). S2507). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the remaining number of continuous games image G31, the image data corresponding to the obtained number display image G32, and the image data corresponding to the remaining given number display image G33 are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. state. In this case, the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, and the remaining given number display image G33 are displayed in front of the effect animation displays G41 and G42 and the given number notification display G43. is overwritten in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered with an opaque α value applied to the image data on the divided side. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the stop-order image data is set in the drawing list (step S2508: YES), the stop-order image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2508: YES). S2509). Then, parameters to be applied to the stop order image data are read out from the drawing list, and in a state in which the read parameters are applied, the stop order image data read out in step S2509 are drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. (Step S2510). Therefore, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. In this case, the image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 is drawn in the frame area to be drawn so that the stop order notification image G34 is displayed in front of the animation displays G41 and G42 for effect and the number notification display G43. In 106a and 106b, the image data on the division side is overwritten with the opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

After that, if the operation effect image data is set in the drawing list (step S2511: YES), the operation effect image data set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2511: YES). S2512). Then, the parameters to be applied to the operation effect image data are read out from the drawing list, and the operation effect image data read out in step S2512 is drawn in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn in a state in which the read parameters are applied. (Step S2513). Therefore, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is rendered in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. In this case, the image data corresponding to the operation notification image G35 is displayed in the frame areas 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106a, 106-1, 106-1, 106-1, 106-1, respectively. In 106b, the image data on the divided side is overwritten with the opaque α value applied. However, it may be configured to blend while applying a translucent α value.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

By setting the image data D1 at the time of division to each of the first divisional area DA1 at the time of division into two and the second divisional area DA2 at the time of division into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, the image display device 63 Moving image displays G21 and G22 for effects and a given number notification display G23 are displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2 on the display surface, respectively. As a result, when the moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are displayed respectively in the left area A1 and the right area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63, the same image data can be used to display two images. It is only necessary to set the same image data D1 at the time of division for each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of division into two. Therefore, the display on the image display device 63 can be favorably performed.

The image data D1 at the time of division drawn using the image data in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division is copied to the second divided area DA2 at the time of division, so that the second divided area DA2 at the time of division Image data D1 at the time of division is set. As a result, the processing load is reduced compared to a configuration in which image data is used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division for each of the first divided area DA1 at the time of division and the second divided area DA2 at the time of division. becomes possible. Further, it is possible to set the image data D1 at the time of division in the second divided area DA2 at the time of division using the image data D1 at the time of division rendered in the first divided area DA1 at the time of division.

The left area A1 and the right side area A1 and the right side area A1 of the image display device 63 are displayed in a state in which the same moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the number notification display G23 are displayed in the left area A1 and the right area A2, respectively. A remaining continuous game number image G31, an acquired number display image G32, a remaining awarded number display image G33, a stop order notification image G34, and an operation notification image G35, which are not images displayed with the same content, are displayed in each of the areas A2. As a result, attention is drawn to the effect moving image displays G21 and G22 and the given number notification display G23 displayed in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, respectively, and the effect moving image displays G21 and G22 and the given number notification display G23 are displayed. The display contents different from the left area A1 and the right area A2 are displayed independently of the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, the remaining awarded number display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation It becomes possible to provide by the notification image G35. Therefore, the display on the image display device 63 can be favorably performed.

With moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and award number notification display G23 displayed in left area A1 and right area A2, respectively, a remaining continuous game number image G31, an acquired number display image G32, and a remaining award number display image G33 are displayed. , the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed. Since it is displayed as if it exists in front of the area A1 and the right area A2, the remaining continuous game number image G31, the acquired number display image G32, the remaining awarded number display image G33, the stop order notification image G34, and the operation notification image. It becomes possible to make G35 stand out.

The moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 are displayed within the ranges of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2, respectively, while the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 are displayed in the left side area A1. and the left area A1 and the right area A2 so as to straddle the boundary of the right area A2. As a result, it is possible to display the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 in sizes larger than those of the moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the number of bonuses notification display G23.

In the first addition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into left area A1 and right area A2. It is divided into four areas, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower right area A14. As a result, it is possible to diversify the display contents when displaying the moving image displays G21, G22, G41 and G42 for effect and the given number notification displays G23 and G43 using a plurality of display areas.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in the processing configuration of the divided image drawing processing. The configuration different from that of the fourth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing divided image drawing processing in this embodiment executed by the VDP 103 .

If the received drawing list contains information specifying the division into two (step S2601: YES), the image data on the division side set in the drawing list is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102. Along with this (step S2602), parameters to be applied to the image data on the divided side are grasped from the drawing list (step S2603). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2603 applied, the divided image data read out to the development buffer 105 in step S2602 is rendered in the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2604).

After that, magnification setting processing for dividing into two is executed (step S2605). In the magnification setting process when dividing into two, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2604 corresponds to the left side area A1 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The size of the drawing data is changed so as to be the same as the size of the first section area DA1 when divided into two. Then, the drawing data after the size change is divided into the first section area DA1 corresponding to the left side area A1 on the display surface of the image display device 63 and the image display area of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. It is copied to each of the second section areas DA2 at the time of division corresponding to the right area A2 of the display surface of the device 63 (step S2606). As a result, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the same division side is applied to each of the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. The image data D1 is drawn.

After that, the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The processing contents of steps S2607 to S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2506 to S2513 in the divided image rendering process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment.

If the 2-split designation information is not set in the received drawing list (step S2601: NO), that is, if the 4-split designation information is set, the split-side image data set in the drawing list is The data is read from the memory module 101 to the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2615), and the parameters to be applied to the image data on the divided side are grasped from the drawing list (step S2616). Then, with the parameters grasped in step S2616 applied, the divided image data read out to the development buffer 105 in step S2615 is rendered in the development buffer 105 of the VRAM 102 (step S2617).

After that, magnification setting processing for 4-division is executed (step S2618). In the magnification setting process for the 4-division, the size of the drawing data drawn in the expansion buffer 105 in step S2617 is set to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn. The size of the drawing data is changed so as to be the same as the size of the corresponding first section area when divided into four. Then, the drawing data after the size change is applied to the first section area when divided into four corresponding to the upper left area A11 of the display surface of the image display device 63 among the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn, and the image display. The second segmented region corresponding to the upper right region A12 of the display surface of the device 63, the third segmented region corresponding to the lower left region A13 of the display surface of the image display device 63, and the image display device 63 are copied to each of the fourth partitioned areas corresponding to the lower right area A14 of the display surface of (step S2619). As a result, each of the first section area when divided into four, the second section area when divided into four, the third section area when divided into four, and the fourth section area when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn is obtained. , the image data of the same divided side is drawn.

After that, the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 is executed. The processing contents of steps S2607 to S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2506 to S2513 in the divided image rendering process (FIG. 49) in the fourth embodiment.

According to the above configuration, the image data on the divided side is once drawn in the expansion buffer 105 of the VRAM 102, and the drawn image data on the divided side is displayed in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn in the case of two-split display. is copied to each of the first section area when divided into two and the second section area when divided into two, and the first section when divided into four in the frame areas 106a and 106b to be drawn when performing a four-split display. 2nd section area when divided into 4 areas, 3rd section area when divided into 4 areas, and 4th section area when divided into 4 areas. As a result, the image display device can perform two-split display without drawing data drawn in a part of the frame regions 106a and 106b to be drawn in other regions of the frame regions 106a and 106b. It is possible to display the same moving image displays G21 and G22 for effect and the given number notification display G23 in the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 of 63, respectively. It is possible to display the same animation displays G41 and G42 for effect and the given number notification display G43 in the upper left area A11, the upper right area A12, the lower left area A13, and the lower right area A14, respectively.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the image display device 63 when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the display contents of the image display device 63 when the AT state ST5 ends are different from those of the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIGS. 52(a) to 52(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends.

In the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, the rotation stop operation is performed on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the image display device 63 starts to display a bonus end image G51 (specifically, a character image of "Bonus End") as a bonus end display. The content of the bonus end display is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the transition to the AT state ST5 does not occur. A character image may be used, and a character image indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended may be displayed along with a background image or character image.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second) has passed since the bonus end display was started, the image display device 63 displays the bonus end image G51 as shown in FIG. As a warning display, a warning image G52 (specifically, a character image of "play in moderation") is started to be displayed. The caution display is a display (“addiction prevention display”) for calling attention to the player's addiction to the game in order to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. In the present slot machine 10, a character image reading "Play in moderation" is displayed as the warning image G52, but the specific display content is arbitrary as long as it is possible to encourage the prevention of addiction. Alternatively, a character image may be displayed in accordance with the background image or the character image to encourage prevention of immersion.

The caution display is maintained for a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds). In this case, when the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends and the bet setting for the game medium for starting the next game is performed, as shown in FIG. 52(c). As shown, the bonus end display that has been displayed on the image display device 63 is ended, and the display of the image G53 of the normal game state ST1 is started. At this point, however, the attention image G52 is displayed. is started, the display of the attention image G52 is maintained in the situation where the image G53 of the normal game state ST1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52(c). be. The display of the caution image G52 ends when a predetermined display duration has elapsed after the start of the display of the caution image G52 even during the newly started game in the normal game state ST1.

On the other hand, if a new bet setting is not made within a predetermined display continuation period from the start of the display of the attention image G52 in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to the AT state ST5, The display of the caution image G52 ends while the display of the bonus end image G51 continues. In this case, the display contents of the image display device 63 are as shown in FIG. 52(a).

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus processing in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The pseudo-bonus processing is executed at step S605 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 18) in the same manner as in the first embodiment. , the pseudo-bonus processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S2701: YES), the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2702). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter after subtracting 1 is "0", thereby determining whether or not the game to be finished this time is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S2703). If the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is not "0" (step S2703: NO), this pseudo-bonus process is terminated without executing the process for terminating the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2704. If the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2703: YES), the process for terminating the pseudo-bonus state ST4 after step S2704 is executed.

In the process for terminating the pseudo-bonus state ST4, first, by determining whether or not the AT transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the transition to the AT state ST5 is made in the present pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is determined whether or not the transition condition is satisfied (step S2704). If the AT shift confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2704: YES), it means that the conditions for shifting to the AT state ST5 have been met in the current pseudo-bonus state ST4. In this case, first, the pseudo-bonus status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2705). After that, the information corresponding to "200", which is the initial assignment number of the AT state ST5, is set in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2706). Also, the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2707). Then, an AT shift command indicating that the shift to the AT state ST5 occurs is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2708). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the AT transition command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the performance indicating that the transition to the AT state ST5 will occur.

On the other hand, if the AT transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2704: NO), it means that the conditions for transition to the AT state ST5 have not been met in the current pseudo bonus state ST4. In this case, processing for ending the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process for the second section SC2 is executed (step S2709). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. Also, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the initialization process of the second interval SC2, the AT continuation counter 74e and the AT state flag of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". As a result, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, the section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state (step S2710). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a bonus end command indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended without transitioning to the AT state ST5 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2711). When receiving the bonus end command, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the pseudo bonus state ST4 has ended.

FIG. 54(a) is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The effect control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

If the AT shift command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2801: YES), an AT shift display setting process is executed (step S2802). In the AT transition display setting process, data for causing the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is terminated and the AT state ST5 is started. Settings are made. Note that when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the AT state ST5 is entered, the warning display is not executed.

If the bonus end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2803: YES), the bonus end display setting process is executed (step S2804). In the bonus end display setting process, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended without transitioning to the AT state ST5. data is set. In this case, as the data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, the data enabling execution of the bonus end display is set in the effect side RAM94. As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying a bonus end image G51 as shown in FIG. 52(a).

After that, setting processing of the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S2805). As shown in FIG. 54(b), which is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the effect-side RAM 94, the warning display start timer counter 131 is provided in the effect-side RAM 94. As shown in FIG. The attention display start timer counter 131 is a counter used by the effect side MPU 92 to measure a predetermined period from when the bonus end display is started until when the attention display is started. In step S2805, information corresponding to a value for measuring one second as the predetermined period is set in the start timer counter 131 for warning display.

If the process of step S2802 has been executed, if the determination in step S2803 is negative, or if the process of step S2805 has been executed, other processes are executed (step S2806). In other processes, processes for executing effects different from the various effects described above in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 are executed.

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the control processing of various end displays executed by the MPU 92 on the effect side. Control processing for various end displays is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

If the image display device 63 is displaying the end of the bonus or displaying the end of the AT, which will be described later (step S2901: YES), it is determined whether or not a game medium bet has been set for starting a new game. (Step S2902). When a game medium bet setting is performed by inserting a medal into the medal slot 45 or operating the credit insert buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where a new game can be started, the main MPU 72 executes a command corresponding to the bet setting. is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the production side. The command is transmitted each time one or more game media are betted, but may be configured to be transmitted when the number of game media capable of starting the game has been betted. When the effect-side MPU 92 has received the command, it judges that a game medium bet setting for starting a new game has been performed, and makes an affirmative determination in step S2902.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, end processing of the end display being executed is executed (step S2903). In the end processing, when the bonus end display is being executed, the data for executing the bonus end display is erased, and the display of the image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of the normal game state ST1 is started. Make data settings so that As a result, the state in which the bonus end display is being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is ended when a bet is set for starting a new game, and the state is changed to the normal game state. The display of the image G53 of ST1 is started. Note that even if the termination process is executed in a situation where the caution display is being performed on the image display device 63, the caution display is continued without being terminated. Also, if the end processing is executed in a situation where the AT end display is being executed, the AT end display will end, and the details of this will be described later.

FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing control processing of caution display executed by the effect side MPU 92 . The attention display control process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

If the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more (step S3001: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the warning display start timer counter 131 (step S3002). If the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3003: YES), a caution display setting process is executed (step S3004). In the warning display setting process, data is set so that the image display device 63 executes a warning display to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. As a result, the caution image G52 starts to be displayed while the bonus end image G51 is being displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 52(b). On the other hand, data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 is not set in the caution display setting process. As a result, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 continue the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 has ended. display can be started. However, it is not limited to this, and when the caution image G52 starts to be displayed, the upper lamp 61 may be configured to emit light accordingly, and when the caution image G52 starts to be displayed. Alternatively, the speaker 62 may output corresponding sounds.

After that, setting processing of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is executed (step S3005). As shown in FIG. 54(b), a warning display continuation timer counter 132 is provided in the effect-side RAM 94. As shown in FIG. The caution display continuation timer counter 132 is a counter used by the effect side MPU 92 to measure a predetermined display duration from the start of the caution display to the end of the caution display. In step S3005, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as the predetermined display continuation period is set in the caution display continuation timer counter 132 . The value set in the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is decremented by 1 each time the effect-side MPU 92 periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) executes a timer update process.

In the caution display control process, if the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more (step S3006: YES), the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is subtracted by 1 (step S3007). If the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3008: YES), the caution display termination process is executed (step S3009). In the termination process, the data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the attention display is being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is irrespective of whether or not the game medium bet setting for starting a new game is executed. It ends when a predetermined display continuation period has passed since the warning display started.

FIG. 57 is a time chart showing how the bonus end display and caution display are executed when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends. FIG. 57(a) shows the period during which the game is being executed, FIG. 57(b) shows the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and FIG. is performed, FIG. 57(d) shows the period during which the interval display section 67 is lit, FIG. 57(e) shows the period during which the bonus end display is executed, and FIG. f) indicates the period during which the caution display is executed.

First, the case where the warning display ends before the next game is started for the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 is started. After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 57(b), all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game stop rotating. At the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the extinguished state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 ends. Also, at the timing t2, the bonus end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(e).

After that, at timing t3 when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has elapsed from timing t2, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(f). In this case, the image display device 63 starts the warning display while the bonus end display is being executed. It should be noted that timing t3 is a situation in which the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and a new game can be started. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and attention must be paid before the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is completed, that is, before the next game can be newly started with respect to the final game. A configuration in which display is started may be employed.

Thereafter, at timing t4, when a predetermined display continuation period (specifically, three seconds) elapses from timing t3, the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(f). In this case, since the bet setting for starting a new game has not yet been performed, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(e).

After that, at the timing of t5, bet setting of game media is performed as shown in FIG. 57(c). The bet setting may be a bet setting for a game medium of "1" by inserting one medal into the medal slot 45, and in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the second bet setting may be set. The bet setting of the game medium "3" may be set by operating the 1 credit insertion button 47, and the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored. It may also be a bet setting of “2” gaming media by chance. At the timing t5, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(e). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1. After that, when the start lever 41 is operated at the timing t6, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 57(a).

Next, a case where the caution display continues even after the next game is started after the last game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 will be described.

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(b) at the timing of t8, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the game is stopped. At the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 57(d), the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the extinguished state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 ends. Also, at the timing t8, the bonus end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(e).

After that, at timing t9 when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has passed from timing t8, the warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57(f). In this case, the image display device 63 starts the warning display while the bonus end display is being executed. Note that timing t9 is a situation in which the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and a new game can be started. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and attention must be paid before the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is completed, that is, before the next game can be newly started with respect to the final game. A configuration in which display is started may be employed.

After that, at timing t10, which is timing before a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) elapses from timing t9, bet setting for game media is performed as shown in FIG. 57(c). . The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game media by inserting one medal into the medal slot 45, and in a situation where three or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored, the second bet setting may be set. The bet setting of the game medium "3" may be set by operating the 1 credit insertion button 47, and the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored. It may be a bet setting of “2” game media depending on the situation. At the timing t10, the bonus end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 57(e). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1. However, since the predetermined display continuation period has not yet passed, the warning display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(f). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(c), the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1 while the attention image G52 is being displayed.

After that, when the start lever 41 is operated at the timing of t11, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 57(a). Even in this case, since the predetermined display continuation period has not yet passed, the warning display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 57(f). After that, at timing t12, which is the timing in the middle of the game started at timing t11, a predetermined display continuation period elapses from timing t9, and as shown in FIG. The warning display ends.

Due to the above configuration, when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends, a warning is displayed on the image display device 63, so that the player does not get absorbed in the game. Attention can be urged. In this case, the caution display is continued for a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) regardless of whether or not the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is finished and a new game is started. be. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to secure an opportunity to confirm the caution display.

While the image display device 63 is displaying the end of the bonus, the warning display is started. As a result, it is possible to start the warning display after the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 will end.

Even if the bonus end display is continued on the image display device 63, the caution display ends when the predetermined display duration has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the warning display from continuing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the AT state ST5 ends.

58 ( As shown in a), as an AT end display, an end clear image G61 (specifically, a character image of "RUSH end") for allowing the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 ends, and the current AT state A total number of games image G62 (specifically, a character image of "680G") indicating the total number of games played in ST5, and a total indicating the total number of game media awarded to the player in the current AT state ST5. The display of the acquisition number image G63 (specifically, the character image of "TOTAL 1800 sheets") is started. The content of the AT end display is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the AT state ST5 ends. At least one of them may be configured not to be displayed.

When the AT state ST5 starts, as already explained, the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is set with information corresponding to the initial grant number "200" of the AT state ST5, and the addition of the grant number is performed. When it occurs, the number of grants to be added is added to the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as in the first embodiment, and a game of 4 or more is played. When the medium is awarded, the number exceeding the bet number "3" is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e after the subtraction becomes "0" AT state ST5 ends at . In this case, in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays a number corresponding to the remaining number of awards stored in the AT continuation counter 74e. Also, in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays the total number of games played in the AT state ST5 and the total number of game media given to the player in the AT state ST5. The display of the total number of games is incremented by 1 each time a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, but this addition is not executed when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. In the display of the total number of game media, when the number of game media exceeding the number of bets is awarded, the number exceeding the number of bets is added.

When a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second) has passed since the AT end display started, as shown in FIG. In the displayed situation, the image display device 63 starts to display a caution image G52 (specifically, a character image of "play in moderation") as a caution display. This attention image G52 is the same as the attention image G52 displayed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5. More specifically, attention image data used for displaying the attention image G52 is stored in advance in the effect-side ROM 93, and attention is given in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5. The same caution image data is used both when the image G52 is displayed and when the caution image G52 is displayed in the final game in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity compared to a configuration in which attention image data corresponding to each situation is prepared. Further, the position and size of the attention image G52 displayed on the image display device 63 are also changed when the attention image G52 is displayed in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve the transition to the AT state ST5, and in the final game of the AT state ST5. This is the same in any case where the attention image G52 is displayed in the game. This makes it possible to share the processing configuration for displaying the attention image G52.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the attention image G52 is displayed in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to the AT state ST5, and when the attention image G52 is displayed in the final game in the AT state ST5. A configuration in which different caution image data is used in each case may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to display a caution image G52 having contents corresponding to each situation. Further, the same attention image data is used when the attention image G52 is displayed in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to the AT state ST5, and when the attention image G52 is displayed in the final game in the AT state ST5. is used, at least one of the position and size of the caution image G52 displayed on the image display device 63 may be different. In this case, it is possible to display the attention image G52 at a position or size suitable for each situation.

As already explained, the caution display is a display (“addiction prevention display”) for calling attention to the player's addiction to the game in order to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game. In the present slot machine 10, a character image reading "Play in moderation" is displayed as the warning image G52, but the specific display content is arbitrary as long as it is possible to encourage the prevention of addiction. Alternatively, a character image may be displayed in accordance with the background image or the character image to encourage prevention of immersion.

The caution display started in the final game in the AT state ST5 is similar to the case where the caution display is started in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5. The display is maintained over the display continuation period (specifically, 3 seconds). In this case, in the final game in the AT state ST5, a freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) for preventing the start of a new game occurs after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped. Then, the warning display is started in the situation of the freeze period, and the predetermined display continuation period elapses after the warning display is started in the situation where the freeze period continues, so the freeze period continues. The warning display ends in this situation. Therefore, the caution display is surely finished before the next game is started after the last game in the AT state ST5.

On the other hand, the AT end display ends when the final game in the AT state ST5 ends and a game medium bet setting for starting the next game is performed. Therefore, in the final game in the AT state ST5, as shown in FIG. Situation in which both caution displays are displayed→The display contents of the image display device 63 are changed so that the AT end display is displayed but the caution display is not displayed as shown in FIG. 58(a). Be changed.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . As in the first embodiment, the AT process is executed in step S606 in the game end response process (FIG. 18). Since it is executed after all the rotations have stopped, the AT processing is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

First, by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3", it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" (step S3101). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3101: NO), the processing after step S3202 is not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the bet number is "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining given number in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and furthermore, in the AT state ST5, the real precursor state or the false precursor state If a state has occurred, the number of standby games for that premonitory state is not decremented.

In the case of the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the AT process (FIG. 59) itself is not executed as in the first embodiment. is started, the game executed in the CB state is not treated as a game completed in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the state is shifted to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of grants immediately before the shift to the CB state after the end of the CB state.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S3101: YES), the process of adding the number of games during AT is executed (step S3102), and the process of updating the net increase during AT is executed (step S3103). In the process of adding the number of games during AT, 1 is added to the value of the counter for the number of games during AT provided in the main RAM 74 . The AT game number counter is a counter for counting the total number of games executed in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. In the process of updating the net increase during AT, if neither the replay winning nor the small winning combination corresponding to the awarding of game media is established in this game, the AT net increase counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is updated. Subtract "3" from the value, and if the replay winning is established in this game, the value of the AT net increase counter is maintained, and if the minor role winning is established in this game, this time The value obtained by subtracting "3" from the number of game media provided in the game is added to the value of the net increase counter during AT. The AT net increase counter is a counter for measuring the increase or decrease in the game media owned by the player in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. A command including the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 each time a game is executed. Based on the reception of the command, the production side MPU 92 updates the display of the total number of games and the display of the total number of game media displayed on the image display device 63 in the AT state ST5.

After that, it is determined whether or not a minor win has been established in the current game, and game media have been awarded in a number exceeding the bet number of "3" (step S3104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first bell winning, second bell winning, first watermelon winning, second watermelon winning and cherry winning has been established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3104, on condition that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3105: YES), subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S3106). . In the subtraction process, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the number of game media awarded in the current game, and the value after the subtraction is subtracted from the AT continuation counter 74e. In step S3106, when the subtracted value is less than "0" and the borrow flag is set to "1", the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is cleared to "0".

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and if game media are awarded in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, the awarded number itself is counted by the AT continuation counter without subtracting the number of bets. It may be configured to subtract from the value of 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total number of game media to be paid out becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number. Further, if game media exceeding the number of bets are awarded or a replay prize is not established, the number of game media of the player reduced by the execution of the game may be added to the AT continuation counter 74e. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends when the total net increase in game media reaches the end reference number or more.

When a negative determination is made in step S3104, when a negative determination is made in step S3105, or when the process of step S3106 is executed, the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3107 : YES), the value of the standby counter 74g is subtracted by 1 (step S3108). If the value of the standby counter 74g after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3109: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the main-side RAM 74 flag (step S3110). ).

If the main precursor flag is set to "1" (step S3110: YES), it means that the precursor state to end this time is the main precursor state. In this case, the processing for adding the remaining number of grants is executed (step S3111). In the addition process, the value set in the planned number counter 74f of the main side RAM 74 is added to the AT continuation counter 74e. As a result, when the final game in the present precursor state ends, the number of game media to be awarded in the present precursor state is added to the remaining number of game media to be awarded in the AT state ST5.

When a negative determination is made in step S3110 or when the process of step S3111 is executed, the main-side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" for each of the true portent flag and the false portent flag (step S3112). As a result, if the current state is the actual portent state, the actual portent state ends, and if the current state is the false portent state, the false portent state ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S3107, if a negative determination is made in step S3109, or if the process of step S3112 is executed, it is determined whether the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0". (step S3113). If the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S3113: YES), it means that the remaining number of game media to be given in the current AT state ST5 is "0". In this case, by determining whether the value of the standby counter 74g of the main-side RAM 74 is "0", it is determined whether the current state is the real portent state or the false portent state (step S3114).

If the current state is neither the real precursor state nor the false precursor state and the value of the standby counter 74g of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S3114: YES), the AT state ST5 and the second interval SC2 are terminated. Execute the process. Specifically, first, an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3115). The AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net addition number counter during AT of the main side RAM 74 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the image display device 63 executes processing for starting the AT end display.

After that, a setting process for the freeze counter is executed (step S3116). In the setting process, information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 . The value set in the freeze counter is decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3117). If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more (step S3117: YES), the process stands by. As a result, the progress of the AT process (FIG. 59) is waited until the freeze period elapses, and the progress of the normal process (FIG. 12) is waited by waiting the progress of the AT process (FIG. 59). It will be.

If the value of the freeze counter is "0" (step S3117: NO), the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S3118). The processing contents of the initialization processing of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization processing of the second section SC2 (step S814) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is maintained. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating . Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the light-out state (step S3119). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3120). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the second section SC2 has ended.

FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the second control process of the game section in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . The second control process for the game section is executed at step S607 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 18) in the same manner as in the first embodiment. Since it is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32M and 32R have stopped, the second control process in the game section is also executed after all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped rotating in one game.

When the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S3201: YES), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1. (step S3202). The number-of-continued-games counter 74c indicates the number of times the game has been executed since the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1, as in the first embodiment. is a counter for specifying by the main MPU 72 .

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c after adding one is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S3203). If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S3203, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 is executed.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S3203: NO), is any of the first-chance replay wins, second-chance replay wins, and normal replay wins established in the current game? It is determined whether or not (step S3204). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", the determination in step S3204 is made, and the current game is normal game state ST1, first CB state ST2, or second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S3204.

If none of the replay winnings have been established (step S3204: NO), the number of bets for this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S3205). . In this case, even if a replay win was established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to a replay due to the establishment of the replay win, the number of bets for this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a value) is subtracted from the total win counter 74d.

As in the first embodiment, the total acquisition number counter 74d counts the amount of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. is a counter for specifying the total net increase in the number of sheets in the main MPU 72 . It should be noted that the restricted total net increase in the number of game media is the same as in the first embodiment described above, which means “the total number of game media provided by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing (the total number of game media "0" in the situation where the provision of is not occurring)" to "the total number of game media consumed to execute the game in the situation where the second section SC2 is continued (in the situation where the game is not executed When the value obtained by subtracting "0") is set as the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. .

After that, in this game, any small role winning prize (1st to 9th supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize and cherry prize) ) is established (step S3206). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", the determination in step S3206 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Any gaming state of the state ST3, the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the AT state ST5 is subject to the determination in step S3206. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S3207).

When a negative determination is made in step S3206, or when the process of step S3207 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S3208). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S3208: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S3209).

As described above, in step S3205, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d. Therefore, for example, in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, any small win is established. Otherwise, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S3208, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S3209. As a result, "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" in the situation where no game medium is awarded)" to "the second section When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game while SC2 is being continued (“0” when the game is not being executed) is set as the predetermined difference number, Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, the total net increase number with limitation of game media, which is the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquisition number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, or if the process of step S3209 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number of "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S3210). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d does not exceed "2400" (step S3210: NO), ending handling processing is executed (step S3217). The contents of the ending handling process are the same as the ending handling process (step S817) of the second control process (FIG. 21) of the game section in the first embodiment. If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, and processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 is executed.

Here, if any of the replay winnings are established, affirmative determination is made in step S3204, and the processing of steps S3205 to S3209 is not executed. In a game in which a replay winning prize is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game is used for setting bets, but as a profit from the replay winning establishment, the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay winning prize was established A new game can be played again with the number of bets. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S3205 to S3209 in a game in which a replay winning has been established, in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total winning number counter 74d is increased. It is possible to omit the execution of processing for changing , and to omit the execution of useless processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay prize has been established, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, although the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, the second Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning has been established. , and the initialization process of the second section SC2 can be executed.

In detail about the processing for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216, first, an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3211). The AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net addition number counter during AT of the main side RAM 74 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the image display device 63 executes processing for starting the AT end display.

After that, a setting process for the freeze counter is executed (step S3212). In the setting process, information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 . The value set in the freeze counter is decremented in the timer subtraction process (step S208) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3213). If the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more (step S3213: YES), it waits as it is. As a result, the progress of the second control process (Fig. 60) of the game section is on standby until the freeze period elapses, and the normal process (Fig. 12) is awaited.

If the value of the freeze counter is "0" (step S3213: NO), the initialization process of the second interval SC2 is executed (step S3214). The processing contents of the initialization processing of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization processing of the second section SC2 (step S814) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is maintained. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating . Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S3215). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3216). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the second section SC2 has ended.

The process for ending the second section SC2 in steps S3211 to S3216 is the same as the process for ending the AT state ST5 in steps S3115 to S3120 of the AT process (FIG. 59). Therefore, when the AT state ST5 ends when the remaining given number becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, or when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 ends. In either case, the freeze period is set, AT end display and caution display are performed on the image display device 63 during the freeze period, and the interval display section 67 is turned off when the freeze period is completed. The content of being in the state is the same.

FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for AT executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The effect control process for AT is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

In step S3301, it is determined whether or not a false portent command has been received from the main MPU 72. As in the first embodiment, the false portent command is a false portent win in the situation where the value of the standby counter 74g is "0" in the AT state processing (FIG. 24) at the start of the game in the main MPU 72. If so (step S1114: YES, step S1115: NO), it is transmitted in step S1117. If a false portent command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S3301: YES), the false portent table is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3302). By controlling the execution of the effects according to the false portent table, the upper lamp 61 performs a light emission effect corresponding to the false portent state, the speaker 62 performs a sound output effect corresponding to the false portent state, and an image is displayed. A display effect corresponding to the false portent state is performed in the device 63 .

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not this portent command has been received from the main MPU 72 . As in the first embodiment, this portent command is issued in step S1112 when the main porter MPU 72 wins the main portent in the AT state processing (FIG. 24) at the start of the game (step S1107: YES). sent. If the present portent command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3303: YES), the grant number selected by the present portent state winning that triggered the transmission of the present portent command is obtained from the information included in the present portent command. It grasps and adds the grasped planned number to the given planned number counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3304). After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is the execution of the false portent state effect (step S3305).

If the false portent state effect is not being executed (step S3305: NO), the main portent table corresponding to the number of remaining games of the portent effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 (step S3306). Specifically, when neither the false portent state effect nor the main portent state effect is executed, the present portent state effect is executed over 10 games, which is the initial number of games of the portent effect. Read this prognostic table to ensure that On the other hand, in the case of the situation in which the production of this portent state is being executed, the production of this portent state corresponding to the planned grant number added by the processing of step S3304 is executed. Read out this precursor table to be executed over the remaining number of games. Execution control of the performance is performed according to the present portent table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission performance corresponding to the present portent state, the speaker 62 performs the sound output performance corresponding to the present portent state, and the image display device. At 63, a display effect corresponding to this precursor state is performed. In the final game in this precursory state, an image for notifying the number of grants corresponding to the value of the expected number counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is displayed. is added to the number of . In the remaining given number display image G12, a number obtained by adding the given number at the end of the current precursor state to the remaining given number until then is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp that the remaining given number has increased due to this precursor state.

If the effect of the false portent state is being executed (step S3305: YES), a process for reading this portent change table from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94 is executed (step S3307). Specifically, the effect of the present portent state corresponding to the expected grant number added by the execution of the processing of step S3304 is executed over the remaining number of games in the effect of the false portent state up to that point. Read this predictor change table for Execution control of the effect is performed according to the main sign change table, so that the upper lamp 61 performs the light emission effect corresponding to the main sign change, the speaker 62 performs the sound output effect corresponding to the main sign change, and the image is displayed. In the display device 63, a display effect corresponding to this precursor change is performed.

In this case, in the final game of the present precursor state corresponding to the change of the present precursor, an effect indicating that the current precursor state was a false precursor state is executed at first, and then it is actually the main precursor state. is executed. In detail, the display effect of the image display device 63 in the final game in the present precursor state corresponding to the change in the precursor state is as follows. shows that the current omen state was a false omen state. A display effect is performed in which the character revives and defeats the enemy character. Then, when an effect indicating that the present precursor state is present is executed, an image for notifying the number of grants corresponding to the value of the expected number of grants counter of the effect-side RAM 94 is displayed, and the display is performed. After that, a display is performed in which the given number is added to the number of the remaining given number display image G12. In the remaining given number display image G12, a number obtained by adding the given number at the end of the current precursor state to the remaining given number until then is displayed. As a result, the player can grasp that the remaining given number has increased due to this precursor state.

Here, when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the precursor effect in the situation where the execution control of the precursor effect is performed according to the precursor change table, the final game At , a resurrection corresponding effect is executed as a different effect from when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. 58(c) in addition to FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b), the resurrection corresponding effect will be described. FIG. 58(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the resurrection effect.

When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the sign effect in the situation where the execution control of the sign effect is performed using this sign change table, the final game Then, in a situation where the AT state ST5 is actually continued, after the performance for making the player aware that the AT state ST5 ends, the resurrection performance for making the player aware that the AT state ST5 will continue is executed. A resurrection corresponding production is executed. Specifically, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, when rotation stop operation is performed on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the image The display device 63 starts to display an AT end display as shown in FIG. 58(a). Further, when a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second) has passed since the AT end display was started, as shown in FIG. starts warning display. After that, when it is time to execute the resurrection effect or when a bet setting is made for starting the next game, as shown in FIG. A resurrection image G64 (specifically, a character image of “still still”) is displayed on the image display device 63 as the resurrection display in . The image content of the resurrection image G64 is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the AT state ST5 will continue. As a result, it is possible to give the player who expected the AT state ST5 to end an unexpected surprise that the AT state ST5 continues, thereby making it possible to improve the interest in the game. In addition, even when the resurrection performance is executed, not only the AT end display but also the caution display is performed in the stage before the resurrection performance, so that the AT state is displayed in the stage before the resurrection performance is executed. When ST5 ends, it becomes easy for the player to think of it.

At step S3308 in the effect control process for AT (FIG. 61), it is determined whether or not the AT end command is received from the main side MPU72. The AT end command is transmitted at step S3115 in the process for AT (FIG. 59) or step S3211 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section as already described. That is, after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the final game of the AT state ST5 and before the freeze period is set, the AT end command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92. be.

If the AT end command has been received (step S3308: YES), AT end display setting processing is executed (step S3309). In the AT end display setting process, data is set so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In this case, as data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, data enabling execution of the AT end display is set in the effect-side RAM 94. FIG. As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying an end clear image G61, a total number of games image G62, and a total number of wins image G63 as shown in FIG. 58(a).

When the AT end display is executed, in the control processing of various end displays (FIG. 55), an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, and whether or not a game medium bet setting for starting a new game has been performed. is determined (step S2902). When a game medium bet setting is performed by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45 or operating the credit insertion buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where a new game can be started, the main MPU 72 executes a command corresponding to the bet setting. is sent to the MPU 92 on the production side. The command is transmitted each time one or more game media are betted, but may be configured to be transmitted when the number of game media capable of starting the game has been betted. If the effect-side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a game medium bet setting has been made for starting a new game, and makes an affirmative determination in step S2902.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the data for executing the AT end display is erased in the end processing of the end display being executed (step S2903), and the image G53 of the normal game state ST1 (see FIG. 52(c)) ) to start displaying. As a result, the state in which the AT end display is being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 is ended when the bet setting for starting a new game is performed, and the normal game state ST1. is started to display the image G53.

After executing the process of step S3309 in the effect control process for AT (FIG. 61), the process of setting the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S3310). The contents of the setting process are the same as those in step S2805 in the pseudo-bonus effect control process (FIG. 54). Specifically, information corresponding to a value for measuring a predetermined period (specifically, one second) from the start of the AT end display to the start of the caution display is stored in the production side RAM 94 as the start of the caution display. Set in the timer counter 131 .

When the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more, as already described, the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is changed by making an affirmative determination in step S3001 in the caution display control processing (FIG. 56). 1 is subtracted (step S3002), and if the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3003: YES), a caution display setting process is executed (step S3004). As a result, the warning image G52 starts to be displayed in a situation where the end clear image G61, the total number of games image G62, and the total number of wins image G63 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 58(b). . As already described, data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 is not set in the caution display setting process. After that, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as a predetermined display continuation period is set in the caution display continuation timer counter 132 (step S3005).

When the value of the caution indication continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more, as already described, the value of the caution indication continuation timer counter 132 is increased by making an affirmative determination in step S3006 in the caution indication control processing (FIG. 56). 1 is subtracted (step S3007), and if the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3008: YES), caution display end processing is executed (step S3009). In the termination process, the data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the caution display is being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the AT state ST5 is irrespective of whether or not the game medium bet setting for starting a new game has been executed. The display is terminated when a predetermined display continuation period has elapsed since the display was started.

In the effect control process for AT (FIG. 61), if the execution control of the effect is performed using this precursor change table (step S3311: YES), the resurrection corresponding effect process is executed (step S3312). FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing the resurrection effect processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game of the omen effect corresponding to the omen change table, and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S3401). ). When starting a new game, the main MPU 72 transmits a game start command to the production MPU 92 in a state in which information corresponding to the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is set. It is possible to grasp whether the value of 74e is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined whether or not a stop instruction command corresponding to the third stop instruction has been received from the main MPU 72 in the current game (step S3402). A stop command command corresponding to the third stop command is issued by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are rotating last, to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This command is sent from the main MPU 72 when a stop command is issued.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, AT end display setting processing is executed (step S3403). The contents of the AT end display setting process are the same as the AT end display setting process executed in step S3309 when the AT end command is received in the effect control process for AT (FIG. 61). As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying an end clear image G61, a total number of games image G62, and a total number of wins image G63 as shown in FIG. 58(a).

After that, setting processing of the warning display start timer counter 131 is executed (step S3404). The processing contents of the setting process are the same as the setting process of the attention display start timer counter 131 executed in step S3310 in the effect control process for AT (FIG. 61). As a result, the information corresponding to the value for measuring the predetermined period (specifically, one second) from the start of the AT end display to the start of the caution display is stored in the caution display start timer counter in the production side RAM 94. Set to 131.

When the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more, as already described, the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is changed by making an affirmative determination in step S3001 in the caution display control processing (FIG. 56). 1 is subtracted (step S3002), and if the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3003: YES), a caution display setting process is executed (step S3004). As a result, the warning image G52 starts to be displayed in a situation where the end clear image G61, the total number of games image G62, and the total number of wins image G63 are displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 58(b). . As already described, data for controlling the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 is not set in the caution display setting process. After that, information corresponding to a value for measuring 3 seconds as a predetermined display continuation period is set in the caution display continuation timer counter 132 (step S3005).

When the value of the caution indication continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more, as already described, the value of the caution indication continuation timer counter 132 is increased by making an affirmative determination in step S3006 in the caution indication control processing (FIG. 56). 1 is subtracted (step S3007), and if the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S3008: YES), caution display end processing is executed (step S3009). In the termination process, the data for executing the warning display is erased. As a result, the state in which the caution display is being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the AT state ST5 is irrespective of whether or not the game medium bet setting for starting a new game has been executed. The display is terminated when a predetermined display continuation period has elapsed since the display was started.

In the resurrection corresponding effect processing (FIG. 62), if affirmative determination is made in step S3401 and negative determination is made in step S3402, the current data to be referred to set in this sign change table is revived. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the generation timing of the effect, or whether or not a game medium bet setting for starting a new game has been performed (step S3405).

As already described, in a situation where the execution control of the precursor effect is performed according to the precursor effect change table, if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the final game of the precursor effect, the final In the game, in a situation where the AT state ST5 is actually continued, a resurrection performance for making the player recognize that the AT state ST5 will continue is executed after the performance for making the player recognize that the AT state ST5 ends. A resurrection corresponding production that becomes is executed. Specifically, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, when rotation stop operation is performed on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the image The display device 63 starts to display an AT end display as shown in FIG. 58(a). Further, when a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second) has passed since the AT end display was started, as shown in FIG. display of caution is started. In this case, the timing at which the resurrection effect is generated is the timing at which a predetermined pre-resurrection period (specifically, 4.5 seconds) has elapsed since the AT end display was started. The pre-resurrection period is the period from the start of the AT end display to the end of the caution display (that is, a predetermined period (specifically 1 second) + a predetermined display continuation period (specifically 3 seconds)) This period is set to be longer than the freeze period (specifically, 5 seconds) that occurs in the final game in the AT state ST5. As a result, unless a new bet setting is made in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, the AT end display and caution display are performed in the same manner as the situation in which the freeze period is set in the final game of the AT state ST5. will be executed.

In addition, the main MPU 72 responds to a situation in which a game medium bet is set by inserting medals into the medal inserting slot 45 or operating the credit inserting buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where a new game can be started. A command to play is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 . The command is transmitted each time one or more game media are betted, but may be configured to be transmitted when the number of game media capable of starting the game has been betted. If the effect-side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a game medium bet setting for starting a new game has been performed, and makes an affirmative determination in step S3405.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the data to be referred to in this portent change table is set as data for resurrection effect (step S3406). Also, in step S3407, AT end display end processing is executed to erase the data for executing AT end display, and in step S3408, caution display end processing is executed to cause caution display to be executed. erase the data for As a result, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the AT end display and caution display are ended, and a restoration image G64 (specifically, a character image of "still yet") is displayed on the image display device 63 as a restoration display. be. The display ends when a new game is started with the operation of the start lever 41 .

Thereafter, counter clearing processing is executed (step S3409). In the clearing process, if the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more, the caution display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0", and if the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 is 1 or more, The continuation timer counter 132 of the warning display is cleared to "0".

In the effect control process for AT (FIG. 61), in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed (step S3313). In the other processing, data to be referred to in various tables are updated as the game progresses, and processing for updating the effect content is executed. Further, when game media are given, a process of updating the display contents of the remaining given number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 is executed accordingly. Also, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process for performing an ending effect is executed.

FIG. 63 is a time chart showing how the AT end display and caution display are executed in the AT state ST5. FIG. 63(a) shows the period during which the game is executed, FIG. 63(b) shows the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and FIG. 63(c) shows the bet setting of the game medium. is performed, FIG. 63(d) shows the period during which the freeze period occurs, FIG. 63(e) shows the period during which the interval display section 67 is lit, ) indicates the period during which the AT end display is executed, FIG. 63(g) shows the period during which the attention display is executed, and FIG. 63(h) shows the period during which the revival display is executed.

First, the case where AT end display and caution display are executed in the final game in AT state ST5 will be described.

At the timing of t1, the final game in AT state ST5 is started as shown in FIG. 63(a). After that, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 63(b), all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game stop rotating. At the timing t2, the freeze period is set as shown in FIG. 63(d), and AT end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(f). Here, in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to the AT state ST5, the interval display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the off state at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. In the final game in the AT state ST5, the section display section 67 is kept lit as shown in FIG.

After that, at timing t3 when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has elapsed from timing t2, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, in the image display device 63, the attention display is started while the AT end display is being performed. At the timing of t3, the freeze period is still set as shown in FIG. 63(d). , the medal is ejected without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operations of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 are disabled. In other words, it is a situation in which a new bet setting cannot be made.

After that, at timing t4, when a predetermined display continuation period (specifically, three seconds) has elapsed from timing t3, the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, since the bet setting for starting a new game has not yet been performed, the AT end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 63(e). At the timing t4, the freeze period is still set as shown in FIG. , the medal is ejected without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the operations of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 are disabled. In other words, it is a situation in which a new bet setting cannot be made.

After that, at the timing of t5, the freeze period elapses as shown in FIG. 63(d). As a result, the acceptance permission process (step S312) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12). The operation of the second credit insertion button 48 is also validated. Also, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 63(e), the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the extinguished state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 ends. That is, in the final game in the AT state ST5, the second section SC2 in the section display section 67 is reached at the timing after the freeze period, which is the timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped. is terminated.

After that, at the timing of t6, bet setting of game media is performed as shown in FIG. 63(c). The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game media by inserting one medal into the medal slot 45, and in a situation where three or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored, the second bet setting may be set. The bet setting of the game medium "3" may be set by operating the 1 credit insertion button 47, and the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored. It may be a bet setting of “2” game media depending on the situation. At the timing t6, the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(f). In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1.

Next, the case where the resurrection display is performed in the middle of the AT state ST5 and the resurrection display is started based on the new bet setting after the caution display is finished will be described.

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 63(a), in the AT state ST5, in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0", the final sign effect using this sign change table is reached. Game is started. After that, at timing t8, as shown in FIG. 63(b), all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game stop rotating. Since this game is not the final game in the AT state ST5, the freeze period is not set as shown in FIG. 63(d). On the other hand, at the timing t8, AT end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(f).

After that, at timing t9 when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has elapsed from timing t8, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, in the image display device 63, the attention display is started while the AT end display is being performed.

Thereafter, at timing t10, when a predetermined display continuation period (specifically, three seconds) has elapsed from timing t9, the warning display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, the AT end display on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 63(f).

After that, at the timing of t11, when the pre-restoration period (specifically, 4.5 seconds) elapses from the timing of t8, it becomes the generation timing of the resurrection effect. In this case, at the timing t11, the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(f), and the recovery display on the image display device 63 starts as shown in FIG. 63(h). be. The resurrection display ends when a new game is started with the operation of the start lever 41 .

Next, the case where the resurrection display is performed in the middle of the AT state ST5 and the resurrection display is started based on the fact that a new bet setting is made before the attention display ends will be described.

At the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 63(a), in the AT state ST5, in a situation where the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0", the final indication effect using this indication change table is reached. Game is started. After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 63(b), all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game stop rotating. Since this game is not the final game in the AT state ST5, the freeze period is not set as shown in FIG. 63(d). On the other hand, at the timing of t13, AT end display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(f).

After that, at timing t14 when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has passed from timing t13, a warning display is started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 63(g). In this case, in the image display device 63, the attention display is started while the AT end display is being performed.

Thereafter, at timing t15, which is before the timing at which a predetermined display duration (specifically, three seconds) elapses from timing t14, bet setting for game media is performed as shown in FIG. 63(c). will be The bet setting may be a bet setting of "1" game media by inserting one medal into the medal slot 45, and in a situation where three or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored, the second bet setting may be set. The bet setting of the game medium "3" may be set by operating the 1 credit insertion button 47, and the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored. It may also be a bet setting of “2” gaming media by chance. At the timing of t15, the AT end display on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 63(f), the caution display ends on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. ), the restoration display on the image display device 63 is started. The resurrection display ends when a new game is started with the operation of the start lever 41 .

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends, a warning is displayed on the image display device 63, so that the player can be warned not to become absorbed in the game. becomes. In this case, this warning display can be continued even when the next game is started after the last game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution of the caution display is continued without being terminated when a new game is executed, and it is possible to ensure an opportunity for the player to recognize the caution display.

The caution display started in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 may end before the start of the next game. As a result, the attention display is not only continued in the next game after the last game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, but is ended before the next game starts in relation to the last game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. situation can occur. As a result, it is possible to diversify the relationship between the execution of the caution display and the game.

The attention display is continued for a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds) regardless of whether or not the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is finished and a new game is started. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the period during which the player confirms the caution display for a predetermined duration of display, and to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for ending the caution display. becomes.

While the image display device 63 is displaying the end of the bonus, the warning display is started. As a result, it is possible to start the warning display after the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 will end.

Even if the bonus end display is continued on the image display device 63, the caution display ends when the predetermined display duration has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the warning display from continuing for an unnecessarily long period of time.

When the AT state ST5 ends, a warning is displayed on the image display device 63, so that the player can be warned not to become absorbed in the game. In this case, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops in the final game in the AT state ST5, a freeze period for preventing the start of a new game occurs. be done. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the attention display.

After the freeze period starts, the warning display starts. As a result, it is possible to start the attention display in the freeze period and in the situation where the player is paying attention to the image display device 63, and it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the attention display.

The warning display ends before the freeze period ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new game from being started in the middle of the caution display.

Similar to the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, even in the final game in the AT state ST5, the attention display continues for a predetermined display duration (specifically, 3 seconds). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the period during which the player confirms the caution display for a predetermined duration of display, and to reduce the processing load for identifying the trigger for ending the caution display. becomes.

In the final game of the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 executes the AT end display, so that the player can clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 is ended. In this case, since the caution display is started while the AT end display is being executed, it is possible to start the caution display after the player is made to recognize that the AT state ST5 is finished. Become.

The caution indication ends within the freeze period, whereas the AT end indication may continue after the freeze period expires. As a result, it is possible to ensure a long period of time during which the AT end display is continued, and it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the AT state ST5 has ended.

After the performance for allowing the player to recognize the end of the AT state ST5 is executed, the revival performance for enabling the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 is actually continued is executed. Even in a game in which a corresponding effect is generated, an attention display is executed on the image display device 63 . As a result, it is possible to display the caution even in games other than the game in which the AT state ST5 ends, and it is possible to increase the frequency with which the caution is displayed. In addition, in the configuration in which the attention display is executed in the game in which the AT state ST5 ends, it is confirmed that the resurrection support performance is started by executing the caution display even in the game in which the resurrection support performance is executed. It is possible to make the player who played the game think that there is a possibility that the AT state ST5 will end in the game.

In the game in which the AT state ST5 ends, the caution display ends when a predetermined display duration period elapses, whereas in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect occurs in the AT state ST5, the caution display indicates the bet setting of the game medium. is done. As a result, the conditions for ending the caution display are different between the game in which the AT state ST5 ends and the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is generated, and the conditions for ending the caution display can be made suitable for each game. .

In the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is generated in the AT state ST5, the attention display ends not only when the bet setting of the game medium is performed but also when the predetermined display continuation period elapses. As a result, the caution display in the game in which the resurrection corresponding performance is generated is terminated at the same timing as the caution display in the game in which the AT state ST5 is terminated, and can be terminated at a different timing. becomes possible.

In the game in which the AT state ST5 ends, the caution display is executed during the freeze period, whereas in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is generated, the caution display is executed in a situation other than the freeze period. As a result, it is possible to start a new game even during execution of the attention display corresponding to the resurrection corresponding production.

If the second section SC2 is in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, the section display section 67 is turned on. It becomes possible to grasp whether it is ST5 or not. In this case, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends, and the second section SC2 ends when the AT state ST5 ends. Of the various triggers that occur in the game, the trigger for ending the lighting state of the section display section 67 differs depending on the situation. As a result, the timing for ending the lighting state of the section display section 67 can be set to an appropriate timing corresponding to the type of trigger for ending the second section SC2.

When the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as a trigger, and when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5 as a trigger, respectively, the section display section 67 , the lighting state ends at different timings, in any case, the lighting state of the section display portion 67 ends at a timing after the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. As a result, even if the timing at which the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends is changed according to each trigger, the section display section 67 is displayed while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. It is possible to prevent the lighting state from ending.

When the second section SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5 as a trigger, it occurs at a later timing within one game than when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 as a trigger. The lighting state of the section display section 67 ends based on the occurrence of the trigger. This makes it possible to change the period during which the lighting state of the section display section 67 continues in the game in which the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends, depending on the type of trigger for ending the second section SC2. In addition, the AT state ST5, which has a relatively high degree of advantage, can ensure a longer period in which the interval display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, which has a relatively low degree of advantage.

In the final game in the AT state ST5, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating, a freeze period for preventing the start of a new game occurs. The lighting state of the display section 67 ends. As a result, it is possible to reliably secure a period during which the interval display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state in the final game in the AT state ST5.

In the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is generated in the AT state ST5, the resurrection display is started after the AT end display is executed on the image display device 63. This is the timing before the end timing. As a result, even if the section display section 67 is checked in a state where the AT end display is being executed in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is generated in the AT state ST5, the AT end display is not executed in the final game of the AT state ST5. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether the effect is being executed or the effect being executed in relation to the resurrection corresponding effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the revival display will occur after the AT end display is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the game in which the AT state ST5 ends, a freeze period occurs when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and when the freeze period elapses, the lighting state of the interval display section 67 ends. In this case, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is generated, the resurrection display is started before the period corresponding to the freeze period elapses after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped. As a result, even if the section display section 67 is checked in a state where the AT end display is being executed in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is generated in the AT state ST5, the AT end display is not executed in the final game of the AT state ST5. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether the effect is being executed or the effect being executed in relation to the resurrection corresponding effect.

In a game in which a resurrection corresponding effect occurs in the AT state ST5, a resurrection display is displayed when a game medium bet setting occurs even before the pre-resurrection period elapses after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped. is started. This makes it possible to diversify the triggers for starting the resurrection display.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
The stop button 42 corresponding to the last spinning reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to the configuration in which the bonus end display is started when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. 44 is performed and a stop command is generated, the bonus end display may be started. Further, the AT end display is not limited to the configuration in which the AT end display is started when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped. The AT end display may be started when the operations 42 to 44 are performed and a stop command is issued.

When the display of the attention image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 that does not involve transition to the AT state ST5, a new game will be played until a predetermined display continuation period elapses. is started, the display of the caution image G52 is continued, and if a new game is not started, even if the predetermined display duration period has passed, the game medium bet setting is performed or a new game is not started. The display of the caution image G52 may be continued until is started. In this case, in a situation where the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5 ends and a new game is left without starting, it is possible to continue the display of the attention image G52. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the player to check the attention image G52.

・When the display of the attention image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, the attention image G52 is displayed until a predetermined display continuation period elapses. Instead of the configuration in which the display of is continued, the configuration may be such that the caution image G52 is continued to be displayed until a game medium bet is set, and the caution image G52 is displayed until a new game is started. The structure may be continued, or the display of the attention image G52 may be continued until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed in the new game, and the first stop occurs in the new game. The attention image G52 may be displayed continuously until the new game, or the attention image G52 may be displayed continuously until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in a new game. The caution image G52 may continue to be displayed until the game ends.

In the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, the display of the caution image G52 may be started before the bonus end display is started on the image display device 63, and the bonus end display may be made. may be configured such that the display of the caution image G52 is started when the is started. Further, the display of the caution image G52 may be ended when the bonus end display is ended, or the display of the caution image G52 may be ended after the bonus end display is ended. When the display of the caution image G52 is started when the bonus end display is started, and the display of the caution image G52 is ended when the bonus end display is ended, the display period of the caution image G52 is the entire display period. will match the display period of the bonus end display.

When the display of the attention image G52 is started on the image display device 63 in the final game in the AT state ST5, instead of the configuration in which the display of the attention image G52 is continued until a predetermined display duration period elapses Alternatively, the caution image G52 may be displayed continuously until the bet setting of the game medium is performed, or the caution image G52 may be displayed continuously until a new game is started. The display of the caution image G52 may be continued until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed in the game, and the display of the caution image G52 is continued until the first stop occurs in a new game. Alternatively, the caution image G52 may continue to be displayed until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in a new game, or the caution image G52 may be displayed until the new game ends. may continue to be displayed.

In the final game in the AT state ST5, the display of the caution image G52 may be started before the AT end display is started on the image display device 63, and the caution image G52 may be displayed when the AT end display is started. The display may be started, the display of the caution image G52 may be started before the freeze period is started, or the display of the caution image G52 may be started when the freeze period is started. may be Further, the display of the caution image G52 may end when the AT end display ends, or the display of the caution image G52 may end after the end of the AT end display. The display of the attention image G52 may be terminated. When the display of the caution image G52 is started when the AT end display is started, and when the display of the caution image G52 is finished when the AT end display is finished, the display period of the caution image G52 is entirely AT. This coincides with the display period of the end display. In addition, when the display of the attention image G52 is started when the freeze period starts, and the display of the attention image G52 ends when the freeze period ends, the entire display period of the attention image G52 is frozen. to match the period.

・When the attention image G52 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the AT state ST5, even after the freeze period has passed, the bet setting of the game medium is performed or a new game is started. The caution image G52 may be displayed continuously until is started. This makes it possible to keep the display of the attention image G52 for a long time.

・In a game in which a resurrection corresponding effect is executed in the AT state ST5, the timing at which the resurrection effect is generated is longer than the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) from the start of the AT end display to the start of the caution display. It is a period from the start of the AT end display to the end of the caution display (that is, a predetermined period (specifically 1 second) + a predetermined display continuation period (specifically 3 seconds)) less than It may be configured to be set as a period. Thus, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding performance is executed, the resurrection performance is executed at the timing after the caution display is started and before the timing when the predetermined display continuation period of the caution display elapses.

In addition to or in place of the configuration in which an image capable of calling the player's attention to the player's addiction to the game is displayed as the attention image G52, the amount of money the player can use or the amount the player can use An image is displayed to warn the player against leaving a storage medium capable of storing and holding a certain number of game media in a token rental device arranged side by side with the slot machine 10.例文帳に追加Alternatively, an image may be displayed to warn the player not to cheat on the slot machine 10 .

・In the game in which the resurrection support effect is executed in the AT state ST5, the period required from the start of the AT end display to the start of the caution display is such that a new game can be started after the start of the AT end display. It is good also as a structure which is below the period required by. In this case, since a new bet can be set after the AT end display and caution display are started, the caution display is surely executed in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed.

・In the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed in the AT state ST5, the resurrection display is started when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the AT end display. A configuration in which the start of display is not set may be adopted. In this case, the resurrection display is started when a new bet setting is made in the game.

- Even in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed in the AT state ST5, a freeze period may be set to prevent the start of a new game like the final game in the AT state ST5. In this case, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, not only the display mode of the AT end display and caution display but also the mode of preventing the start of a new game may be set to the same mode as the final game in the AT state ST5. It becomes possible.

Further, in this configuration, the resurrection display may be started when the freeze period is canceled in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed. In the final game in the AT state ST5, when the freeze period is canceled, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is terminated. The resurrection display is started at the timing when the lighting state ends.

When the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends, and AT When the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the state ST5, the lighting state of the section display section 67 is terminated when the freeze period ends, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, in a configuration in which the freeze period occurs even in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, when the second section SC2 ends and the AT state ST5 ends in response to the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. When the second section SC2 ends, the lighting state of the section display section 67 ends when the freeze period starts on the one hand, and when the freeze period ends on the other hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated. In addition, the freeze period is started when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or in the case of the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the AT state ST5. The lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated when the freeze period is set, and the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated in the middle of the freeze period. In addition, when the second section SC2 ends in response to the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or in the case of the end of the second section SC2 in response to the end of the AT state ST5, in the middle of the freeze period The lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated, and on the other hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated when the freeze period ends. In addition, when the second section SC2 ends in response to the termination of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and when the second section SC2 ends in response to the termination of the AT state ST5, all the reels 32L, When the reels 32M and 32R stop rotating, the lighting state of the interval display portion 67 is ended. The lighting state of the interval display section 67 may be ended when a game is started.

The lighting state of the section display section 67 changes depending on whether the second section SC2 ends according to the satisfaction of the ending condition of the AT state ST5 or when the second section SC2 ends according to the satisfaction of the ending condition. The configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the end timings are the same, and a configuration in which the end timings are different may be employed.

For example, the freeze period is started when the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the termination condition of the AT state ST5 or in the case of the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the ending condition. The lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated when the freeze period ends, and the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated when the freeze period ends. In addition, the freeze period is started when the second section SC2 ends in accordance with the satisfaction of the termination condition of the AT state ST5 or in the case of the second section SC2 ends in response to the satisfaction of the ending condition. The lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated in one case, and the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated in the middle of the freeze period. Further, in one of the cases where the second section SC2 ends according to the satisfaction of the end condition of the AT state ST5 and the case where the second section SC2 ends according to the satisfaction of the ending condition, the section in the middle of the freeze period The lighting state of the display section 67 may be terminated, and on the other hand, the lighting state of the section display section 67 may be terminated when the freeze period is terminated. In addition, when the second section SC2 ends in response to the fulfillment of the end condition of the AT state ST5, and in the case of the end of the second section SC2 according to the fulfillment of the ending condition, all the reels 32L and 32M , 32R stop rotating, the lighting state of the interval display portion 67 is ended, and on the other hand, when a game medium bet is set after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped, or a new The lighting state of the interval display section 67 may be terminated when the game is started.

・In the second section SC2, the section display section 67 may be in the off state in a situation where neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, but it is not limited to this. In the case of the second section SC2, not only the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5, but also the section display section 67 is illuminated even in a situation where neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5 is present. It may be configured as follows.

The light-emitting section provided in the section display section 67 is not limited to a single-color light-emitting type, and may be of a multi-color light-emitting type. In this case, in the second section SC2, the section display section 67 is in a lighting state, but the light emitting color may be different depending on the situation. For example, when the second section SC2 is neither the pseudo-bonus state ST4 nor the AT state ST5, the section display unit 67 lights up in green, and when the second section SC2 is the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the section is displayed. The section display section 67 is lit in blue, and in the second section SC2 and in the AT state ST5, the section display section 67 is lit in red. As a result, by checking the section display portion 67, it is possible to specify not only whether the current section is in the second section SC2, but also the state of the second section SC2.

In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the caution image G52 is displayed on the image display device 63 to call the player's attention to the game addiction, a sound for calling the player's attention to the game addiction A configuration may also be adopted in which the voice is output from the speaker 62 .

・In the final game in the AT state ST5, a freeze period occurs when one reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops rotating and two reels 32L, 32M, 32R continue to rotate. The configuration may be such that the freeze period occurs when the rotation of the two reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped and the rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is continued. . In this case, the image display device 63 may display a warning during the freeze period.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the resurrection corresponding effect processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the sixth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing processing for resurrection corresponding effect in this embodiment, which is executed by the effect side MPU 92 .

In steps S3501 to S3504, the same processes as steps S3401 to S3404 of the resurrection corresponding effect process (FIG. 62) in the sixth embodiment are executed. If affirmative determination is made in step S3501 and negative determination is made in step S3502, whether or not the current data to be referenced set in the present sign change table corresponds to the generation timing of the resurrection effect. or whether or not a game medium bet has been set for starting a new game (step S3505). The content of timing for generating the resurrection effect is the same as in the sixth embodiment, and the content of bet setting for game media for starting a new game is also the same as in the sixth embodiment.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3505, the data to be referred to in this predictor change table is set to the data for resurrection effect (step S3506), and end processing of AT end display is executed (step S3507). Thereafter, if the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is 1 or more, the caution display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0" (step S3508). However, in step S3508, the warning display continuation timer counter 132 is not cleared to "0".

FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) are for explaining the contents of execution of the resurrection effect when bet setting of game media for starting a new game is performed before the resurrection effect is generated. It is an explanatory diagram.

In the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, when the rotation stop operation is performed on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the image display device 63 displays the As shown in 65(a), the AT end display is started. Further, when a predetermined period (specifically, one second) has passed since the AT end display started, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the image display device 63 displays starts to display a caution display. After that, when the bet setting for starting the next game is performed before the execution timing of the resurrection effect and before the predetermined display continuation period has elapsed since the warning display started, As described above, in the resurrection corresponding effect processing (FIG. 64), the processing for setting the resurrection effect data (step S3506) and the end processing of the AT end display (step S3507) are executed, but the caution display continuation timer The process of clearing the counter 132 to "0" is not executed. Also, the process for ending the warning display is not executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the AT end display is terminated and a resurrection image G64 (specifically, a character image of "still still") is displayed on the image display device 63 as a resurrection display. The display of the caution image G52 displayed as a display is continued.

The caution image G52 is displayed when the value of the caution display continuation timer counter 132 becomes "0" after a predetermined display continuation period (specifically, three seconds) has elapsed since the display of the caution image G52 was started. This is specified in the caution display control process (FIG. 56), and continues until the caution display termination process is executed in step S3009. Therefore, if the start timing of the next game is later than the timing at which the predetermined display continuation period elapses, the warning display is terminated while the resurrection display is being performed. Also, if the next game start timing is before the predetermined display continuation period elapses, the caution display is displayed even in the situation where the resurrection display ends and the normal image display in the AT state ST5 starts. is continued.

According to the above configuration, even when the caution display is executed as the resurrection-response effect, if the caution display is executed, the warning display is started until the predetermined display continuation period elapses. , the caution display is continued regardless of whether the resurrection display is started in the middle or when the resurrection display ends. As a result, when the warning display is started, it is possible to ensure that the warning display is continued for a predetermined display duration period, and while limiting the opportunity to start the warning display to some extent. , when the caution display is executed, it is possible to secure a period for the player to check the caution display.

In addition, in the game in which the resurrection support effect occurs in the AT state ST5, if the bet setting of the game medium for starting the next game of the game is performed before the display of the attention image G52 is started, the resurrection support is performed. At step S3508 in the effect processing (FIG. 64), the value of the caution display start timer counter 131 is cleared to "0", thereby starting the resurrection display without starting the display of the caution image G52. However, it is not limited to this, and by not setting the process of step S3508 in the resurrection corresponding effect process, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect occurs, the game following the current game is started. The display of the attention image G52 may be started regardless of the timing at which the bet setting of the game medium for the purpose is performed. This makes it possible to increase the chances of displaying the caution image G52.

In addition, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect occurs in the AT state ST5, the display of the attention image G52 is started after the AT end display is started, but it is not limited to this, and the AT end display is started. A configuration may be adopted in which the display of the caution image G52 is started when the warning image G52 is displayed.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the display contents of the image display device 63 in the AT state ST5 are different from those in the sixth embodiment, and the trigger for ending the AT state ST5 is different from that in the sixth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the sixth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 66A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order notified by the image display device 63. FIG. 66B is for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a stop order different from the stop order notified by the image display device 63. It is an explanatory diagram.

First, referring to FIG. 66A, the display contents of the image display device 63 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order notified by the image display device 63 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 66(a1), in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays a remaining given number display image G12 indicating the remaining given number of game media in the current AT state ST5, and displays the current AT state ST5. An acquired number display image G13 indicating the total number of game media acquired in the state ST5 is displayed.

The value of the remaining number display image G12 matches the value of the AT continuation counter 74e in the main RAM 74, and if the value of the AT continuation counter 74e fluctuates based on the execution of the game, the remaining amount will be changed accordingly. The value displayed in the award number display image G12 also fluctuates. Even if a game in which the bet number is "2" or a game in the CB states ST2 and ST3 is executed in the AT state ST5, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e does not change, so the bet number is "2" in the AT state ST5. or the game in the CB states ST2 and ST3 are executed, the display content of the remaining number display image G12 is not changed.

In the win count display image G13, when more game media than the bet count for one game are awarded in the AT state ST5, the value exceeding the bet count for one game is displayed in the win count display image G13 until then. is updated to be added to the value that was If the number of bets per game is greater than the number of awarded game media in AT state ST5, the winning number display image G13 is displayed for the number of bets exceeding the number of awarded game media. The value is updated so as to be subtracted from the value displayed so far in the acquired number display image G13. In addition, in the win count display image G13, when a replay win is established in the AT state ST5, the value displayed until then is maintained as it is. In addition, in the winning number display image G13, when neither a small win nor a replay winning is established in the AT state ST5, the value of the bet number of the game is displayed in the winning number display image G13 until then. Updated to be subtracted from the value.

In the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the game with the number of bets "3" as in the first embodiment, the image The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize (a first bell prize or a second bell prize) is reported on the display device 63 . In FIG. 66(a1), the index value IV=4 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel. 32L, the stop order image G65 is displayed on the image display device 63. FIG. By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the stop order notified in the stop order image G65, regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the As shown in (a2), the first bell win is established on the main line ML.

When the first bell win is established, the game medium of "15", which is a larger number than the bet number of "3", is given to the player. Therefore, the value displayed in the remaining number display image G12 becomes "88" by subtracting "12" from "100" displayed when the current game is started. Also, the value displayed in the acquired number display image G13 becomes "812" by adding "12" to "800" displayed when the current game is started. In this case, the values of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are not updated at once, but are changed from the values before the update at the start of the game to the values after the update reflecting the game result. gradually updated to Specifically, the remaining grant number display image G12 is updated so that the value is decreased by 1 every time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses, and the acquired number display image G13 is updated by 1. is updated so that the value is incremented by 1 each time the update period of (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses. FIG. 66(a3) shows an image displayed on the image display device 63 when the first bell win is established and a predetermined update period has elapsed. 1 is subtracted from "100" to become "99", and the value of the acquired number display image G13 is "800" at the start of the game by adding 1 to become "801". After that, every time a predetermined update period elapses, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining number display image G12 and 1 is added to the value of the acquired number display image G13. The value of the given number display image G12 becomes "94", the value of the acquired number display image G13 becomes "806", and finally the value of the remaining given number display image G12 becomes "88" as shown in FIG. 66(a5). and the value of the obtained number display image G13 becomes "812". As a result, the player can clearly understand that the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 has decreased in exchange for the increase in the number of acquired game media.

As described above, the value of each of the remaining award number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 is updated each time a predetermined update period elapses with respect to a small winning combination because the index value IV=1 to If any of 3, 5, 6, 10 is won and the first bell is won, index value IV = If any of 7 to 9 is won and the second bell is won, index value IV = The same applies to the case where the first watermelon prize is established by winning 11, the second watermelon prize is established by winning the index value IV = 12, and the cherry prize is established by winning the index value IV = 13. is. Also, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, neither the remaining number display image G12 nor the acquired number display image G13 is updated.

Next, referring to FIG. 66B, the image display device 63 is operated to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a stop order different from the stop order notified by the image display device 63. Explain what is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 66(b1), the stop order for notifying that the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L on the image display device 63. When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order reported in the stop order image G65 despite the image G65 being displayed, the reported stop order The visibility lowering effect G<b>66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63 at the timing specified as the stop order different from the above. Specifically, the entire image display device 63 is displayed darker than before. However, even if the visibility lowering effect G66 is displayed, the remaining grant number display image G12 and the obtained number display image G13 are continued to be displayed although the visibility is lowered, and the player can still display the remaining grant number display although it is not clear. It becomes possible to grasp the values displayed in each of the image G12 and the acquired number display image G13.

By stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a stop order different from the stop order notified in the stop order image G65, a sixth compensation winning prize is displayed on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 66(b2). holds. It should be noted that depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, none of the prizes including the sixth compensation prize may be established.

When the sixth compensatory winning is established, the game medium of "1", which is a number smaller than the bet number of "3", is provided to the player. Therefore, the value displayed in the acquired number display image G13 becomes "798" by subtracting "2" from "800" displayed when the current game is started.

On the other hand, in the AT state ST5, if an index value IV corresponding to a minor winning combination is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the maximum number of game media set for that index value IV is awarded. Regardless of whether or not the corresponding prize has been established, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number “3” from the maximum number of gaming media is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74. Similar subtraction is also performed for the values displayed in the number display image G12. Specifically, if the game wins any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 and 10, regardless of whether or not the first bell win is established, bets start from "15" corresponding to the first bell win. The value obtained by subtracting the number "3" is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e and also subtracted from the value displayed in the remaining given number display image G12. In addition, if the game wins any of the index values IV = 7 to 9, regardless of whether or not the second bell win has been established, the number of bets is changed from "15" corresponding to the second bell win to "3". ” is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e and also subtracted from the value displayed in the remaining number display image G12. In addition, if the game wins the index value IV=11 or 12, regardless of whether the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is established, from "5" corresponding to the first watermelon win and the second watermelon win The value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e and also from the value displayed in the remaining given number display image G12. Also, if the game wins with the index value IV=13, regardless of whether or not the cherry win is established, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from "4" corresponding to the cherry win is the AT continuation counter 74e. and from the value displayed in the remaining number display image G12. Note that when the watermelon prize is not established even though the index value IV=11 or 12 is won, or when the cherry prize is not established even though the index value IV=13 is won, the visibility lowering effect G66 is applied. is not displayed. This time, in the case where the index value IV=4 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), and the sixth supplementary prize is established, the value displayed in the remaining award number display image G12 is the value displayed in the current game. "12" is subtracted from "100" displayed when it is started, resulting in "88".

If the winning index value IV = 4 is won, but the sixth compensation prize is established, the value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated from "100" to "88" and the value of the obtained number display image G13 is updated as described above. is updated from "800" to "798", but these updates are performed in a shorter period than when the first bell win is established. Specifically, in one predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds), the value before update at the start of the game is updated to the value after update reflecting the game result. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66(b1), the value displayed in the remaining number display image G12 is "100" and the value displayed in the obtained number display image G13 is "800". 66(b3), the value displayed in the remaining number display image G12 is "88" and the value displayed in the acquired number display image G13 is " 798”. As a result, although the first bell winning was not established due to the erroneous stop operation, the remaining number of grants in the AT state ST5 was subtracted in the same manner as when the first bell winning was established. It is possible to make it inconspicuous to the player. Further, the above update is performed in a situation where the visibility lowering effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63 . From this point as well, although the first bell winning was not established due to an erroneous stop operation, the remaining number of grants in the AT state ST5 is subtracted in the same manner as when the first bell winning was established. It is possible to make what has been done inconspicuous to the player.

After the update of the value displayed in the remaining number display image G12 and the update of the value displayed in the acquisition number display image G13 are completed, as shown in FIG. Display is terminated. It should be noted that the value of each of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 changes from the value before the update at the start of the game to the value after the update reflecting the game result due to the wrong stop operation as described above. What is done in one predetermined update period for the value is that if one of the index values IV = 1 to 3, 5, 6 is won and the first bell winning is not established, the index value IV = 7 to 9 is won and the second bell prize is not established, if the index value IV = 11 is won and the first watermelon prize is not established, the index value IV = 12 is won and the second bell prize is not established The same applies when the watermelon prize is not established, and when the index value IV=13 is won and the cherry prize is not established.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing stop order monitoring processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 . The stop order monitoring process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not a stop order instruction command has been received from the main MPU 72 . In the same manner as in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 determines whether the current game state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or the AT state ST5 in the stop order notification control process of step S412 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). , if one of the index values IV = 1 to 6 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13), the number of bets in this game is "3". Display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of a prize is performed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first bell prize. A stop order instruction command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 so that the image display device 63 will notify the stop order of . In addition, if any of the index values IV = 7 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13), the second bell wins on the condition that the number of bets in this game is "3". Display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second bell prize is displayed on the combined display unit 66. A stopping order instruction command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 so that the stopping order is notified by the image display device 63 .

If a stop order instruction command has been received (step S3601: YES), a stop order data storage process is executed (step S3602). In the stop order data storage process, the stop order data corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R set in the stop order instruction command received this time is stored in the effect side RAM 94 . Also, a setting process of stop order display data is executed (step S3603). In the stopping order display data setting process, the display control of the image display device 63 is performed so that a stopping order image G65 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stopping order instruction command received this time is displayed. do. It should be noted that if the number of bets in the current game is "2", it is assumed that one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 or AT state ST5. Also, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is not reported on the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is reported in the same manner as when the bet number is "3". may be configured to be executed.

In step S3604, it is determined whether or not a stop instruction command has been received from the main MPU 72. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated and a valid stop command is generated, the main MPU 72 becomes the target of the stop command as in the first embodiment. information corresponding to the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and information indicating whether the current stop command in the current game corresponds to the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop. A stop instruction command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in step S504 of the reel control process (FIG. 17).

If a stop command command has been received (step S3604: YES), if stop order data corresponding to the current game is stored in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3605: YES), the stop command command received this time information corresponding to the types of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the targets of the stop command set in , and whether the current stop command corresponds to the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop. It is determined whether or not the indicated information matches the stop order data stored in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3606). For example, when the index value IV=4 is won in the current game, it corresponds to the first stop being the middle reel 32M, the second stop being the right reel 32R, and the third stop being the left reel 32L. Stop order data is stored in the performance side RAM 94 . In this case, when information indicating that the target of the stop command is the middle reel 32M and the first stop is set in the stop command command received this time, and when the target of the stop command is set in the stop command command received this time When the information indicating that the reel is the right reel 32R and the second stop is set, it is determined in step S3606 that the stop order matches. On the other hand, if information indicating that the target of the stop command is the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R and is the first stop is set in the stop command command received this time, or if the stop command command received this time is a stop command If the target is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M and the information indicating the second stop is set, it is determined in step S3606 that the stop order does not match.

If it is determined that the stop orders match, an affirmative determination is made in step S3606, so the stop order monitoring process ends without executing the process of step S3607. If it is determined that the stop orders do not match, a negative determination is made in step S3606, so a mismatch display data setting process is executed in step S3607. In the mismatch display data setting process, the mismatch display data for displaying the visibility lowering effect G66 on the entire image display device 63 is set in the production side RAM94. As a result, the visibility lowering effect G66 is displayed on the entire image display device 63 . Specifically, the entire image display device 63 is displayed darker than before. Therefore, the visibility of the values displayed in each of the remaining number display image G12 and the obtained number display image G13 displayed on the image display device 63 is lowered.

The discrepancy display data is erased from the production-side RAM 94 when a bet is set for starting a new game, and the discrepancy display data is erased from the production-side RAM 94, thereby lowering the visibility of the image display device 63. The display of the special effect G66 ends. The bet setting is a bet setting for a game medium of "1" when one medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, and the first credit insertion button 47 in a situation where one or more virtual medals are stored and stored. bet setting of one or more game media by operating , and bet setting of one or more game media by operating the second credit insertion button 48 in a situation where one or more virtual tokens are accumulated and stored. is either

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing medium application processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the medium application process is executed in step S309 in the normal process (FIG. 12).

When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in AT state ST5 (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 has been won in the current game. (Step S3702). If any of the index values IV = 1 to 10 has been won in the current game (step S3702: YES), if the first bell prize or the second bell prize has been established (step S3703: YES ), a matching command when the bell is won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3704), and if the first bell winning and the second bell winning are not established (step S3703: NO), a mismatch command when the bell is won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3705). Information indicating whether or not any one of the first to ninth complementary winnings has been established is set in the disagreement command at the time of winning the bell.

When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV=11 to 13 has been won in the current game. (Step S3706). If any of the index values IV = 11 to 13 is won in this game (step S3706: YES), the winning index value IV among the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize and the cherry prize If the corresponding winning prize has been established (step S3707: YES), a establishment command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3708), and one of the first watermelon winning prize, the second watermelon winning prize and the cherry winning prize is won. If the winning corresponding to the index value IV has not been established (step S3707: NO), a failure command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3709). In both the successful command and the unsatisfactory command, not only information that allows the command type to be specified but also information corresponding to the index value IV that was won this time is set.

In the medium application process, other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S3710). In other processing, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for giving the player the number of game media corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage memory number. drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In this case, if the first bell win or the second bell win is established, the game medium "15" is awarded, and if the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is established, "5" game media are given, and "4" game media are given when a cherry prize is established. In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

FIG. 69(a) is a flow chart showing the display information updating process executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The display information update process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

When the match command for winning the bell has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3801: YES), setting processing of sequential update data for winning the bell is executed (step S3802). In the setting process, the value of the remaining number display image G12 and the value of the acquired number display image G13 on the image display device 63 are changed from the values before updating at the start of the game to the updated values reflecting the game result. data settings for gradual updating.

FIG. 69(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the effect-side RAM 94. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the production-side RAM 94 is provided with an AT-time remaining grant number counter 135 and an AT-time net increase number counter 136 on the production side. The AT remaining grant number counter 135 is a counter for measuring the remaining grant number of game media in the current AT state ST5, and its value matches the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74. . The effect-side AT net increase counter 136 is a counter for measuring the increase or decrease in the AT state ST5 of the game media owned by the player, and its value is the AT net increase counter provided in the main RAM 74. will match the value of

In the setting process of step S3802, as the value of the remaining grant number display image G12, the value of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 at that time is displayed. (The value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the medium grant number "15" at the time of winning the bell) from the value of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 at that time. Towards the direction, display data for decrementing "1" each time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses is set in the effect-side RAM 94 . In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets “3” from the number of media provided at the time of winning the bell “15”) ) is subtracted from the value of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3802, the value of the net addition number counter 136 during AT on the production side at that time is displayed as the value of the acquired number display image G13, and the game medium owned by the player at the time of winning the bell is displayed. (The value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from the medium grant number "15" at the time of winning the bell) is added to the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time. Towards this state, display data for adding "1" each time a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses is set in the effect-side RAM 94. - 特許庁In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets “3” from the number of media provided at the time of winning the bell “15”) ) is added to the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time.

If the disagreement command at the time of winning the bell has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3803: YES), the processing for setting batch update data at the time of winning the bell is executed (step S3804). In the setting process, the value of the remaining number display image G12 and the value of the acquired number display image G13 on the image display device 63 are each changed from the value before update at the start of the game to the value after update reflecting the game result by 1. Data is set for updating in a predetermined updating period (specifically, 0.5 seconds).

Specifically, in the setting process of step S3804, as the value of the remaining award number display image G12, the value of the AT remaining award number counter 135 at that time is displayed, and the value owned by the player at the time of winning the bell Displays the value obtained by subtracting the increased number of game media (the value obtained by subtracting the bet number of "3" from the medium given number of "15" when winning a bell) from the value of the AT remaining given number counter 135 at that time. Display data is set in the effect-side RAM 94 so that the state is updated in one predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds). In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning the bell (the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets “3” from the number of media provided at the time of winning the bell “15”) ) is subtracted from the value of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3804, as the value of the acquired number display image G13, the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed, and the game media owned by the player in the current game is displayed. Decrease number (If any compensation win is established, the value obtained by subtracting "1", the number of media given at the time of compensation winning, from the number of bets "3". If compensation winning is not established, One predetermined update period (specifically 0.5 second) is set in the effect-side RAM 94. In addition, after setting the display data, the number of reductions in the number of game media owned by the player in this game (if any compensation winning is established, the number of bets will be "3" to the media at the time of compensation winning) It is a value obtained by subtracting "1", which is the number of grants, and if the compensation winning is not established, "3", which is the number of bets, is subtracted from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time.

If the establishment command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3805: YES), setting processing of sequential update data at the time of winning of the missing target is executed (step S3806). In the setting process, the value of the remaining number display image G12 and the value of the acquired number display image G13 on the image display device 63 are changed from the values before updating at the start of the game to the updated values reflecting the game result. data settings for gradual updating.

In the setting process of step S3806, as the value of the remaining grant number display image G12, the value of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 at that time is displayed, and the game media owned by the player at the time of winning this time is increased. (When winning a watermelon prize, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets, "3", from the number of mediums given when winning a watermelon prize, "5". When winning a cherry prize, the number of medium given when winning a cherry prize, "4" A value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, from "" to the state where the value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, from the value of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 at that time is displayed. 0.5 second) is set in the effect-side RAM 94 so as to be decremented by "1" each time. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning this time (if it is at the time of watermelon winning, the number of bets is calculated from "5", which is the number of media given at the time of watermelon winning) A value obtained by subtracting "3", or a value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, from "4", which is the number of mediums given at the time of winning a cherry prize, in the case of winning a cherry prize) is calculated as the remaining given number counter 135 during AT at that time. Subtract from the value of

In addition, in the setting process of step S3806, as the value of the acquired number display image G13, the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed, and the game owned by the player at the time of winning this time is displayed. Increased number of media (If you win a watermelon prize, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets, "3", from the number of media given when you win a watermelon prize, "5". If you win a cherry prize, the number of medium given when you win a cherry prize. A value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from a certain "4") to the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed. Display data for adding "1" each time (specifically, 0.5 seconds) elapses is set in the effect-side RAM 94 . In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of game media owned by the player at the time of winning this time (if the number of media is given at the time of watermelon winning, the number of bets is The value obtained by subtracting "3", or the value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, from "4", which is the number of mediums given at the time of cherry winning, if it is at the time of cherry winning) is the net increase in AT on the production side at that time Add to the value of the counter 136 .

If a failure command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3807: YES), a batch update data setting process is executed at the time of winning of the missing target (step S3808). In the setting process, the value of the remaining number display image G12 and the value of the acquired number display image G13 on the image display device 63 are each changed from the value before update at the start of the game to the value after update reflecting the game result by 1. Data is set for updating in a predetermined updating period (specifically, 0.5 seconds).

Specifically, in the setting process of step S3808, the value of the AT remaining award number counter 135 at that time is displayed as the value of the remaining award number display image G12. The number of game media owned by the player increases when the player wins a prize (for the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role, the number of mediums given at the time of winning the watermelon prize is "5"). A value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, or a value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, from "4", which is the number of mediums given at the time of winning a cherry prize, if it is a cherry role). Display data is stored in the effect-side RAM 94 so that the value obtained by subtracting from the value of the number counter 135 is displayed, and the display data is updated in one predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds). set. In addition, after setting the display data, the increase in the number of gaming media owned by the player when the current winning combination (first watermelon combination, second watermelon combination, or cherry combination) wins If it is the second watermelon role, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number of "3" from the watermelon award amount of "5". The value obtained by subtracting "3" which is the number of bets) is subtracted from the value of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 at that time.

In addition, in the setting process of step S3808, as the value of the acquisition number display image G13, the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed, and the game media owned by the player in the current game is displayed. The value obtained by subtracting the decrease (bet number "3") from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed, and one predetermined update period (specifically 0.5 second) is set in the effect-side RAM 94 . In addition, after setting the display data, the decrease number of the game media owned by the player in the current game (“3” which is the number of bets) is calculated from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time. Subtract.

In the display information update process (FIG. 69(a)), other processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S3809). In other processing, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 and results in a loss in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the value of the acquired number display image G13 , from the state in which the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time is displayed, the decrease in the number of game media owned by the player in the current game (bet number "3") at that time A display for updating in a predetermined update period (specifically, 0.5 seconds) to a state in which a value subtracted from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side is displayed. Data is set in the effect side RAM 94. In addition, after setting the display data, the decrease number of the game media owned by the player in the current game (“3” which is the number of bets) is calculated from the value of the AT net increase counter 136 on the production side at that time. Subtract. On the other hand, the display content of the remaining number display image G12 is maintained without being changed, and the value of the AT remaining number counter 135 is not updated.

It should be noted that when a replay win is established as a result of executing a game in which the number of bets is "3" in the AT state ST5, the display contents of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are changed. At the same time, the values of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 and the AT net increase number counter 136 on the production side are also maintained without being changed. Further, when a game in which the bet number is "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the display contents of the remaining number display image G12 and the acquired number display image G13 are changed regardless of the winning result in the game. At the same time, the values of the AT remaining grant number counter 135 and the AT net increase number counter 136 on the production side are also maintained without being changed.

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

First, it is determined whether or not the bet number of the current game is "3" by determining whether the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3901). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S3901: NO), the processing after step S3902 is not executed. As a result, even if a game in which the bet number is "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the remaining award number in the AT state ST5 is not subtracted, and the remaining award number in the AT state ST5 is "0". , the subtraction of the remaining 1 game is not performed.

In the case of the CB state (the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3), the AT process (FIG. 59) itself is not executed as in the first embodiment. is started, the game executed in the CB state is not treated as a game completed in the AT state ST5. Therefore, even if the state is shifted to the CB state in the middle of the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is restarted from the state of the remaining number of grants immediately before the shift to the CB state after the end of the CB state.

When the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S3901: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S3902). When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S3902: NO), addition processing of the number of games during AT is executed (step S3903), and update processing of the net increase during AT is executed (step S3904). In the process of adding the number of games during AT, 1 is added to the value of the counter for the number of games during AT provided in the main RAM 74 . The AT game number counter is a counter for counting the total number of games executed in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends. In the process of updating the net increase during AT, if neither the replay winning nor the small winning combination corresponding to the awarding of game media has been established in this game, the value of the net increase during AT provided in the main side RAM 74 If the replay winning is established in this game, the value of the AT net increase counter is maintained, and if the small role winning is established in this game, this time The value obtained by subtracting "3" from the number of game media given in the game is added to the value of the net increase counter during AT. The AT net increase counter is a counter for measuring the increase or decrease in the game media owned by the player in the AT state ST5, and is cleared to "0" when the AT state ST5 ends.

After that, it is determined whether or not the index value IV, in which a combination that allows the award of game media exceeding the number of bets of “3”, has been won in the current game (step S3905). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV=1 to 13 has been won. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3905, subtraction processing of the AT continuation counter 74e is executed (step S3906). In the subtraction process, AT Subtract from the value of the continuation counter 74e.

Specifically, if the game wins any of the index values IV = 1 to 6 and 10, regardless of whether or not the first bell win is established, bets start from "15" corresponding to the first bell win. The value obtained by subtracting the number "3" is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, if the game wins any of the index values IV = 7 to 9, regardless of whether or not the second bell win has been established, the number of bets is changed from "15" corresponding to the second bell win to "3". ” is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, if the game wins the index value IV=11 or 12, regardless of whether the first watermelon win or the second watermelon win is established, from "5" corresponding to the first watermelon win and the second watermelon win The value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e. In addition, if the game wins with the index value IV=13, regardless of whether or not the cherry win has been established, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number "3" from "4" corresponding to the cherry win is set to the AT continuation counter 74e. Subtract from the value of In step S3905, when the subtracted value is less than "0" and the borrow flag is set to "1", the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is cleared to "0".

When the AT continuation counter 74e is subtracted in step S3906, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT continuation counter 74e after the subtraction is "0" (step S3907). When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S3907: YES), an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3908). The AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net addition number counter during AT of the main side RAM 74 . When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the AT end command, the image display device 63 executes processing for starting the AT end display.

After that, "1" is set in the end standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3909). In the present embodiment, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to be completed has been completed from the game in which the remaining number of game media to be provided becomes "0" in the AT state ST5. In the present embodiment, one game is set as the number of games waiting to be completed, but a predetermined plurality of games such as two games, three games, or four games or more may be set. The end standby counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to measure whether or not the game of the end standby number has been completed from the game in which the remaining number of awarded game media in the AT state ST5 is "0".

When a game in which the bet number is "3" is executed in the AT state ST5 (step S3901: YES) and the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S3902: YES ), it means that the remaining grant number in the AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0" and that the current game is a game to be waited for completion. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the end standby counter value of the main RAM 74 (step S3910). It should be noted that even if the remaining number of bets in the AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0", if the game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the next game, it is denied in step S3901. Since the process of step S3910 is not executed by making the determination, the AT state ST5 continues even after the game is executed.

When the value of the end standby counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S3910, on condition that the value of the end standby counter is "0" (step S3911: YES), the AT state ST5 and the second A process for ending the section SC2 is executed. Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S3912). The processing contents of the initialization processing of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization processing of the second section SC2 (step S814) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is maintained. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating . Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated. After that, if the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S3913). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3914). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 can grasp that the second section SC2 has ended.

FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing AT state processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 .

When both the first ending flag and the second ending flag of the main RAM 74 are not set to "1" (step S4001: NO), the index is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the current game. If one of the values IV=11 to 15 is won (step S4002: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the end standby counter of the main side RAM 74 is "0". If the value of the end standby counter is 1 or more (step S4003: NO), the processing for adding the remaining number of game media in the AT state ST5 after step S4004 is not executed.

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to be finished is completed from the game in which the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". In , even if one of the index values IV=11 to 15 is won, there is no opportunity to increase the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5. This makes it possible to prevent the AT state ST5 from continuing excessively.

If the value of the end standby counter is "0" (step S4003: YES), an additional lottery process is executed (step S4004). In the add-on lottery process, the add-on lottery table provided in the main ROM 73 and the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 are used to increase the remaining number of given game media in the AT state ST5. It is determined by lottery whether or not to generate a different addition. Specifically, when the index value IV = 11 is won, there is a 10% probability that the number of prizes to be awarded is 30, and the additional prize is selected, and the number of prizes to be awarded is 50 with a probability of 10%. An additional win is selected, and it is lost with a probability of 80%. If the index value IV = 12 is won, the additional winning with a probability of 10% that the number of tokens to be granted is 20 is selected, and the additional winning that the number of tokens to be granted is 40 with a probability of 10% is selected. 80% chance of being out. If the index value IV = 13 is won, the additional winning with a probability of 20% that the number of tokens to be granted is 30 is selected, and the additional winning that the number of tokens to be granted is 50 with a probability of 20% is selected. 20% probability that the number of prizes to be awarded is 100 will be selected, and 40% probability will be lost. If the index value IV = 14 is won, there is a 20% probability that the number of prizes to be awarded is 20, and the number of prizes to be awarded is 40. 20% probability that the number of prizes to be awarded is 90 will be selected, and 40% probability will be lost. If the index value IV = 15 is won, the additional winning with a probability of 10% that the number of tokens to be granted is 30 is selected, and the additional winning that the number of tokens to be granted is 50 with a probability of 10% is selected. 80% chance of being out.

If the addition lottery process (step S4004) is won (step S4005: YES), the value of the number of grants selected in this addition lottery process (step S4004) is set to the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM74 Add (step S4006). After that, an add-on command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4007). The add-on command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize that the add-on win has been made in the add-on lottery process (step S4004) and the number of grants selected as the add-on win. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 has been added. do.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for AT in this embodiment, which is executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not an AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. The AT end command is sent in step S3908 in the AT processing (FIG. 70) as already described. That is, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the AT state ST5, one of the index values IV = 1 to 13 is won, and the subtraction process of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is executed. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", an AT end command is transmitted. In addition, the AT end command is transmitted at step S3211 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section as in the sixth embodiment. In other words, when the AT state ST5 is ended by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the AT state ST5 is ended without the completion of the waiting number of games. An AT end command is sent before the freeze period occurs.

If the AT end command has been received (step S4101: YES), AT end display setting processing is executed (step S4102), and caution display setting processing is executed (step S4103). In the AT end display setting process, data setting is performed so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the AT state ST5 has ended. In this case, as data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, data enabling execution of the AT end display is set in the effect-side RAM 94. FIG. Further, in the warning display setting process, data setting is performed so that the image display device 63 executes a warning display to prevent the player from becoming absorbed in the game. As a result, the image display device 63 starts displaying an end clear image G61, a total number of games image G62, a total number of wins image G63, and a warning image G52 as shown in FIG. 58(b).

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to be completed is completed from the game in which the remaining number of game media to be provided becomes "0" in the AT state ST5. When the game with the awarded number of "0" ends, that is, before the game waiting for completion starts, the image display device 63 starts AT end display and warning display. Further, when the AT state ST5 is terminated by the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2, the AT end command is transmitted at the stage before the freeze period occurs in the game in which the ending condition is fulfilled. However, in this case, AT end display and caution display are started on the image display device 63 before the freeze period occurs.

Here, the AT end command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net addition number counter during AT of the main side RAM 74. The number addition process (step S3903) and the update process of the AT net increase number (step S3904), which is a process for updating the value of the AT net increase counter, are performed when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more. It is executed in a game executed in a certain situation, but is not executed in a game waiting for completion in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0". The set AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in the game in which the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", and is not transmitted in the game waiting for the end. Therefore, the number of games displayed in the total number of games image G62 in the AT end display is the total number of games played until the remaining number of game media provided becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, and is waiting for the end. It does not include the number of games executed as a game of In addition, the number of game media displayed in the total acquisition number image G63 in the AT end display is the total number of game media acquired in the games consumed until the remaining number of provided game media becomes "0" in the AT state ST5. , and does not include the number of game media acquired in the game waiting for completion.

In step S4104, it is determined whether or not a second section initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72. The second interval initialization command is transmitted at step S3914 in the AT process (FIG. 70) as already described. That is, in the AT state ST5, the second interval initialization command is transmitted when the remaining number of game media to be provided becomes "0" and the number of games waiting for completion is executed. In addition, the second section initialization command is transmitted in step S3216 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section as in the sixth embodiment. In other words, when the AT state ST5 is ended by the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2, the AT state ST5 is ended without the completion of the waiting number of games. A second interval initialization command is sent when the freeze period has elapsed.

If the second interval initialization command has been received (step S4104: YES), the initialization command received flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4105). The initialization command received flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the second section initialization command has already been received in the AT state ST5.

If the initialization command received flag is set to "1" (step S4106: YES), it is determined whether or not a game medium bet has been set for starting a new game (step S4107). When a game medium bet setting is performed by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45 or operating the credit insertion buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where a new game can be started, the main MPU 72 executes a command corresponding to the bet setting. is sent to the MPU 92 on the production side. The command is transmitted each time one or more game media are betted, but may be configured to be transmitted when the number of game media capable of starting the game has been betted. If the effect-side MPU 92 has received the command, it judges that a game medium bet setting has been made for starting a new game, and makes an affirmative determination in step S4107.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, end processing of AT end display is executed (step S4108), and end processing of caution display is executed (step S4109). In the end processing of the AT end display, the data for executing the AT end display is erased and the data is set so that the display of the image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of the normal game state ST1 is started. , the data for executing the caution display is erased in the caution display termination process. As a result, the state in which the AT end display and caution display are being executed on the image display device 63 in the final game of the AT state ST5 is ended when a bet setting is made for starting a new game, and the normal state is reached. The display of the image G53 of the game state ST1 is started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, the initialization command received flag is cleared to "0".

In the effect control process for AT (FIG. 72), in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed (step S4110). In the other processing, data to be referred to in various tables are updated as the game progresses, and processing for updating the effect content is executed. Also, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process for performing an ending effect is executed.

FIG. 73 is a time chart showing how the AT end display and caution display are executed in the AT state ST5. FIG. 73(a) shows the period during which the game is executed, and FIG. 73(b) shows the period in which the waiting number of games for completion is executed after the remaining number of game media provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". FIG. 73(c) shows the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop rotating, and FIG. FIG. 74(e) shows the timing at which the bet setting of the game medium is performed, and FIG. 74(f) shows the period during which the freeze period occurs. 74(g) shows the period during which the interval display section 67 is lit, FIG. 74(h) shows the period during which the AT end display is executed, and FIG. 74(i) shows the period during which the caution display is executed. indicate the period of time.

First, the case where the AT state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2 will be described.

At time t1, as shown in FIG. 73(a), a new game is started in AT state ST5. Then, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 73(c), all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game stop rotating. In this game, any of the index values IV=1 to 13 is won, and the maximum number of game media to be given is subtracted from the value of the AT continuation counter 74e at the winning index value IV regardless of whether or not a prize is established. As a result, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing t2, the AT end display and caution display are started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i).

After that, at the timing of t3, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 73(a). As a result, as shown in FIG. 73(b), there is an end standby period in which the end of the AT state ST5 is awaited until the number of end standby games (specifically, one game) is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(e) at the timing of t4, the start lever 41 is operated at the timing of t5 after a new bet setting is performed as shown in FIG. 73(a) at the timing of t5. A new game is started in the AT state ST5. Then, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 63(b), all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game stop rotating. By executing the processing for ending the AT state ST5 at the timing t6, the interval display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the extinguished state as shown in FIG. 73(g).

After that, at the timing of t7, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 73(a) and the end waiting period ends as shown in FIG. 73(b). In this case, since the acceptance permission process (step S312) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12), the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the first credit insertion button 47 and The operation of the second credit insertion button 48 is also validated. Then, at the timing of t8, bet setting of game media is performed as shown in FIG. 73(e). The bet setting may be a bet setting for a game medium of "1" by inserting one medal into the medal slot 45, and in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the second bet setting may be set. The bet setting of the game medium "3" may be set by operating the 1 credit insertion button 47, and the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored. It may be a bet setting of “2” game media depending on the situation. At the timing t8, as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i), the AT end display and caution display on the image display device 63 are terminated. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1.

Next, the case where the AT state ST5 ends when the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied will be described.

At time t9, as shown in FIG. 73(a), a new game is started in AT state ST5. Then, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 63(b), all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game stop rotating. In this game, as shown in FIG. 73(d), the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. Therefore, the freeze period is set at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 73(f). At the timing of t10, AT end display and caution display are started on the image display device 63 as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i).

After that, at the timing of t11, the freeze period elapses as shown in FIG. 73(f). As a result, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the current game ends, and in the normal processing (FIG. 12), reception permission processing (step S312) is executed. It is detected by the medal detection sensor 45a, and the operations of the first credit insertion button 47 and the second credit insertion button 48 are also validated. Also, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the extinguished state. As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 ends.

After that, at the timing of t12, bet setting of game media is performed as shown in FIG. 73(e). The bet setting may be a bet setting for a game medium of "1" by inserting one medal into the medal slot 45, and in a situation where three or more virtual medals are stored and stored, the second bet setting may be set. The bet setting of the game medium "3" may be set by operating the 1 credit insertion button 47, and the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where two or more virtual medals are accumulated and stored. It may also be a bet setting of “2” gaming media by chance. At the timing of t12, as shown in FIGS. 73(h) and 73(i), the AT end display and caution display on the image display device 63 are finished. In this case, the image display device 63 starts displaying the image G53 of the normal game state ST1.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the remaining given number becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 is not terminated, but a termination waiting period is entered, and one game is executed in the AT state ST5. That is, in the AT state ST5, the player pays attention to the number of game media given in each game until the remaining number of gifts becomes "0", and when the remaining number of gifts becomes "0", one game is played. The player pays attention to the fact that is digested. Therefore, in the AT state ST5, the object of attention is changed in the middle of the game in order to specify the end trigger, and it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the AT state ST5.

The end waiting period does not continue over a plurality of games, but ends in one game. This makes it possible to prevent the end waiting period from continuing excessively.

In the game in which the remaining number of awards becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, an AT end display indicating that the AT state ST5 ends is started. As a result, the player can have more chances to check the AT end display, compared to the configuration in which the AT end display is started when one game in the end standby period is executed.

Since the AT end display includes the total number of games image G62 and the total win number image G63, the player who confirms the AT end display not only sees the end of the AT state ST5, but also each of the actions executed in the AT state ST5. It is possible to grasp the result of the game. In this case, the result of one game during the end waiting period is not reflected in the contents of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 in the AT end display. As a result, in the configuration in which the display period of the AT end display including the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 is ensured to be long, the contents of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 that have started to be displayed are displayed halfway. It is possible to prevent it from being changed.

When the AT state ST5 ends as the ending condition is satisfied and the second section SC2 ends, even if the remaining number of grants in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the end waiting period The AT state ST5 ends without executing one game in . As a result, in the configuration in which the waiting period for the end of one game is set when the AT state ST5 ends, the AT state ST5 does not continue even though the second section SC2 has ended. It becomes possible.

In the AT state ST5, when the number of game media given exceeds the number of bets, the excess value is subtracted from the remaining given number counted in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74, and the remaining given amount is When the awarded number becomes "0", it becomes a termination standby period in which only one game is executed, and when the one game is executed, the AT state ST5 ends. In this case, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the correct stop order when one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), is awarded ``15'' game media, which is more than ``3'', which is the number of bets. In the configuration in which game media exceeding the number of bets of “3” are not awarded to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the stop order of the correct answer when any of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate. is stopped or the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the correct stop order, the number of bets "3" is subtracted from "15". The resulting "12" is subtracted from the remaining awards. As a result, when one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won, regardless of whether or not "15" game media have been awarded, "12" is subtracted from the remaining awarded number. It is possible to prevent the end timing of the AT state ST5 from being delayed due to the mode of the operator's stop operation.

In the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 displays the remaining number display image G12 corresponding to the remaining number to be given. can be predicted. In this case, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the stop order of the correct answer, the remaining grant corresponding to the subtraction of the remaining grant number While the number display image G12 is updated sequentially, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order of the correct answer, the remaining number corresponding to the subtraction of the remaining number to be given is displayed. The update of the given number display image G12 is performed collectively. As a result, regardless of whether or not "15" game media are awarded when one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won, in a configuration in which "12" is subtracted from the remaining number of awarded game media, The value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated irrespective of whether or not "15" game media have been awarded. It is possible to set an appropriate display mode corresponding to whether or not.

When one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order of the correct answer, the value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated and displayed. is a display mode that is more difficult for the player to recognize than the display mode of the updated display of the value of the remaining number display image G12 when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped in the stop order of the correct answer. . As a result, the player recognizes that the remaining given number has been subtracted by "12" even though "15" game media have not been awarded even though one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 has been won. It is possible to make it difficult.

When one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order of the correct answer, the value of the remaining number display image G12 is updated and displayed. is shorter than the period required to update and display the value of the remaining number display image G12 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in the correct stop order. As a result, although the player won any of the index values IV = 1 to 9, the game medium of "15" was not awarded, but the remaining number of grants was subtracted by "12". It is possible to reduce the possibility of confirmation.

When one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order of the correct answer, the visibility of the image display device 63 is lowered. By applying the special effect G66, the visibility of the content displayed on the image display device 63 is lowered. Then, in a situation where the visibility lowering effect G66 is applied, the value of the remaining applied number display image G12 is updated and displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the number of remaining grants has been subtracted by "12" even though "15" game media have not been awarded even though one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 has been won. It is possible to make it difficult.

If one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is stopped in a stop order different from the stop order of the correct answer, all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R will stop rotating. Even if the vehicle is not stopped, the visibility lowering effect G66 is applied when it is specified that the stop order is different from the correct stop order. Then, in this situation, when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, the value of the remaining given number display image G12 is updated and displayed. As a result, in a situation where the visibility of the image display device 63 is reduced due to the application of the visibility reduction effect G66, the value of the remaining number display image G12 can be updated and displayed. It becomes possible.

<Another Form of the Eighth Embodiment>
・When the AT state ST5 is started, the initial number of grants is set in the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74, and when the number of bets exceeds "3", the number of bets is given. is subtracted from the remaining grant number of the AT continuation counter 74e, and when the remaining grant number becomes "0", an end waiting period that continues over one game occurs, and 1 Although the AT state ST5 is configured to end when the game is executed and the end waiting period ends, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the AT state ST5 is started, the initial number of games is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and every time a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the remaining number of games in the AT continuation counter 74e is reduced to "1" is subtracted, and when the number of remaining games becomes "0", the number of grants for waiting for the end is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and the end standby period is entered, and the number of bets during the end standby period. When game media exceeding "3" are awarded, the value exceeding the number of bets is subtracted from the remaining number of awards of the AT continuation counter 74e, and the remaining number of awards is "0". As a result, the AT state ST5 may be terminated when the termination standby period is terminated. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of grants for waiting for termination is equal to or less than the expected net increase in game media (a value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of grants) in one game in the AT state ST5. In this case, the end standby period basically ends after one game and continues over a plurality of games depending on the situation. Further, the above-mentioned grant number for waiting for completion may be a value exceeding the net increase expected number of game media (a value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected grant number) in one game in the AT state ST5. In this case, the end waiting period continues over a plurality of games.

In addition, when the AT state ST5 is started, the initial success number is set in the AT continuation counter 74e, and the AT is continued every time the first bell win or the second bell win is established in the game in which the bet number is "3". "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of establishments of the counter 74e, and when the remaining number of establishments becomes "0", an end standby period continues over a predetermined number of games, and the predetermined number of games are executed. Then, the AT state ST5 may be terminated when the end standby period is terminated. The predetermined number of games may be one game, or a plurality of games such as two games, three games, or four games or more.

In the configuration in which the initial winning number is set in this way, when one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in order. In either case of the stop order of the correct answer corresponding to the achievement of the bell prize or the stop order of the correct answer different from the stop order of the correct answer, "1" is added to the number of remaining establishments of the AT continuation counter 74e. It is good also as a structure subtracted. In this case, the number of remaining establishments is displayed in the remaining number display image G12 on the image display device 63, but one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13). When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order in which the bell prize is established, the number of remaining grants is displayed in a display mode that is easy for the player to recognize, such as the sequential update mode in the above embodiment. The value of the display image G12 is subtracted, and the reels 32L and 32M are stopped in the order in which any of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) and the bell winning is not established. , 32R is stopped, the value of the remaining number display image G12 may be subtracted in a display mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as the batch update mode in the above embodiment.

In addition, in the configuration in which the initial establishment number is set at the beginning of the AT state ST5 as described above, in the end waiting period, the AT continuation counter 74e is set with the number of grants for end waiting, and is the number of bets in the end waiting period. When game media exceeding "3" are awarded, the value exceeding the number of bets is subtracted from the remaining number of awards of the AT continuation counter 74e, and the remaining number of awards becomes "0". Thus, the AT state ST5 may be terminated when the termination standby period is terminated. The number of grants for waiting for completion may be equal to or less than the expected net increase in game media (a value obtained by subtracting "3" from the expected number of grants) in one game in AT state ST5. The value may exceed the net increase expected number of game media (a value obtained by subtracting “3” from the expected number of grants).

In addition, in the configuration in which the initial number of grants or the number of initial games is set at the beginning of the AT state ST5, the number of establishments for the end standby is set in the AT continuation counter 74e in the end standby period, and the bet number during the end standby period is " 3”, every time the first bell win or the second bell win is established, “1” is subtracted from the remaining number of establishments of the AT continuation counter 74e, and the remaining number of establishments becomes “0”. , the AT state ST5 may be terminated when the termination waiting period is terminated. The number of establishment times for waiting for completion may be one, or a plurality of times such as two times, three times, or four times or more.

・When a number of game media exceeding the bet number of “3” is awarded in the AT state ST5, the value obtained by subtracting the bet number of “3” from the number of awarded game media is stored in the main RAM 74. Although the configuration is such that the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is decremented, the present invention is not limited to this. may be subtracted from the value of

・The end waiting period is not limited to the configuration in which the end waiting period after the remaining number of grants becomes "0" in AT state ST5 is not limited to one game, and the end waiting period is 2 games, 3 games or 4 games. The game may be ended by executing the number of waiting games to be ended. In this case, the AT state ST5 continues over a plurality of games after the remaining given number becomes "0".

・Although it was configured so that the number of remaining grants would not become 1 or more again regardless of the outcome of the game during the waiting period for the end of the AT state ST5, A configuration may be adopted in which the number of grants can be 1 or more again. For example, when the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the end standby period is a predetermined result or when a predetermined winning result is obtained, the additional lottery process is executed, and in the additional lottery process 1 or more When the given number is selected, the selected given number is added to the AT continuation counter 74e, so that the remaining given number becomes 1 or more again. In this case, the AT state ST5 continues until the remaining number of grants becomes "0", and when the remaining number of grants becomes "0", the end waiting period may occur again. A configuration may be adopted in which the period does not occur again.

・In the AT state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the prize lottery process (Fig. 13), regardless of whether or not the bell prize has been established, the number of remaining grants on the image display device 63 A configuration may be adopted in which the subtraction of the value of the display image G12 is performed in the same display mode.

When a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is maintained without being decremented, and the value of the remaining given number display image G12 is also decremented. Although it is configured to be maintained without being changed, it is not limited to this. Even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the AT state ST5, if the number of game media exceeding the bet number is awarded, the excess amount is the remaining amount of the AT continuation counter 74e. may be subtracted from the given number and also subtracted from the value of the remaining given number display image G12.

- A configuration in which the AT state ST5 does not have an end waiting period may be adopted. In this case, the AT state ST5 ends in the game in which the number of remaining tokens becomes "0". Even with this configuration, if one of the index values IV=1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the AT state ST5, the bell prize is won regardless of whether the bell prize is established. A value obtained by subtracting "3", which is the number of bets, from the number of awarded game media due to success may be subtracted from the remaining number of awards of the AT continuation counter 74e and subtracted from the value of the remaining number of awarded number display image G12. preferable. Further, it is preferable that the display mode in the case of subtracting the value of the remaining number display image G12 is also the display mode described in the above embodiment.

The reel 32L is stopped in a different stop order from the stop order that enables the establishment of a bell prize when one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 13) in the AT state ST5. , 32M, and 32R, only one of the collective display of the remaining number display image G12 and the application of the visibility lowering effect G66 to the image display device 63 may be performed.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the types of games to be reflected in the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 of the AT end display are different from those in the eighth embodiment. The configuration different from that of the eighth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the eighth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing AT processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

If the number of bets in this game is "3" (step S4201: YES), regardless of the value of the AT continuation counter 74e, the number of games during AT is added (step S4202), and the net increase during AT is executed (step S4203). The contents of the process for adding the number of games during AT are the same as those in step S3903 of the process for AT (FIG. 70) in the eighth embodiment, and the contents of the process for updating the net increase during AT are those of the eighth embodiment. This is the same as step S3904 of the AT processing (FIG. 70). As a result, not only the game started when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, but also the game started when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0", that is, the content of the game waiting for completion This is also reflected in the values of the AT game number counter and the AT net addition number counter of the main side RAM 74 . That is, when the game waiting for completion is executed, the value of the AT game number counter is incremented by 1, and the value of the net increase number counter during AT is updated according to the winning result in the game waiting for completion.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S4204). When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more (step S4204: NO), the processing of steps S4205 to S4209 is executed. The processing contents of steps S4205 to S4209 are the same as steps S3905 to S3909 of the AT processing (FIG. 70) in the eighth embodiment. In this case, in step S4208, an AT end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, but the AT end command does not include the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net addition number counter during AT of the main side RAM74.

When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e is "0" (step S4204: YES), the remaining number of grants in the AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0", and the current game is a game to be waited for completion. means that In this case, 1 is subtracted from the end standby counter value of the main RAM 74 (step S4210). It should be noted that even if the remaining number of bets in the AT state ST5 in the previous game is "0", if the game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the next game, it is denied in step S4201. Since the process of step S4210 is not executed by making the determination, the AT state ST5 continues even after the game is executed.

When the value of the end standby counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 in step S4210, on condition that the value of the end standby counter is "0" (step S4211: YES), the AT state ST5 and the second A process for ending the section SC2 is executed. Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S4212). The processing contents of the initialization processing of the second section SC2 are the same as the initialization processing of the second section SC2 (step S814) in the first embodiment. Specifically, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In addition, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in the AT state ST5, the AT state ST5 including the counter for storing the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is maintained. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data (including the AT state flag) indicating . Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated. After that, if the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S4213). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated.

Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4214). The second interval initialization command includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net increase number counter during AT of the main side RAM 74 . It should be noted that, even in this embodiment, the second section initialization command is transmitted at step S3216 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section as in the sixth embodiment. The initialization command also includes the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net addition number counter during AT of the main side RAM 74 .

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the effect control process for AT in this embodiment, which is executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not an AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. The AT end command is sent in step S4208 in the AT process (FIG. 74) as already described. That is, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the AT state ST5, one of the index values IV = 1 to 13 is won, and the subtraction process of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is executed. When the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0", an AT end command is transmitted. In addition, the AT end command is transmitted in step S3211 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section as in the sixth embodiment. In other words, when the AT state ST5 is ended by the fulfillment of the ending condition of the second section SC2, the AT state ST5 is ended without the completion of the waiting number of games. An AT end command is sent before the freeze period occurs.

If the AT termination command has been received (step S4301: YES), the processing for setting an explicit termination display is executed (step S4302). In the process of setting the explicit end display, data is set so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute an effect that enables the player to recognize the end of the AT state ST5. will be In this case, as data for controlling the display of the image display device 63, an end clear image G61 (specifically, a character image of "RUSH end") for allowing the player to recognize that the AT state ST5 is ended is displayed. is set in the effect-side RAM 94 to enable the display of . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, data setting for displaying the total number of games image G62, the total number of wins image G63, and the attention image G52 on the image display device 63 is not performed at the stage of receiving the AT end command.

FIG. 76(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the processing for setting the explicit end display is executed. As shown in FIG. 76(a), the image display device 63 displays an end clear image G61 (specifically, a text image of "RUSH finished"), a total number of games image G62, and a total number of wins image G63. and caution image G52 are not displayed.

In step S4303, it is determined whether or not a second section initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72. The second interval initialization command is transmitted at step S4214 in the AT process (FIG. 74) as already described. That is, in the AT state ST5, the second interval initialization command is transmitted when the remaining number of game media to be provided becomes "0" and the number of games waiting for completion is executed. In addition, the second section initialization command is transmitted in step S3216 in the second control process (FIG. 60) of the game section as in the sixth embodiment. In other words, when the AT state ST5 is ended by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the AT state ST5 is ended without the completion of the waiting number of games. A second interval initialization command is sent when the freeze period has elapsed.

If the second interval initialization command has been received (step S4303: YES), the result display setting process is executed (step S4304), and the attention display setting process is executed (step S4305). In the result display setting process, the value of the counter for the number of AT games in the main RAM 74 set in the second interval initialization command is grasped, and the data of the total number of games image G62 corresponding to the grasped value is transferred to the effect side. Set in RAM 94. Also, in the result display setting process, the value of the AT net increase counter in the main side RAM 74 set in the second interval initialization command is grasped, and the data of the total acquired number image G63 corresponding to the grasped value is stored. It is set in the performance-side RAM 94. Further, in the warning display setting process, data for causing the image display device 63 to execute a warning display for preventing the player from becoming absorbed in the game is set in the effect side RAM 94 .

In FIG. 76(b), the result display setting process (step S4304) and the caution display setting process (step S4305) are executed with the reception of the second section initialization command after the execution of the explicit end display setting process. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of an image display device 63 when As shown in FIG. 76(b), the image display device 63 displays an end clear image G61 (specifically, a text image of "RUSH finished"), a total number of games image G62, a total number of wins image G63, and a warning image. An image G52 is displayed.

In other words, the AT state ST5 ends when the number of games waiting to be completed is completed from the game in which the remaining number of game media to be provided becomes "0" in the AT state ST5. The image display device 63 starts to display the result and the warning when the game waiting for completion is finished instead of the game in which the awarded number is "0". Further, when the AT state ST5 is ended by satisfying the ending condition of the second interval SC2, the second interval initialization command is transmitted after the freeze period elapses in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied. However, in this case, when the freeze period has passed, the image display device 63 starts to display the result and the warning.

Here, the second interval initialization command includes the value of the AT game counter and the AT net increase counter value of the main RAM 74, and is a process for updating the AT game counter value. The AT game number addition process (step S4202) and the AT net increase number update process (step S4203), which is a process for updating the value of the AT net increase counter value, are performed when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is It is executed not only in the game executed in the situation where the AT continuation counter 74e is 1 or more, but also in the game waiting for the end when the value of the AT continuation counter 74e becomes "0". Then, the second interval initialization command is transmitted in a state in which the value of the game number counter during AT and the value of the net addition number counter during AT reflecting the contents of the game waiting for completion are set. Therefore, the number of games displayed in the total number of games image G62 in the result display is the number of games completed before the remaining number of game media to be provided becomes "0" in the AT state ST5 and the number of games completed during the end waiting period. total number of games. In addition, the number of game media displayed in the total acquisition number image G63 in the result display is the number of game media acquired in the games consumed until the remaining number of awarded game media becomes "0" in the AT state ST5, and This is the total number of game media acquired in the games consumed during the end waiting period.

After executing the processing of step S4304 and step S4305, "1" is set to the initialization command received flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S4306). The initialization command received flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify that the second section initialization command has already been received in the AT state ST5.

If the initialization command received flag is set to "1" (step S4307: YES), it is determined whether or not a game medium bet has been set for starting a new game (step S4308). When a game medium bet setting is performed by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45 or operating the credit insertion buttons 47 and 48 in a situation where a new game can be started, the main MPU 72 executes a command corresponding to the bet setting. is sent to the MPU 92 on the production side. The command is transmitted each time one or more game media are betted, but may be configured to be transmitted when the number of game media capable of starting the game has been betted. If the effect-side MPU 92 has received the command, it determines that a game medium bet setting for starting a new game has been performed, and makes an affirmative determination in step S4308.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, end processing of explicit end display (step S4309), end processing of result display (step S4310), and end processing of caution display (step S4311) are executed. In the end processing of the clear end display, the data for executing the clear end display is erased and the data setting is performed so that the display of the image G53 (see FIG. 52(c)) of the normal game state ST1 is started. . Further, in the end processing of the result display, the data for executing the result display are erased, and in the end processing of the caution display, the data for executing the caution display are erased. As a result, the state in which the end clear image G61, the total number of games image G62, the total number of wins image G63, and the attention image G52 are displayed on the image display device 63 in the final game in the AT state ST5 is the state for starting a new game. When the bet setting is made, the game ends and the display of the image G53 of the normal game state ST1 is started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4308, the initialization command received flag is cleared to "0".

In the effect control process for AT (FIG. 75), in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed (step S4312). In the other processing, data to be referred to in various tables are updated as the game progresses, and processing for updating the effect content is executed. Also, when the first ending command or the second ending command is received from the main MPU 72, a process for performing an ending effect is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the remaining awarded number is "0" in the AT state ST5, the image display device 63 starts displaying the end clear image G61, while the total number of games image G62 and the total winning Display of the number image G63 is not started. Then, when one game is played during the end waiting period, the display of the total number-of-games image G62 and the total number-of-acquisitions image G63 including the result of the one game is started. This makes it possible to display the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 corresponding to the overall result of the AT state ST5 in the configuration in which the display period of the clear end image G61 is long. Become.

When the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops in one game during the end standby period, the display of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 is started. As a result, it is possible to start displaying the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 in a state based on the result of the one game.

Note that when the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stops in one game during the end waiting period, the image display device 63 starts displaying the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63, and also displays a caution image. Although the display of G52 is started, the configuration is not limited to this, and the caution image G52 is started to be displayed after the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 are started to be displayed. Alternatively, the display of the attention image G52 may be started before the display of the total number of games image G62 and the total number of wins image G63 is started.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in the manner of controlling the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. This different configuration will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 77 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 32L. The middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R have the same configuration as the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L includes a cylindrical frame member 141 forming a cylindrical basket, and a belt-like belt (not shown in FIG. 77) wound endlessly around its outer peripheral surface. The belt is attached to the cylindrical frame member 141 through a pair of seal portions formed along both long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns as identification information are printed at regular intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the strip-shaped belt. A central portion of the cylindrical frame member 141 is attached to a drive shaft of a stepping motor 142 . Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 142 rotates, the cylindrical skeleton member 141 rotates about the drive shaft, and the left reel 32L rotates.

The stepping motor 142 is screw-fixed to the side surface of a motor plate 143 arranged in an upright state within the reel unit 31 . A motor plate 143 is provided with a reel index sensor 144 in which a light emitting element 144a and a light receiving element 144b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, a radially extending sensor cut bang 145 is screwed to the cylindrical frame member 141 . A leading end portion 145a of the sensor cut bang 145 is bent at a substantially right angle and positioned so as to pass between the elements 144a and 144b of the reel index sensor 144. As shown in FIG. Each time the left reel 32L rotates once, the reel index sensor 144 detects the passage of the leading end 145a of the sensor cut bang 145, and a detection signal is output to the main MPU 72 each time the detection is made. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 142 is set to make one rotation by applying an excitation signal of 504 pulses, for example, and progressing by 504 steps. The number of steps controls the rotational position of the stepping motor 142, that is, the rotational position of the left reel 32L. be done. On each belt of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of patterns, specifically 21 patterns are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) are required to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position. Based on the number of pulses after the detection signal of the reel index sensor 144 is output, it is possible to recognize which pattern is visible through the display window portion 21L, or to display any pattern through the display window portion 21L. It is possible to perform control to make it visible.

<Operating Principle of Stepping Motor 142>
78(a) is a connection diagram showing the driving system of the stepping motor 142, and FIG. 78(b) is a diagram showing the driving characteristics of the stepping motor 142. As shown in FIG.

A hybrid (HB) two-phase stepping motor is used as the stepping motor 142 . Note that the stepping motor 142 is not limited to the hybrid type, and various stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), the hybrid stepping motor 142 includes a rotor 151 arranged in the center and a stator 152 having first to fourth poles 153 to 156 arranged around the rotor 151. and The rotor 151 is composed of a front rotor 151a magnetized to N poles and a back rotor 151b magnetized to S poles. It is attached to the rotating shaft in a state of being relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around the back side rotor 151b are positioned between them. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 151a and the back rotor 151b.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), the excitation coil L0 and the excitation coil L2 are bifilar-wound around the first pole 153 and the third pole 155, and the end of the winding of the excitation coil L0 and the beginning of the winding of the excitation coil L2 are connected to each other. is connected, and a predetermined DC power source +B (for example, +24 volts) is applied here. Similarly, the excitation coil L1 and the excitation coil L3 are also bifilar-wound around the second pole 154 and the fourth pole 156, and the end of the winding of the excitation coil L1 and the beginning of the winding of the excitation coil L3 are connected. Power supply +B is applied.

A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L0 of the first pole 153 to excite the first pole 153 to the south pole and excite the third pole 155 to the north pole is defined as an A phase. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of 155 to excite the first pole 153 to the N pole and excite the third pole 155 to the S pole is called an inverse A phase. Similarly, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the second pole 154 to excite the second pole 154 to the S pole and excite the fourth pole 156 to the N pole is called the B phase. A phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the fourth pole 156 to excite the second pole 154 to the N pole and excite the fourth pole 156 to the S pole is called a reverse B phase.

An excitation signal for the stepping motor 142 is applied as excitation data to the motor driver 157 shown in FIG. 78(b). This excitation data is stored in the main-side RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. An excitation phase for the stepping motor 142 is determined by this excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is supplied to the excitation phase.

When the stepping motor 142 is of a one-phase excitation drive system, the rotor 151 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to the A-phase, B-phase, reverse A-phase, and reverse B-phase. It can be driven to rotate. In other words, for example, when the A phase is energized first, the projection of the first pole 153 which is the S pole and the teeth of the rotor 151a on the front side, the projection of the third pole 155 which is the N pole and the teeth of the rotor 151b on the back side. are facing each other due to their attractive forces, and when the B-phase is energized next, the protrusion of the second pole 154 that has become the S pole and the teeth of the front side rotor 151a, the protrusion of the fourth pole 156 that has become the N pole and the back side rotation The teeth of the child 151b face each other due to their attractive force, and when the reverse A phase is energized, the projection of the first pole 153 that has become the N pole, the teeth of the inner rotor 151b, and the third pole 155 that has become the S pole. and the teeth of the rotor 151a on the front side face each other due to their attractive forces. The projection of the curved fourth pole 156 and the teeth of the front rotor 151a face each other due to the attraction force. By energizing in this order, the rotor 151 rotates clockwise in FIG. 78(a).

In the slot machine 10, during the acceleration period until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate at a constant speed and the constant speed period for maintaining the constant speed rotation, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are performed. A 1-2 phase excitation drive is adopted in which . An excitation order table exists as a table referred to by the main side MPU 72 in order to perform 1-2 phase excitation driving in these acceleration period and constant speed period. The excitation order table is pre-stored in the main ROM 73 at the manufacturing stage of the slot machine 10 . FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the excitation order table.

In the excitation order table, as shown in FIG. 79, excitation order pointers "0" to "7" are set, and the type of excitation phase is set for each excitation order pointer. The excitation order pointer of "0" is set to 1-phase excitation in which phase A is energized, and the excitation order pointer of "1" is set to 2-phase excitation in which both phases A and B are energized. , the excitation order pointer of "2" is set to 1-phase excitation in which the B phase is energized, and the excitation order pointer of "3" is set to 2-phase excitation in which both the B phase and the reverse A phase are energized. The excitation order pointer of "4" is set to 1-phase excitation in which the reverse A phase is energized, and the excitation order pointer of "5" is set to 2-phase excitation in which both the reverse A phase and the reverse B phase are energized. Excitation is set, the excitation order pointer of "6" is set to 1-phase excitation in which the reverse B phase is energized, and the excitation order pointer of "7" is energized to both the reverse B phase and the A phase. 2-phase excitation is set. When the acceleration period or the constant speed period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R continues in a situation where the excitation order pointer is "7", the excitation order pointer to be controlled returns to "0" and returns to "0". Drive control is performed by the excitation order pointer. In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated once by 504 pulses of the excitation signal. 0.714°.

When the stepping motor 142 having the above configuration is used, it can be roughly divided into an acceleration period and a constant speed period from when the start lever 41 is operated until the stepping motor 142 starts rotating and reaches a constant constant speed. Further, the constant speed period is divided into a maintenance period in which the rotation speed is maintained until the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, and a stop period in which the motor stops with a predetermined slippage based on the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. be done. As for the stop period, it is necessary to stop the stepping motor 142 within a maximum of 190 milliseconds after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated.

FIG. 80(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the acceleration table 158 on which the excitation pattern is set when starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As the initial excitation phase during acceleration, two-phase excitation in which two specific excitation phases are driven at the same time as well as one-phase excitation in which only a specific excitation phase is driven can be considered. Although it depends on the size of the reel and the inertia, it is possible to accelerate the reel from the initial speed of zero in a normal slot machine even with one-phase excitation. However, since the two-phase excitation has a larger rotational torque than the one-phase excitation, the two-phase excitation is preferable for the initial excitation in order to obtain a sufficient initial speed.

In the excitation pattern shown in FIG. 80(a), after the two-phase excitation is set in synchronization with the interrupt timing every 1.49 milliseconds, this excitation state is maintained for 130 interrupts. After holding the state of 2-phase excitation over 130 interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), 1-2 phase excitation is alternately repeated. The excitation holding period for one-phase excitation and the excitation holding period for two-phase excitation are finely controlled. Specifically, 1-phase excitation following 2-phase excitation, which is the initial excitation, is performed for 8 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11), and the next 2-phase excitation is performed for 7 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11). It is set so that the retention period is gradually shortened. Finally, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of 2 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11), and finally 1-phase excitation becomes 2 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11). It is set to run throughout. Since the end of the acceleration table 158 is thus one-phase excitation, the type of first phase excitation in the constant-speed rotation period is two-phase excitation. By successively shortening the holding period in each phase excitation as it approaches constant speed rotation, high-speed acceleration processing can be realized in a short time, and a smooth transition to constant speed rotation is possible. In constant-speed rotation, one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

Four-phase excitation is used to stop the stepping motor 142 . In four-phase excitation, all of the A phase, reverse A phase, B phase and reverse B phase are excited. When two opposite phases are excited, the magnetic fluxes cancel each other out, but during rotation of the stepping motor 142, the induced voltage causes a back electromotive force, and for example, the torque of the difference between the currents flowing in the A phase and the reverse A phase. occurs. In the case of four-phase excitation, the torque is generated between the two opposite phases. Therefore, it is possible to generate a braking force even with four-phase excitation. However, the braking force in the case of four-phase excitation is smaller than in the case of one-phase excitation.

A case where the stepping motor 142 is stopped using four-phase excitation will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stop table 159 on which the excitation pattern is set when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped.

When the stepping motor 142 is stopped, as shown in FIG. 80(b), 4-phase excitation is started by generating a stop command in a situation where 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately repeated. . In this case, the timing at which the 4-phase excitation is started is determined to be the timing after the 2-phase excitation is executed over one interrupt. This 4-phase excitation continues for 100 interrupts (149 milliseconds). After the 4-phase excitation is performed for 100 interrupts, the 1-phase excitation is terminated after 34 interruptions (50.7 milliseconds). The phase to be subjected to this one-phase excitation is the one phase corresponding to the target stop angle position.

As described above, the rotor 151 of the stepping motor 142 can be smoothly stopped by using the four-phase excitation with the weakest braking force at the start of braking. However, when the four-phase excitation is performed due to the weak braking force, the rotor 151 advances to some extent due to inertia from the timing when the four-phase excitation is started. The number of steps advanced by this inertia differs depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31. Although the number of steps can be grasped to some extent at the design stage through experiments using the reel unit 31, it is not constant. Some variability can occur. On the other hand, after four-phase excitation is performed for a predetermined period, one-phase excitation for one phase corresponding to the target stop angle position is performed for a predetermined period. It is possible to set the designed position.

The number of steps of the stepping motor 142 is used to grasp the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Specifically, as already explained, in the slot machine 10, 21 symbols are drawn on each belt of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the number of steps required for one rotation is 504 steps. there is In this case, the number of steps required to switch from a symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position (lower position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the range visible from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R) (i.e. The number of steps assigned to each symbol) is constant at 24 steps. Therefore, the number of steps from when the sensor cut-bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, the number of times the excitation signal of one pulse is output (that is, the number of times the excitation phase is switched) , the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are grasped.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing reel control processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

In the reel control process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined start wait period (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game (step S4401). ). If the start wait period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S4401 until the start wait period elapses. When the start wait period has passed, the start wait period for the next game is set again (step S4402), and the rotation start flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4403). . As a result, acceleration processing of the stepping motor 142 is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating.

After that, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S4404). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S4404 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the valid period flags 162a to 162c (see FIG. 82) provided in the main RAM 74 are set to the stop button 42 to 44 operated this time. It is determined whether or not the corresponding validity period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1" (step S4405). Valid period flags 162a-162c are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the respective stop buttons 42-44 (that is, the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R). Each valid period flag 162a to 162c is set to "1" when the rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the acceleration period is completed, and the reels 32L, 32M are rotated at a constant speed. , 32R are cleared to "0". In other words, a situation in which "1" is set in the validity period flags 162a to 162c corresponds to a situation in which the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are validated.

If the effective period flags 162a-162c corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 determined to be operated in step S4404 are not set to "1" (step S4405: NO), the process returns to step S4404. Therefore, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the validity period flags 162a to 162c not set to "1" are operated, the operation is treated as invalid. If the effective period flags 162a-162c corresponding to the stop buttons 42-44 determined to be operated in step S4404 are set to "1" (step S4405: YES), the current stop buttons 42-44 operation is valid. Therefore, the processing for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop buttons 42 to 44 operated this time is executed.

Specifically, first, button light-off processing is executed (step S4406). Each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is provided with a light-emitting portion (not shown) on its back side. The light-emitting part is turned on at the timing when the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate at a constant speed and the operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 is validated, and the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. When the control for stopping the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started based on , the lights are turned off. In the button extinguishing process, the light emitting units corresponding to all the stop buttons 42 to 44 including the stop button 42 to 44 operated this time are extinguished. When the stop control is started for one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the other reels 32L, 32M, 32R are set regardless of whether the effective period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1". The operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to are invalidated. In this case, when the stop control is started for one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the button extinguishing process (step S4406) is executed and the stop button 42 corresponding to the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R is pressed. By turning off all the stop buttons 42 to 44 including .about.44, it is possible for the player to recognize that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is disabled. When the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has been issued this time is completed, if there are reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the stop command has not yet been issued, the stop command has not yet been issued. The light-emitting portions of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are not generated are turned on.

After that, a stop instruction command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4407). The stop instruction command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. After that, in the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are to be stopped this time, the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols that have reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated are confirmed. (Step S4408). Specifically, the number of pulses of the excitation signal output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is input (that is, the number of times the excitation phase is switched). confirms the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slides of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S4409).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S4409, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S4410). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the arrival symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time are equal to the symbol numbers of the stop symbols (step S4411). A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S4412). The main side RAM 74 is provided with stop instruction flags 163a to 163c corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M and 32R on a one-to-one basis. "1" is set to the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently being stopped in the stop control process (FIG. 85), which will be described later, is started.

After that, it is determined whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time have been stopped (step S4413). The main-side RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 164a to 164c (see FIG. 82) corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on a one-to-one basis. , 32R are set to "1". If the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time have not been completely stopped, the process waits in step S4413. If the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time have been stopped (step S4413: YES), it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S4414). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S4415), and then the process returns to step S4404.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting processing executed in step S409 of the winning lottery processing (FIG. 13) and the step S4415 of the reel control processing (FIG. 81) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

When it is determined in step S4414 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, winning determination processing is executed in step S4416. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, a combination of symbols stopped and displayed on one of the main lines ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is won in the winning lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is assumed that the winning combination is established, and the winning handling processing is executed.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed for executing the replay setting process.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4417). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

Next, a configuration for controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each area of the main side RAM 74 used for executing rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

As shown in FIG. 82, the main RAM 74 is provided with acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c. As the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c, a left acceleration completion flag 161a is associated with the left reel 32L, a middle acceleration completion flag 161b is associated with the middle reel 32M, and a right acceleration completion flag 161c is associated with the right reel 32R. and are provided. After the rotation of the left reel 32L is started, when the acceleration period of the left reel 32L is completed and the constant speed rotation is started, the left acceleration completion flag 161a is set to "1", and the left reel 32L is rotated. When the stop is completed, the left acceleration completion flag 161a is cleared to "0". After the rotation of the middle reel 32M is started, when the acceleration period of the middle reel 32M is completed and the constant speed rotation is started, the middle reel 32M is set to "1" to the middle reel 32M. is completed, the intermediate acceleration completion flag 161b is cleared to "0". After the rotation of the right reel 32R is started, when the acceleration period of the right reel 32R is completed and the constant speed rotation is started, the right acceleration completion flag 161c is set to "1", and the right reel 32R is set to "1". is completed, the right acceleration completion flag 161c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with effective period flags 162a to 162c. As the effective period flags 162a to 162c, a left effective period flag 162a is associated with the left reel 32L, a middle effective period flag 162b is associated with the middle reel 32M, and a right effective period flag 162c is associated with the right reel 32R. and are provided. When the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the left reel 32L detects the sensor cut bang 145 after the constant speed rotation of the left reel 32L is started, the left effective period flag 162a is set to "1" and the left When the reel 32L is completely stopped, the left effective period flag 162a is cleared to "0". After the constant speed rotation of the middle reel 32M is started, when the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, the middle effective period flag 162b is set to "1", When the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed, the middle effective period flag 162b is cleared to "0". When the reel index sensor 144 corresponding to the right reel 32R detects the sensor cut bang 145 after the right reel 32R starts rotating at a constant speed, the right effective period flag 162c is set to "1", When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right effective period flag 162c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop instruction flags 163a to 163c. As the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c, a left stop instruction flag 163a is associated with the left reel 32L, a middle stop instruction flag 163b is associated with the middle reel 32M, and a right stop instruction flag 163c is associated with the right reel 32R. and are provided. When the reel stop processing (step S4412) of the reel control processing (FIG. 81) is executed based on the operation of the left stop button 42 in a situation where the left effective period flag 162a is set to "1", the left stop is performed. The instruction flag 163a is set to "1", and the left stop instruction flag 163a is cleared to "0" when the stop of the left reel 32L is completed. When the reel stop processing (step S4412) of the reel control processing (FIG. 81) is executed based on the operation of the middle stop button 43 in the situation where the middle use effective period flag 162b is set to "1", the middle The medium stop instruction flag 163b is set to "1", and the medium stop instruction flag 163b is cleared to "0" when the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed. If the reel stop processing (step S4412) of the reel control processing (FIG. The right stop instruction flag 163c is set to "1", and when the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right stop instruction flag 163c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop completion flags 164a to 164c. As the stop completion flags 164a to 164c, a left stop completion flag 164a is associated with the left reel 32L, a middle stop completion flag 164b is associated with the middle reel 32M, and a right stop completion flag 164c is associated with the right reel 32R. and are provided. When the stop of the left reel 32L is completed, the left stop completion flag 164a is set to "1", the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, and an affirmative determination is made in step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81). is cleared, the left stop completion flag 164a is cleared to "0". When the stop of the middle reel 32M is completed, the middle stop completion flag 164b is set to "1", the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the result of step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81) is affirmative. When the determination is made, the intermediate use stop completion flag 164b is cleared to "0". When the stop of the right reel 32R is completed, the right stop completion flag 164c is set to "1", the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, and the result of step S4414 of the reel control process (FIG. 81) is affirmative. When the determination is made, the right stop completion flag 164c is cleared to "0".

The main RAM 74 is provided with acceleration counters 165a to 165c. As the acceleration counters 165a to 165c, a left acceleration counter 165a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle acceleration counter 165b corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right acceleration counter 165c corresponding to the right reel 32R are provided. ing. Each of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c determines whether the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state where acceleration control using the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is being executed, and whether the acceleration control is being executed. It is a counter for specifying in the main side MPU 72 which acceleration control corresponding to which acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 is being executed when it is in the state of being executed.

When the acceleration control of the left reel 32L is newly started, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24", and the acceleration order data to be referred to for the acceleration control of the left reel 32L in the acceleration table 158 is changed. The value of the left acceleration counter 165a is decremented by 1 each time. When the value of the left acceleration counter 165a becomes "0" after the subtraction of 1, it is specified that the acceleration of the left reel 32L is completed. When the acceleration control of the middle reel 32M is newly started, the middle acceleration counter 165b is set to "24", and the acceleration order data to be referred to for the acceleration control of the middle reel 32M in the acceleration table 158 is changed. The value of the medium acceleration counter 165b is decremented by 1 each time. When the value of the intermediate acceleration counter 165b becomes "0" after the subtraction of 1, it is specified that the acceleration of the intermediate reel 32M is completed. When the acceleration control of the right reel 32R is newly started, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24", and the acceleration order data to be referred to for the acceleration control of the right reel 32R in the acceleration table 158 is changed. The value of the right acceleration counter 165c is decremented by 1 each time. When the value of the right acceleration counter 165c becomes "0" after the subtraction of 1, it is specified that the acceleration of the right reel 32R is completed.

The main RAM 74 is provided with excitation counters 166a to 166c. As the excitation counters 166a to 166c, a left excitation counter 166a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle excitation counter 166b corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right excitation counter 166c corresponding to the right reel 32R are provided. ing. Each of the excitation counters 166a to 166c is subject to the current acceleration control when the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are under acceleration control using the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to identify the remaining excitation period of the current acceleration sequence.

When excitation in a predetermined acceleration order is started in the acceleration control of the left reel 32L, the switching interval data set corresponding to the predetermined acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is set in the left excitation counter 166a. The value set in the left excitation counter 166a is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed. 165a is decremented by 1, and if the value of the left acceleration counter 165a after the subtraction of 1 is 1 or more, the acceleration order corresponding to the value of the left acceleration counter 165a in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is selected. The data of the corresponding switching interval is set in the left excitation counter 166a. When excitation in a predetermined acceleration order is started in the acceleration control of the middle reel 32M, the switching interval data set corresponding to the predetermined acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is set in the intermediate excitation counter 166b. The value set in the intermediate excitation counter 166b is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed. The value of the intermediate acceleration counter 165b is decremented by 1, and if the value of the intermediate acceleration counter 165b after the subtraction of 1 is 1 or more, the value of the intermediate acceleration counter 165b in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is changed to The switching interval data set in association with the corresponding acceleration order is set in the intermediate excitation counter 166b. In acceleration control of the right reel 32R, when excitation in a predetermined acceleration order is started, the switching interval data set corresponding to the predetermined acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)) is used. is set in the right excitation counter 166c. The value set in the right excitation counter 166c is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed. The value of the right acceleration counter 165c is decremented by 1, and if the value of the right acceleration counter 165c after the subtraction of 1 is 1 or more, the value of the right acceleration counter 165c in the acceleration table 158 (Fig. 80(a)) The switching interval data set in association with the corresponding acceleration order is set in the right excitation counter 166c.

The main RAM 74 is provided with stop position areas 167a to 167c. The stop position areas 167a to 167c include a left stop position area 167a corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle stop position area 167b corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right stop position area 167c corresponding to the right reel 32R. and are provided. The stop position areas 167a to 167c are storage areas for storing data corresponding to the stop positions of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are completely stopped. When the rotating left reel 32L stops, data corresponding to the stop position of the left reel 32L is stored in the left stop position area 167a. When the rotating middle reel 32M stops, data corresponding to the stop position of the middle reel 32M is stored in the middle stop position area 167b. When the rotating right reel 32R stops, data corresponding to the stop position of the right reel 32R is stored in the right stop position area 167c.

FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the stepping motor control process executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, it is determined whether or not the rotating flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4501). The rotating flag is set to "1" when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating, and is cleared to "0" when all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped. If the rotating flag is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether or not the rotation start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4502). As already described, when it is determined in the reel control process (FIG. 81) that the start wait period has elapsed (step S4401: YES), the rotation start flag is set to "1" in step S4403.

If the rotation start flag is set to "1" (step S4502: YES), the acceleration table 158 shown in FIG. 80(a) is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S4503). Then, rotation start processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed (step S4504). In the rotation start process, two-phase excitation is started for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the data set in the first acceleration order of the acceleration table 158. FIG. After that, "1" is set to the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4505). Also, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4506), and the left excitation counter 166a corresponds to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130", which is the data of the switching interval to be used, is set (step S4507). Also, the intermediate acceleration counter 165b is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4508), and the intermediate excitation counter 166b is set to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to , is set (step S4509). In addition, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4510), and the right excitation counter 166c is set to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to , is set (step S4511). Also, the rotation start flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4512).

When "1" is set to the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 (step S4501: YES), "1" is set to the target reel counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S4513). The target reel counter is a counter for specifying the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be subjected to the processing of steps S4514 to S4525 in the main MPU 72. When the value of the target reel counter is "1", the left reel 32L is subjected to the processing of steps S4514 to S4525, and when the value of the target reel counter is "2", the middle reel 32M is subjected to steps S4514 to step When the processing of S4525 is executed and the value of the target reel counter is "3", the right reel 32R becomes the processing target of steps S4514 to S4525.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop completion flags 164a to 164c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S4514). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4514, it means that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter have already stopped, so the processing of steps S4515 to S4525 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S4526.

If a negative determination is made in step S4514, if "1" is set in the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S4515: YES ), the stop control process is executed (step S4516), and the effective period flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter even though the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c are not set to "1" are set. If "1" is set in 162a-162c (step S4517: YES), constant speed control processing is executed (step S4518). These constant speed control processing and stop control processing will be described later.

If the effective period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are not set to "1" (step S4517: NO), the current target reel counter value It is determined whether or not the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are set to "1" (step S4519). If a negative determination is made in step S4519, acceleration control processing is executed (step S4520).

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing acceleration control processing.

First, the values of the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are subtracted by 1 (step S4601). If the value of the excitation counters 166a-166c after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4602: YES), the acceleration counters 165a-165c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values is subtracted by 1 (step S4603). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S4604).

If a negative determination is made in step S4604, excitation switching processing is executed (step S4605). In the excitation switching process, the excitation of the stepping motors 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is switched according to the order set in the excitation order table shown in FIG. In this case, if the current state is 1-phase excitation, it is switched to 2-phase excitation, and if the current state is 2-phase excitation, it is switched to 1-phase excitation. After that, the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c are set (step S4606). Specifically, the switching interval data corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c to be controlled this time is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read switching interval data is are set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c which are the control targets of . If an affirmative determination is made in step S4604, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S4607).

Returning to the description of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), when the corresponding acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c are set to "1" (step S4519: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S4521). . In the constant-speed control process, the excitation phase is switched by outputting a one-pulse excitation signal so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). After that, it is determined whether or not the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensors 144 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S4522). When the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 (step S4522: YES), "1" is set to the effective period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter. (step S4523). As a result, the operations of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are validated.

Here, the timing at which the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 after the constant speed rotation is started is that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the same time, and the same acceleration table 158 is used. Even if the acceleration control is performed by using it, it will differ depending on the previous stop position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the processing of steps S4522 and S4523, that is, the processing of setting "1" to the validity period flags 162a to 162c when the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144, is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R separately. Therefore, the timing at which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated differs for each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Therefore, it is possible to start the stopping operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R earlier than the configuration in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are simultaneously activated for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

After that, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are already lit (step S4524). Since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in a situation where the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off, basically the corresponding stop button is activated at the timing when the effective period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1". 42 to 44 are put out. Therefore, basically, a negative determination is made in step S4524, and button lighting processing is executed (step S4525). In the button lighting process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operation is validated are sequentially switched from the off state to the lighted state, making it easier for the player to recognize the stop buttons 42 to 44 whose operation is valid.

On the other hand, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not performed normally due to step-out or the like, step-out handling processing (step S4528), which will be described later, is executed so that the reel 32L whose rotation is abnormal is detected. , 32M, 32R are reaccelerated. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R complete acceleration and start rotating at a constant speed, and sensor cut bangs 145 are detected by the reel index sensors 144 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Operation of the stop buttons 42-44 is not validated. On the other hand, in step-out handling processing (step S4528) described later, processing for turning off the stop buttons 42 to 44 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R targeted for re-acceleration is not executed. Therefore, in a situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has already been activated and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are in a light emitting state, re-acceleration is performed due to the occurrence of abnormal rotation in the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the lighting state of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is maintained even before the operation is validated. Therefore, when the processing of step S4523 is executed based on such re-acceleration, the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are already lit, so an affirmative determination is made in step S4524 and step S4525. do not process.

If the effective period flags 162a to 162c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S4517: YES), the constant speed control process is executed (step S4518). In the constant-speed control process, as in the constant-speed control process of step S4521, one pulse is generated so that one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). output the excitation signal to switch the excitation phase. As a result, the constant-speed rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is maintained while the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 are activated. In this situation, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated, the reel stop processing is executed in step S4412 of the reel control processing (FIG. 81), thereby stopping the corresponding reels. "1" is set to the instruction flags 163a to 163c.

In the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), when the stop instruction flags 163a to 163c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S4515: YES), Stop control processing is executed (step S4516).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing stop control processing.

First, it is determined whether "1" is set in the stop control flag provided in the main side RAM 74 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value (step S4701). . The stop control flags are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the main MPU 72 specifies whether the stop control for the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R has started. used to If the corresponding stop control flag is not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), the stop table 159 shown in FIG. 80(b) is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S4702). This read out stop table 159 is used to stop the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter. , the stop table 159 is newly read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 . After that, the stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S4703).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, or if the process of step S4703 is executed, a stop control execution process is executed (step S4704). In the stop control execution process, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter are stopped according to the stop table 159 shown in FIG. 80(b).

After that, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter has been stopped (step S4705). Specifically, it is determined whether or not 1-phase excitation, which is the last excitation order in the stop table 159 read in association with the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, has been maintained over 34 interrupts. If the stop has been completed (step S4705: YES), various flag clearing processes are executed (step S4706). In the various flag clearing processes, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c, effective period flags 162a to 162c, stop instruction flags 163a to 163c, and stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to " 0” clear. Then, the stop completion flags 164a to 164c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S4707). As a result, even if the relevant reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be controlled in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), by making an affirmative determination in step S4514, steps S4515 to S4525 process will not be executed.

Thereafter, data corresponding to the stop positions of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stored in the stop position areas 167a to 167c of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values (step S4708). Specifically, the stop position areas 167a to 167c store data on the number of steps of the stepping motor 142 since the sensor cut bang 145 was detected last time by the reel index sensors 144 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the winning judgment process (step S4416) of the reel control process (FIG. 81), the combinations of symbols stopped in the current game on the main line ML are grasped based on the data stored in the respective stop position areas 167a to 167c. do.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all of the stop completion flags 164a to 164c are set to "1", thereby determining whether or not the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has stopped (step S4709). . If a negative determination is made in step S4709, the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the effective period flags 162a to 162c are set to "1" are switched from the off state to the on state ( step S4710). As already explained, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned on at the timing when the operation is validated. By executing the button extinguishing process in step S4406, even the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are extinguished. On the other hand, by executing the button lighting process in step S4710, the stop of rotation of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is completed, and the stop operation of the remaining reels 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled. In this case, the stop buttons 42 to 44 for which the stop operation is valid can be turned on correspondingly. On the other hand, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating (step S4709: YES), the rotating flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4711).

Returning to the description of the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83), if the determination in step S4514 is affirmative, if the process of step S4516 is executed, if the process of step S4518 is executed, if the process of step S4520 is executed, When a negative determination is made in step S4522, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4524, or when the process of step S4525 is executed, 1 is added to the target reel counter value of the main side RAM 74 (step S4526). If the value of the target reel counter after adding 1 is 3 or less (step S4527: NO), the process returns to step S4514. As a result, the processing of steps S4514 to S4525 is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotation control is to be executed next in order. If the value of the target reel counter after adding 1 is "4" (step S4527: YES), step-out handling processing is executed in step S4528, and then the stepping motor control processing is terminated.

In the step-out countermeasure process, the number of steps measured after the previous detection of the sensor cut bang 145 by the reel index sensor 144 for each rotating reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set as a number larger than the number of steps for one round. It is determined whether or not the number of steps is equal to or greater than the specified reference number of steps. If the number of steps is equal to or greater than the reference number of steps, there is a high possibility that a rotational abnormality such as step-out has occurred with respect to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. 161a to 161c, validity period flags 162a to 162c, stop instruction flags 163a to 163c, and stop control flags are cleared to "0", and processing corresponding to the relevant reels 32L, 32M, 32R among steps S4503 to S4511 is executed. to start re-acceleration. In this case, the re-acceleration process is not executed for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R other than the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the abnormal rotation has been identified. Further, in the step-out handling process, the stop buttons 42 to 44 including the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R subjected to the reacceleration process are not extinguished. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the lighted stop buttons 42-44 are subject to re-acceleration, the lighted state of the stop buttons 42-44 is maintained.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the main processing is executed when supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, as in the first embodiment.

In main processing, initialization processing is first executed (step S4801). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S4802). If the power has been turned on while the ON operation was performed using the setting key (step S4802: YES), if the reset button 56 was not pressed when the power was turned on (step S4803: NO), After executing the partial clear processing (step S4804), the set value update processing is executed (step S4806). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S4803: YES), after executing all clear processing (step S4805), set value update processing is executed (step S4806). The processing contents of the partial clear processing (step S4804), the all clear processing (step S4805), and the setting value update processing (step S4806) are the same as those of the first embodiment. After that, after executing the set value update process, the process shifts to the normal process (FIG. 12) (step S4807).

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main processing (step S4802: NO), the power recovery processing from step S4808 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S4808). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S4809). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". is set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S4810). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is examined to confirm whether or not the value is normal.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps S4808 to S4810, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S4811), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports is turned off (step S4812), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S4813). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition processing is canceled by executing partial clear processing (step S4804) or all clear processing (step S4805).

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S4808 to S4810, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S4814). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4815). Thereafter, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4816), the recovery process is executed (step S4817).

FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the return processing.

First, it is determined whether or not the rotating flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4901). The rotating flag is set to "1" when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating, and is cleared to "0" when all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped. That is, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the supply of operating power is started after the supply of operating power is stopped while at least one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotating, and the recovery process is executed. determine whether If the rotating flag is not set to "1" (step S4901: NO), the processing of the address before the power shutdown is resumed.

When the rotating flag is set to "1" (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether or not the left stop completion flag 164a of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been stopped while the stop has not been completed (step S4903). If the left stop completion flag 164a is not set to "1" (step S4903: NO), it means that the supply of operating power is stopped while the left reel 32L is not completely stopped. In this case, a process for newly starting rotation of the left reel 32L is executed.

Specifically, first, processing for clearing the left flag is executed (step S4904). In the left flag clearing process, the left acceleration completion flag 161a, the left effective period flag 162a, and the left stop instruction flag 163a are each cleared to "0". Thereafter, the left acceleration counter 165a is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4905), and the left excitation counter 166a corresponds to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130" is set as the switching interval data (step S4906).

When the affirmative determination is made in step S4903, or when the process of step S4906 is executed, it is determined whether or not the intermediate use stop completion flag 164b of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been stopped in a state in which the stop of operation has not been completed (step S4907). If the middle use stop completion flag 164b is not set to "1" (step S4907: NO), it means that the supply of the operating power has been stopped while the middle reel 32M is not completely stopped. In this case, a process for newly starting rotation of the middle reel 32M is executed.

Specifically, first, a medium-use flag clearing process is executed (step S4908). In the intermediate-use flag clearing process, the intermediate-use acceleration completion flag 161b, the intermediate-use effective period flag 162b, and the intermediate-use stop instruction flag 163b are each cleared to "0". Thereafter, the intermediate acceleration counter 165b is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4909), and the intermediate excitation counter 166b is set to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130", which is data of the switching interval corresponding to , is set (step S4910).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, or when the process of step S4910 is executed, it is determined whether or not the right stop completion flag 164c of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not the supply of operating power has been stopped in a state in which the stop of operation has not been completed (step S4911). If the right stop completion flag 164c is not set to "1" (step S4911: NO), it means that the supply of operating power is stopped while the right reel 32R is not completely stopped. In this case, a process for newly starting the rotation of the right reel 32R is executed.

Specifically, first, the processing for clearing the right flag is executed (step S4912). In the right flag clearing process, the right acceleration completion flag 161c, the right effective period flag 162c, and the right stop instruction flag 163c are each cleared to "0". After that, the right acceleration counter 165c is set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration (step S4913), and the right excitation counter 166c is set to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)). "130", which is the switching interval data corresponding to , is set (step S4914).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4911, or if the process of step S4914 is executed, the process proceeds to address processing at the time of midway stop. Specifically, the process of step S4404 in the reel control process (FIG. 81) is executed. Further, when the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is interrupted and started while the reel control processing (FIG. 81) is being executed, the rotating flag is set to "1" in the stepping motor control processing (FIG. 83). is set, that is, steps S4513 to S4528 are executed. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which have not been completely stopped when the supply of the operating power is stopped, have been executed in steps S4903 to S4914 for newly starting rotation. Control is newly started, constant speed control is started when acceleration is completed, and stop operation is enabled when sensor cut bang 145 is detected by reel index sensor 144 while constant speed control is being executed. be done.

With the above configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped in a situation before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completely stopped, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped. When the reels are restarted, the acceleration control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R before completion of stopping the rotation is newly started. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, there is no need to wait until the abnormal rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is detected in step S4528 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83). It is possible to start a new acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that had not stopped rotating, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are accelerated after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed. It is possible to complete the acceleration control and start the constant speed control early.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which have stopped rotating when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, do not resume rotation when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that have already stopped are prevented from rotating again, while the reels 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M long long long long long long long long long long long long long behind long long reel long long reel long long long long length long long long reel longst long 3 long reel long long reel long long long long long long long longleslesobside, Only 32R can be made to rotate at a constant speed early.

In the main processing (FIG. 86), for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotation was not completely stopped when the supply of operating power was stopped last time, information is set to newly start the acceleration control regardless of the rotation status of the reels. I do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of supply of operating power while achieving the excellent effects already described.

It should be noted that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R whose rotation has not been completely stopped when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped are accelerated when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed. is newly started, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a stop command is generated and the number of slips is calculated (step S4409) in the reel control process (FIG. 81) and the stop symbol is determined (step S4410), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R The corresponding stop completion flags 164a to 164c may be set to "1". In this case, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the determination of the stop symbols has not been completed, When the acceleration control is newly started and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the determination of the stop symbol has been completed are not completely stopped at that time. However, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, the acceleration control is not started again. Incidentally, in this configuration, winning determination is performed using the information of the stop symbol determined in step S4410, not the position of each symbol when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are actually stopped.

Also, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped, some of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are completely stopped but the other reels 32L, 32M and 32R are not completely stopped. , the acceleration control is newly started when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed only for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not been completely stopped. When the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, if the stoppage of even one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not completed, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped. Acceleration control may be newly started for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the game is restarted.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the tenth embodiment in the manner in which the control processing for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed. This different configuration will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the tenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing reel control processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 .

If the start wait period has passed (step S5001: YES), the start wait period for the next game is reset (step S5002). After that, on condition that the current game is the start game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S5003: YES), the left-hand pseudo-bonus start flag, the middle-hand pseudo-bonus start flag and the right-hand pseudo-bonus provided in the main side RAM 74 Each start flag is set to "1" (step S5004). The left pseudo bonus start flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle pseudo bonus start flag is provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right pseudo bonus start flag is provided corresponding to the right reel 32R. are provided. Each pseudo-bonus start flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify that the reel effect corresponding to the start game should be executed in the start game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4.

If a negative determination is made in step S5003 or if the process of step S5004 is executed, the rotation start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5005). As a result, the acceleration process of the stepping motor 142 is started in the stepping motor control process of step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. In steps S5006 to S5019, the same processes as steps S4404 to S4417 of the reel control process (FIG. 81) in the tenth embodiment are executed.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing acceleration control processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . Note that the acceleration control process is executed at step S4520 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83) as in the tenth embodiment.

First, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-stop control flag of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S5101). The pseudo stop control flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, a left pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, and a middle pseudo stop control flag is provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M. , and the right reel 32R are provided with right pseudo-stop control flags. In the starting game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate and the acceleration is completed, the reels 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32R, 32L, 32L, 32R, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32R, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32R, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, A pseudo-stop occurs with small vertical movements of 32M and 32R. Each pseudo-stop control flag specifies in the main side MPU 72 that the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are placed in the pseudo-stop position after the acceleration of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is completed. is a flag for

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, 1 is subtracted from the values of the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values (step S5106). Then, if the value of the excitation counters 166a-166c after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5107: YES), the acceleration counters 165a-165c of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values is subtracted by 1 (step S5108). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5109).

If a negative determination is made in step S5109, excitation switching processing is executed (step S5110). Here, in the start game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, as a reel effect corresponding to the start game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R move up and down in small steps while the combination of symbols for pseudo-stop exists on the main line ML. A pseudo-stop occurs where the motion takes place. In the starting game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R first start to rotate and after the acceleration is completed, the stop table 159 is used so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stay at the rotating position of the pseudo-stop. When the stop table 159 is used, the acceleration counters 165a to 165c and the excitation counter 166a are controlled in the same manner as when the acceleration table 158 is used to perform acceleration control. ˜166c are utilized. In addition, in a situation where a pseudo stop is being performed, the table 171 during pseudo stop (see FIG. 91) provided in the main ROM 73 is used. Acceleration counters 165a to 165c and excitation counters 166a to 166c are used in the same manner as when the acceleration table 158 is used for acceleration control.

The excitation switching process in step S5110 differs depending on whether the table to be used is the acceleration table 158, the stop table 159, or the pseudo stop table 171. FIG. If the game is different from the starting game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the stop table 159 and the pseudo-stopping table 171 are not used, and the acceleration table 158 is used. On the other hand, in the case of the start game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are first rotated until the acceleration is completed, and after the pseudo-stop is completed, the acceleration is performed until the acceleration is completed again. The table 158 is used, and when stop control is performed to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the rotational positions of the pseudo-stop after the initial acceleration is completed, the stop table 159 is used and is used for the pseudo-stop. is being performed, the pseudo stop table 171 is used. First, the case where the acceleration table 158 is used will be described, and the case where the stop table 159 or the pseudo stop table 171 is used will be described later.

In the excitation switching process when the acceleration table 158 is to be used, the excitation of the stepping motors 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is set according to the excitation order table shown in FIG. Switch according to the set order. In this case, if the current state is 1-phase excitation, it is switched to 2-phase excitation, and if the current state is 2-phase excitation, it is switched to 1-phase excitation. After that, the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c are set (step S5111). Specifically, the switching interval data corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c to be controlled this time is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read switching interval data is are set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c which are the control targets of .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-bonus start flag of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value is set to "1" (step S5112). If the game is different from the start game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, a negative determination is made in step S5112. Further, even if the starting game is in the pseudo bonus state ST4, if the acceleration is performed again after the pseudo stop is completed, a negative determination is made in step S5112. If a negative determination is made in step S5112, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S5113).

Since the pseudo-bonus start flag is set to "1" before the start of the acceleration period after the pseudo-stop in the start game of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, an affirmative determination is made in step S5112. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5112, it is determined whether or not the initial acceleration completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter is set to "1" (step S5114). The initial acceleration completion flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, a left initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, and a middle initial acceleration completion flag is provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M. , right initial acceleration completion flags are provided corresponding to the right reels 32R.

If the initial acceleration completion flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are not set to "1" (step S5114: NO), the corresponding initial acceleration completion flags are set to "1". set (step S5115). After that, the pseudo stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S5116).

If the corresponding pseudo stop control flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 and the process proceeds to step S5102. In step S5102, constant speed control processing is executed (step S5102). In the constant-speed control process, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately repeated at intervals of one interrupt in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), similar to steps S4518 and S4521 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 83). 1-pulse excitation signal is output to switch the excitation phase. After that, the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter become the stop start positions where the positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the pseudo stop positions after the stop control is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S5103).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the pseudo stop control flags of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are cleared to "0" (step S5104). After that, a process for starting stop control by the stop table 159 is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter (step S5105).

Specifically, the stop table 159 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 . Also, "2" corresponding to the number of excitation orders set in the stop table 159 is set in the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter. The switching interval data "100" set in the first excitation order data in the stop table 159 is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, four-phase excitation is started for the stepping motors 142 of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5106 is executed. YES), the value of the corresponding acceleration counter 165a-165c is decremented by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is "1" (step S5109: NO), in the excitation switching process (step S5110), the stepping motors 142 of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are 1 phase excitation is started. Also, in step S5111, the switching interval data "34" set in the second excitation order of the stop table 159 is set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M and 32R. On the other hand, if the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 are "0" (step S5109: YES), the pseudo bonus start flags and the initial Since "1" is set to both of the acceleration completion flags, affirmative determinations are made in steps S5112 and S5114, and the process proceeds to step S5117.

In step S5117, it is determined whether "1" is set to the pseudo stop completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter. The pseudo stop completion flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, a left pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the left reel 32L, and a middle pseudo stop completion flag is provided corresponding to the middle reel 32M. , and the right reel 32R are provided with right pseudo stop completion flags.

If a negative determination is made in step S5117, the pseudo stop completion flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S5118). After that, a pseudo-stop start process is executed (step S5119).

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing processing for starting the pseudo-stop.

First, the pseudo stop table 171 pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read out to the main RAM 74 (step S5201). The pseudo-stop table 171 is data for causing the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to move up and down in small steps while a combination of symbols for pseudo-stop exists on the main line ML. is set.

FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo stop table 171. FIG.

In the pseudo stop table 171, A-phase excitation is set as 1-phase excitation as the first excitation order, and the excitation holding period of the A-phase is set as 167 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). ing. The second excitation order is set to non-excitation in which neither excitation is performed, and the retention period of the non-excitation is the same as the excitation retention period of the A phase, as 167 interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11). is set. In the third excitation order, B-phase excitation is set as 1-phase excitation, and the excitation holding period of the B-phase is the same as the excitation holding period of A phase and the holding period of non-excitation, timer interrupt processing (Fig. 11) is set as 167 interrupts. The fourth excitation order is set to non-excitation in which no excitation is performed, and the non-excitation holding period is the A phase excitation holding period, the second non-excitation holding period, and the B phase excitation holding period. is set for 167 interrupts of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11). After that, the contents of the first to fourth excitation orders are repeated three times.

That is, during the pseudo stop, the stepping motor 142 alternately repeats the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase with a non-excitation period interposed therebetween. When the A-phase excitation and the B-phase excitation are alternately repeated, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R do not rotate in the same direction, but repeat vertical movements at predetermined rotational positions. 92(a) to 92(c) show that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R move up and down in small steps while the combination of symbols for pseudo stop exists on the main line ML during the pseudo stop. It is an explanatory view for explaining a state.

As shown in FIG. 92(a), in the start game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate, accelerated, and stopped at a predetermined stop start position using the stop table 159. By executing the control, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R remain in a state where the combination of the pseudo stop symbols is present on the main line ML. As a combination of the pseudo-stop symbols, a combination of "white 7", "white 7" and "white 7" from the left is used, but the combination of the pseudo-stop symbols is arbitrary and the same. Other identical symbol combinations may be utilized, such as the "Red 7" symbol combination, or different types of symbol combinations may be utilized.

By executing the control using the pseudo-stop table 171 in the above state, in the state where the combination of pseudo-stop symbols exists on the main line ML, these pseudo-stops are displayed as shown in FIG. 92(b). The reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated so that the combination of symbols for stop moves slightly downward, and then the reels 32L, 32L, 32R rotate so that the combination of symbols for pseudo stop moves slightly upward as shown in FIG. 92(c). The reels 32M and 32R rotate, after which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R repeat vertical movements between the rotational positions shown in FIG. 92(b) and the rotational positions shown in FIG. 92(c). As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the combination of symbols for pseudo stop is pseudo-stopped on the main line ML in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are not completely stopped. .

In the pseudo stop, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are moved up and down in small steps so that the player can recognize that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are not stopped. In particular, the excitation of phase B starts before 500 milliseconds have passed since the excitation of phase A started, and the excitation of phase A starts before 500 milliseconds have passed since the excitation of phase B starts. In addition, by continuing each of the A-phase excitation and the B-phase excitation for 200 milliseconds or more, it becomes possible for the player to recognize the vertical movement of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are not actually stopped. However, in the case of such a configuration in which only the excitation of the A phase and the B phase is repeatedly continued, the temperature of the stepping motor 142 may rise. On the other hand, a non-excitation period is set between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase, and between the excitation of the B phase and the excitation of the A phase. This makes it possible to suppress the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142 .

In the pseudo-stop start process (FIG. 90), after the pseudo-stop table 171 is read out to the main RAM 74 in step S5201, the acceleration counters of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are read. 165a to 165c are set to "16", which is the initial value of the excitation order in the pseudo stop table 171 (step S5202). After that, "167", which is the switching interval data corresponding to the first excitation order in the pseudo stop table 171, is set to the excitation counters 166a to 166c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values. (step S5203).

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5106 in the acceleration control process (FIG. 89) is executed, and the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after decrementing by 1 is "0". If so (step S5107: YES), the value of the corresponding acceleration counter 165a to 165c is decremented by 1 (step S5108). If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S5109: NO), the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c corresponds to the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c in the pseudo stop table 171 in the excitation switching process (step S5110). The setting of the excitation contents to be performed is performed. In other words, when the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c correspond to an even number of excitation orders, they are not excited, and the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c are "3", "7", "11" and "15". If the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c is any of "5", "9" and "13", excitation of the A phase is started. After that, the switching interval data set for the excitation order corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c in the pseudo stop table 171 is set to the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c (step S5111).

On the other hand, if the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 are "0" (step S5109: YES), the pseudo bonus start flags of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to the initial value. Since "1" is set for each of the acceleration completion flag and the pseudo-stop completion flag, affirmative determinations are made in each of steps S5112, S5114 and S5117, and the process proceeds to step S5120. In step S5120, clear processing for pseudo-stop is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the target reel counter. In the clearing process, the pseudo bonus start flag, initial acceleration completion flag, and pseudo stop completion flag of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value are cleared to "0".

After that, as re-acceleration processing, processing for starting re-acceleration after the pseudo-stop is executed (step S5121). Specifically, the acceleration counters 165a to 165c of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current values of the target reel counters are set to "24" corresponding to the initial value at the start of acceleration, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R's excitation counters 166a to 166c are set to "130", which is switching interval data corresponding to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table 158 (FIG. 80(a)).

The data set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S5106 in the acceleration control process (FIG. 89) is executed, and the value of the excitation counters 166a to 166c after decrementing by 1 is "0". If so (step S5107: YES), the value of the corresponding acceleration counter 165a-165c is decremented by 1 (step S5108). If the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtracting 1 are 1 or more (step S5109: NO), the stepping motors 142 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are excited as shown in FIG. Switching is performed according to the order set in the excitation order table shown. In this case, if the current state is 1-phase excitation, it is switched to 2-phase excitation, and if the current state is 2-phase excitation, it is switched to 1-phase excitation. After that, the corresponding excitation counters 166a to 166c are set (step S5111). Specifically, the switching interval data corresponding to the values of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c to be controlled this time is read from the acceleration table (FIG. 80(a)), and the read switching interval data is are set in the excitation counters 166a to 166c which are the control targets of .

On the other hand, if the value of the acceleration counters 165a to 165c after subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5109: YES), in step S5112, pseudo reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter value It is determined whether or not the bonus start flag is set to "1". Since the pseudo bonus start flag is not set to "1" at the stage where the second acceleration is completed after the pseudo stop is completed, a negative determination is made in step S5109. In this case, the acceleration completion flags 161a to 161c of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponding to the current target reel counter values are set to "1" (step S5113).

FIG. 93 is a time chart showing how the start game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is pseudo-stopped. 93(a) shows the period during which the game is executed, FIG. 93(b) shows the period during which the acceleration control is executed, and FIG. 93(c) shows the period during which the stop control is executed, FIG. 93(d) shows the period during which the pseudo-stop is performed, FIG. 93(e) shows the period during which phase A excitation is performed, and FIG. FIG. 93(g) shows a non-excitation period. Acceleration control, stop control, and pseudo-stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are performed individually, but these controls are executed at the same or substantially the same timing for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In the following description, it is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled at the same time.

At the timing of t1, the start game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is started as shown in FIG. 93(a). At the timing t1, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating and accelerate as shown in FIG. 93(b), and the acceleration is completed at the timing t2. When the acceleration is completed, the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop start positions, so that the stop control using the stop table 159 is started as shown in FIG. The stop control is completed. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at the position where the combination of symbols for pseudo stop exists on the main line ML.

At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 93(d), each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts a pseudo-stop. In this case, first, phase A is excited as shown in FIG. 93(e) from timing t3 to timing t4, and then de-excited as shown in FIG. 93(g) from timing t4 to timing t5. After that, the phase B is excited as shown in FIG. 93(f) from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, and thereafter, at the timing of t6 to t7, as shown in FIG. It becomes an excitation period. Then, the same control as the timing t3 to t7 is performed at timing t7 to timing t11, timing t11 to timing t15, and timing t15 to timing t19. As a result, the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase are alternately repeated with a non-excitation period interposed therebetween. Further, the excitation period of the A phase, the non-excitation period, and the excitation period of the B phase are all about 249 milliseconds, which are the same period. The total period of the phase A excitation period and the subsequent non-excitation period is less than 500 milliseconds, and the total period of the phase B excitation period and the subsequent non-excitation period is less than 500 milliseconds. .

At timing t18 to t19, the final non-excitation period occurs as shown in FIG. finish. Then, at timing t19, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are again accelerated as shown in FIG. 93(b), and the acceleration period ends at timing t20. When the sensor cut bang 145 is detected by the reel index sensor 144 after the acceleration period ends, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is validated.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase are alternately repeated during the pseudo stop period, there is no excitation of the stepping motor 142 between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase. An excitation period is set. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R while suppressing the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142.例文帳に追加

The non-excitation period is equal to or shorter than the period during which the A phase is excited and is equal to or shorter than the period during which the B phase is excited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped from becoming excessively long in the pseudo-stop period during which an effect using the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed. .

In the configuration in which the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase are alternately repeated in the pseudo stop period, not only is the non-excitation period set between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase, but also the excitation of the B phase. A non-excitation period is also set between the excitation and the excitation of the A phase. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress the temperature rise of the stepping motor 142 .

The non-excitation period generated between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase and the non-excitation period generated between the excitation of the B phase and the excitation of the A phase are the same period. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a configuration for controlling the non-excitation period, so the configuration for the control can be simplified.

<Another Form of the Eleventh Embodiment>
・The non-excitation period that exists between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase in the pseudo stop period and the non-excitation period that exists between the excitation of the B phase and the excitation of the A phase are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which these non-excitation periods are slightly different but substantially the same may be employed, or a configuration in which these non-excitation periods are greatly different.

・Although the non-excitation period in the pseudo stop period is the same as the excitation period of the A phase, the present invention is not limited to this. A certain configuration may be used, or a configuration may be used in which the non-excitation period and the A-phase excitation period are greatly different. In addition, although the non-excitation period in the pseudo stop period is the same as the excitation period of the B phase, the present invention is not limited to this. , or a configuration in which the non-excitation period and the B-phase excitation period are greatly different.

・Although the excitation period of the A phase and the excitation period of the B phase in the pseudo stop period are the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the excitation period of the A phase and the excitation period of the B phase are slightly different. However, the configuration may be substantially the same, or the configuration may be such that the excitation period of the A phase and the excitation period of the B phase are greatly different.

・In the pseudo stop period, there is a non-excitation period between the excitation of the A phase and the excitation of the B phase, and there is also a non-excitation period between the excitation of the B phase and the excitation of the A phase. However, one of these non-excitation periods may be absent.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the predetermined lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 is executed. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing advantageous state processing at the start of the game in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . The advantageous state processing at the start of the game is executed as a part of the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (step S410) in the combination lottery processing (FIG. 13).

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S5301: YES), on condition that the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S5302: NO), By determining whether or not the pseudo-bonus state flag is set to "1", it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S5303). If the current gaming state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S5303: NO), it means that the current gaming state is the AT state ST5, so the AT state processing at the start of the game is executed (step S5304). . The contents of the AT state process at the start of the game are the same as in the first embodiment.

If the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST4 (step S5303: YES), the lottery random number is obtained from the lottery counter that is periodically updated (specifically, in 1.49 millisecond cycles) in the main RAM 74. (Step S5305). The lottery counter is configured as a loop counter whose numerical value is sequentially updated within the numerical range of "0" to "255". It should be noted that a configuration in which a dedicated circuit for updating the lottery random number may be provided. Also, the AT shift lottery table 172 pre-stored in the main ROM 73 is read out to the main RAM 74 (step S5306).

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the AT transfer lottery table 172. As shown in FIG. In the AT transition lottery table 172, lottery determination values are set in one-to-one correspondence with serial addresses from "k" to "k+7". Addresses "k", "k+6" and "k+7" are set with "0" as the lottery determination value, and addresses "k+1" and "k+5" are set with "80" as the lottery determination value. A lottery determination value of "70" is set for the address of "k+2", a lottery determination value of "128" is set to the address of "k+3", and a lottery determination value is set to the address of "k+4". "110" is set as the judgment value.

After reading the AT transition lottery table 172 in step S5306, in steps S5307 and S5308, a process for calculating an offset value used for reading the lottery determination value from the AT transition lottery table 172 is executed. . Specifically, first, the value of the AT transition determination flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is read to the general-purpose register of the main side MPU 72, and the process of inverting the read value is executed (step S5307). The AT transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the condition for transition to the AT state ST5 has already been satisfied in the pseudo bonus state ST4, as in the first embodiment. Since the AT transition confirmation flag takes a binary value of "0" or "1", "0" or "1" is read into the general-purpose register of the main side MPU 72, and a process of inverting it is executed. By doing so, when the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", "1" is stored as an inverted value in the general-purpose register, and when the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "1", "0" is stored in the general-purpose register as an inverted value.

After that, the value of the index value IV selected in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the current combination is added to the value obtained by multiplying the reversal value calculated in step S5307 by "7". The offset value is calculated by subtracting "17" which is the maximum value of the index value IV (step S5308). In addition, if no index value IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the index value IV is set to "0". Also, when the result of subtracting "17" is less than "0", the offset value is set to "0" by clearing the calculation result to "0".

More specifically, the offset value is "0" when the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", so the result of multiplying it by "7" is also "0". In this case, the offset value is the result of subtracting "17" from the index value IV selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). results in "0" or less than "0", resulting in an offset value of "0". On the other hand, in a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", the inverted value is "1", so the result of multiplying it by "7" is "7". In this case, the offset value is the result of subtracting "17" from the result of adding the index value IV selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) to "7". Therefore, in the case of losing in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 13), or if any of the index values IV = "1" to "10" is won, the offset value becomes "0" and the lottery process for the role is made. (Fig. 13), the offset value becomes "1" when the index value IV = "11" is won, and when the index value IV = "12" is won in the role lottery process (Fig. 13) The offset value is "2", and when the winning index value IV="13" is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the offset value becomes "3", and the index value becomes "3" in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). If the value IV = "14" is won, the offset value becomes "4", and if the winning index value IV = "15" is won in the role lottery process (Fig. 13), the offset value becomes "5". , the offset value becomes "6" in the case where an index value IV="16" is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 13), and the index value IV="17" in the role lottery process (FIG. 13). When winning, the offset value becomes "7".

After that, the offset value calculated in step S5308 is added to the start address "k" of the AT transfer lottery table 172 (step S5309). In this case, in a situation where the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the offset value is "0" regardless of the value of the index value IV selected in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). Therefore, the address calculated in step S5309 remains "k". In addition, in the situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the winning lottery process (Fig. 13) is lost, or if the index value IV = "1" to "10" is won In this case, the offset value is "0", so the address calculated in step S5309 remains "k". In addition, in the situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the winning index value IV = "11" is won in the role lottery process (Fig. 13), the offset value will be "1". The address calculated at S5309 is "k+1", and if the index value IV="12" is won, the offset value is "2", so the address calculated at step S5309 is "k+2". , if the index value IV=“13” is won, the offset value becomes “3”, so the address calculated in step S5309 is “k+3”, and if the index value IV=“14” is won, Since the offset value is "4", the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+4". The address calculated in step S5309 is "k+5", and if the index value IV="16" is won, the offset value is "6", so the address calculated in step S5309 is "k+6". If the value IV=“17” is won, the offset value is “7”, so the address calculated in step S5309 is “k+7”.

After that, in the AT transfer lottery table 172, the lottery determination value set corresponding to the address calculated in step S5309 is obtained (step S5310), and the lottery determination value is obtained for the lottery random number obtained in step S5305. is stored as a lottery target value (step S5311). Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery object value has exceeded the maximum value of the lottery random number "255" (step S5312). If the lottery target value exceeds "255", it means that the player has won the lottery in the current AT shift lottery process.

As already explained, "0" is set as the lottery determination value for the addresses "k", "k+6" and "k+7" in the AT transition lottery table 172, and the lottery is set for the addresses "k+1" and "k+5". "80" is set as the determination value, "70" is set as the lottery determination value at the address "k+2", and "128" is set as the lottery determination value at the address "k+3". , and "110" is set as the lottery determination value at the address of "k+4". When the lottery determination value is "0", the lottery object value never exceeds "255" regardless of the value of the lottery random number. Therefore, in the situation where the AT shift confirmation flag is set to "1", it is certainly lost in the AT shift lottery process this time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of repeated wins for shifting to the AT state ST5. Even if the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the winning result is lost in the lottery process (Fig. 13) or the index value IV = "1" to "10", "16" , "17" will surely be lost in this AT transfer lottery process.

In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV="11", the lottery determination value becomes "80". 31% probability of AT transfer winning. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV="12", the lottery determination value becomes "70". 27% probability of AT transfer winning. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV="13", the lottery decision value becomes "128". 50% chance of winning the AT transfer. In the situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV="14", the lottery determination value becomes "110". 43% probability of AT transfer winning. In a situation where the value of the AT transition confirmation flag is "0", if the lottery process (FIG. 13) wins the index value IV="15", the lottery determination value becomes "80". 31% probability of AT transfer winning.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5312, "1" is set to the AT transition determination flag of the main side RAM 74 (step S5313). Also, an AT shift winning command indicating that the AT shift winning is sent to the effect side MPU 92 (step S5314). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the AT transition winning command, the performance indicating that the AT transition winning has been executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. - 特許庁

According to the above configuration, the AT transfer lottery table 172 is set with selection targets (addresses in detail) set with lottery determination values that will surely be determined to be lost in the AT transition lottery. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which winning in the AT shift lottery is not possible without preparing a determination process for sorting whether or not to execute the AT shift lottery in the program.

By the way, 6 bytes of data are required in order to prepare the determination process in the program for determining whether or not to execute the AT transition lottery according to whether the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1". It will happen. On the other hand, it is necessary to add to the AT transition lottery table 172 a selection object with a lottery determination value of "0" as a selection object to be selected when the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1". The data capacity is 2 bytes, and the data capacity of the processing program added with the addition of the selected object to the AT transition lottery table 172 is 2 bytes. Therefore, by adding to the AT transition lottery table 172 a selection object having a lottery determination value of "0" as a selection object to be selected when the AT transition confirmation flag is set to "1", the AT transition lottery is performed. It is possible to reduce the necessary data capacity by 2 bytes compared to the case where the program prepares the judgment processing for allocating whether to execute or not.

In a configuration in which a plurality of selection objects (addresses in detail) set with lottery determination values that can be determined to be winning in the AT transition lottery are set in the AT transition lottery table 172, the AT transition lottery is certainly lost. A selection target (specifically, an address) set with a lottery determination value to be determined as is set in the AT transition lottery table 172 . As a result, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved simply by additionally setting selection targets that are sure to be lost in the AT shift lottery table 172 prepared for setting a plurality of selection targets that can win. It becomes possible.

In the advantageous state processing (FIG. 94) at the start of the game, the value obtained by inverting the value of the AT transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 and the index value IV selected in the winning lottery processing (FIG. 13) are used. An offset value is calculated by executing the predetermined arithmetic processing of S5308, and the calculated offset value is added to the start address of the AT transfer lottery table 172 to specify the lottery determination value corresponding to the selection object. In this case, the AT transition lottery table 172 sets a selection target (specifically, an address) for which a lottery determination value that will surely be determined to be lost in the AT transition lottery is set in the AT transition lottery table 172. Calculating an offset value by executing the arithmetic processing of and adding the calculated offset value to the start address, thereby specifying the lottery determination value corresponding to the selection object. It becomes possible to play

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the index values IV=16 and 17 do not exist, and even if the index values IV=16 and 17 are won in the role lottery process (FIG. 13), the AT transition may be won. good. In these cases, a lottery determination value of 1 or more is set in the AT transition lottery table 172 for addresses other than the address of "k".

In addition, the configuration in which selection targets that are certainly lost are set in the lottery table may be applied to lottery processes other than the AT shift lottery. For example, the above configuration may be applied to the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the above configuration may be applied to the lottery process for adding the remaining number of grants in the AT state ST5.

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the predetermined lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 is executed. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing lottery processing for the number of initial grants executed by the main MPU 72 . The lottery process of the initial number to be given is executed when the transition to the AT state ST5 is won in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and the pseudo-bonus state ST4 ends and the AT state ST5 starts. In the lottery process for the initial number of grants, the number of initial grants of game media in the AT state ST5 is determined by lottery.

First, a lottery random number is obtained as a lottery object value from a lottery counter that is updated periodically (specifically, at a 1.49 millisecond cycle) in the main RAM 74 and stored in a general-purpose register of the main MPU 72 (step S5401). The lottery counter is configured as a loop counter whose numerical value is sequentially updated within the numerical range of "0" to "255". It should be noted that a configuration in which a dedicated circuit for updating the lottery random number may be provided.

Thereafter, the value of the lottery number counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "7", which is the maximum number of lotteries (step S5402). The lottery number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the type of object for which the lottery in steps S5406 to S5408, which will be described later, will be executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the AT state ST5 to be started this time is the special AT (step S5403). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the AT transition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state ST5 in the pseudo-bonus state ST4. A lottery determines which of the normal AT and the special AT will be used when ST5 transition is won. The special AT is an AT state ST5 in which the initial number of game media provided tends to be larger than that of the normal AT. Also, the selection probability between the normal AT and the special AT is arbitrary, but for example, 70% of the winning transition to the AT state ST5 becomes the normal AT and 30% becomes the special AT.

When the AT state ST5 started this time is normal AT (step S5403: NO), the first initial grant number lottery table 173 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5404). On the other hand, when the AT state ST5 started this time is special AT (step S5403: YES), the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5405).

97(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first initial grant number lottery table 173, and FIG. 97(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second initial grant number lottery table 174. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174 contain lottery number data in which serial number information is set. , and the lottery decision value data corresponding to the lottery number data on a one-to-one basis. In the first initial grant number lottery table 173, data of "1" to "7" are set as lottery number data, and lottery determination is numerical information of 1 or more corresponding to each lottery number data. Value data is set. The total number of these lottery determination values is "256", which is "1" larger than "255" which is the maximum value of the numerical information of the lottery counter. In addition, in the second initial grant number lottery table 174, data of "4" to "7" are set as lottery number data, and numerical information of 1 or more corresponding to each lottery number data. Lottery judgment value data is set. The total number of these lottery determination values is "256".

In the lottery of the initial given number, a lottery determination value corresponding to the lottery number "7" is first added to the lottery random number obtained from the lottery counter, and the lottery target value, which is the value after the addition, is the numerical information of the lottery counter. When the maximum value of "255" is exceeded, it is determined that the lottery number has been won. When the lottery object value does not exceed "255", the value of the lottery number counter is decremented by 1 to change the lottery number to be lottery object to "6", corresponding to the lottery number of "6". A new lottery object value is derived by adding the lottery judgment value to the lottery object value, and when the lottery object value exceeds "255", it is judged that the lottery number has been won, and "255" is determined. If the number does not exceed "255", derivation of the lottery target value using the lottery determination value for the next lottery number and determination of whether or not the lottery object value after the derivation exceeds "255" is performed. In this case, as described above, in both the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174, the total number of lottery determination values is "256", so that the first initial grant number Even if either the lottery table 173 or the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is referred to, the lottery target value at that time exceeds "255" in a situation where one of the lottery numbers is the lottery target. Become. That is, even if either of the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is referred to, one of the lottery numbers is surely won.

In the initial grant number lottery process (FIG. 96), when the process of step S5404 or step S5405 is executed, the lottery determination value corresponding to the value of the lottery number counter of the main side RAM 74 is set in the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second It is read from the table read out to the main RAM 74 out of the initial grant number lottery table 174 (step S5406). For example, when the value of the lottery number counter is "7" and the first initial grant number lottery table 173 is read into the main RAM 74, "10" is read as the lottery determination value. Further, when the value of the lottery number counter is "4" and the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is read out to the main side RAM 74, "64" is read as the lottery determination value.

After that, by adding the lottery decision value read in step S5406 to the current lottery object value, the current lottery object value is derived (step S5407). If the value of the lottery number counter is "7", the current lottery target value is the lottery random number of the lottery counter acquired in step S5401, so the first initial grant number lottery table 173 is read into the main RAM 74. If the lottery random number has been issued, the result obtained by adding "10" to the lottery random number becomes the current lottery object value, and if the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is read out to the main side RAM 74, the lottery. The result of adding "64" to the random number is the value for this lottery. When the value of the lottery number counter is 6 or less, the result of adding the lottery determination value corresponding to the current lottery number counter value to the lottery object value calculated last time becomes the lottery object value of this time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the lottery target value calculated in step S5407 exceeds "255" (step S5408). If it does not exceed "255" (step S5408: NO), after subtracting 1 from the value of the lottery number counter in the main RAM 74 (step S5409), the value of the lottery number counter after the subtraction of 1 The process of step S5408 is executed.

If it exceeds "255" (step S5408: YES), the initial grant number table 175 is read from the main ROM 73 to the main RAM 74 (step S5410). FIG. 97(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial grant number table 175. FIG. In the initial grant number table 175, data of "1" to "7" are set as lottery number data. Data is set. In this case, the larger the lottery number, the larger the initial grant number, and the smaller the lottery number, the smaller the initial grant number.

After reading the initial grant number table 175 to the main RAM 74 in step S5410, the value of the current lottery number counter, that is, the initial grant number corresponding to the current lottery number is read from the initial grant number table 175 (step S5411). . In this case, even if either the first initial grant number lottery table 173 or the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is read as the initial grant number lottery table, the common initial grant number table 175 is read. .

For details on reading the initial grant number from the initial grant number table 175, for example, if the value of the lottery number counter is "7", the initial grant number read from the initial grant number table 175 is "300". The initial number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is "300". Further, if the value of the lottery number counter is "4", the initial grant number read from the initial grant number table 175 is "150", so the initial grant number of game media in the AT state ST5 to be started this time is "150". becomes. Further, if the value of the lottery number counter is "1", the initial grant number read from the initial grant number table 175 is "50". becomes.

According to the above configuration, even when the second initial grant number lottery table 174 in which the number of types of lottery numbers to be lottery targets is "4", which is less than the maximum number of types "7", is referred to In the second initial grant number lottery table 174, the lottery numbers are set in serial numbers so that the maximum lottery number is "7" and the minimum lottery number is "4". As a result, regardless of which of the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is referred to, the common maximum value "7" is set as the lottery number at the start of the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to share the processing configuration when performing the lottery.

The total number of lottery determination values set for each lottery number in the second initial grant number lottery table 174 exceeds the maximum value of random numbers for lottery updated in the lottery counter, ie, "255". As a result, even if the minimum value of the lottery number set in the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is "4", "4" set in the second initial grant number lottery table 174 to Since the lottery is won by one of "7", the lottery number of "3" or less will not be the lottery target.

In addition, in the first initial provision number lottery table 173, the number of types of lottery numbers to be lottery is "7", and the number of lotteries is set as a serial number from "1" to "7". In the grant number lottery table 174, the type of lottery number to be lottery is "4", so if the number of lotteries is set with a serial number of "1" to "4", the second initial grant number lottery table is used. When trying to make the initial grant number corresponding to the lottery number of "4" in 174 the same as the initial grant number corresponding to the lottery number of "7" in the first initial grant number lottery table 173, the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and a second initial grant number lottery table 174, or a lottery number determined by referring to the second initial grant number lottery table 174 is used as the first initial grant number lottery. It will be necessary to perform conversion processing for associating with the number of lotteries in the table 173 . In the former case, the storage capacity increases accordingly, and in the latter case, the processing load increases accordingly. On the other hand, as described above, the second initial grant number lottery table 174 in which the number of types of lottery numbers to be lottery targets is "4", which is less than the maximum number of types "7", is referred to. However, in the second initial grant number lottery table 174, the lottery numbers are set in serial numbers so that the maximum lottery number is "7" and the minimum lottery number is "4". Therefore, the first initial grant number lottery is performed while making it unnecessary to execute conversion processing for associating the lottery number determined by referring to the second initial grant number lottery table 174 with the lottery number of the first initial grant number lottery table 173. The initial grant number table 175 used when the table 173 is referred to can be used as it is.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
As a lottery table for lottery of the initial grant amount, a third initial grant number lottery table may be provided in addition to the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174. . In this case, even in the third initial grant number lottery table, the maximum value of the lottery number is set to be the same as the maximum value of the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174, and the third initial grant number lottery. By setting the lottery number of the table as a serial number, it becomes possible to share the processing configuration for performing the lottery of the initial grant number and to use the initial grant number table 175 in common. .

The lottery determination value for some of the lottery numbers set in the first initial grant number lottery table 173 may be set to "0". In this case, the number of lotteries for which the lottery determination value is set to "0" will surely result in a loss. In this configuration, while setting the lottery number in the first initial grant number lottery table 173 as a serial number continuing from the maximum value in the second initial grant number lottery table 174, the lottery to be excluded in the first initial grant number lottery table 173 number can be set.

The lottery determination value of some of the lottery numbers set in the second initial grant number lottery table 174 may be set to "0". In this case, the number of lotteries for which the lottery determination value is set to "0" will surely result in a loss. In this configuration, while setting the lottery number in the second initial grant number lottery table 174 as a serial number continuing from the maximum value of the first initial grant number lottery table 173, the lottery to be excluded in the second initial grant number lottery table 174 number can be set.

The data configuration of the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174 may be applied to a lottery table used in a lottery process different from the initial grant number lottery process.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the content of instructions for calling subroutines when processing using a program is executed in the main MPU 72 . The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), the main ROM 73 is provided with a large number of storage areas in 1-byte units, and each storage area is associated with a 2-byte address. By providing this 2-byte address to the management controller of the main ROM 73, the management controller reads the program or data from the storage area corresponding to the address. This read program or data is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 or the main RAM 74 .

"8000h" to "93FFh" are assigned to the main ROM 73 as 2-byte addresses. Note that "h" indicates that the numerical value is a hexadecimal number. In this case, a program necessary for executing the timer subtraction process (step S5608) is pre-stored in the main ROM 73 so that the start address of the program is the start address of the main ROM 73, ie, "8000h". Further, timer subtraction processing (step S5608) is followed by in/out counter processing of the number of bets (step S5609), command output processing (step S5610), port output processing (step S5611), management processing (step S5613), Start waiting processing (step S5702), acceptance prohibition processing (step S5705), setting processing at start (step S5706), and external output setting processing (step S5711) are stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in this order. Programs for these various processes are stored in the address range from "8000h" to "8BFFh", which are the start addresses of the main ROM 73. The external output setting process (step S5711) stored in the last order among these various processes ) is stored in the storage area at the address "8BFFh". In the main MPU 72, the programs for processes other than the above processes (partial clear process (step S5504), all clear process (step S5505), set value update process (step S5506), etc.) It is stored in advance in a storage area that serves as an address range.

The main MPU 72 executes the CALLS instruction when calling the various processes described above. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. The processing contents of steps S5501 to S5517 are the same as steps S101 to S117 of the main processing (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment. In this case, in the partial clear processing in step S5504, the all clear processing in step S5505, the set value update processing in step S5506, and the normal processing in step S5507, addresses are specified by the CALLS instruction to execute these processes. A program is read from the main ROM 73 .

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. The processing contents of steps S5601 to S5614 are the same as steps S201 to S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. In this case, power failure processing in step S5603, stepping motor control processing in step S5606, sensor monitoring processing in step S5607, timer subtraction processing in step S5608, in/out counter processing for the number of bets in step S5609, and command output in step S5610. In the process, the port output process in step S5611 and the management process in step S5613, the program for executing these processes is read out from the main ROM 73 by specifying addresses with the CALLS instruction.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. The processing contents of steps S5701 to S5712 are the same as steps S301 to S312 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment. In this case, start waiting processing in step S5702, acceptance prohibition processing in step S5705, setting processing at the start of step S5706, winning lottery processing in step S5707, reel control processing in step S5708, medium giving processing in step S5709, and step S5710. In the corresponding process at the end of the game and the external output setting process in step S5711, the program for executing these processes is read from the main ROM 73 by specifying the address with the CALLS instruction.

The CALLS instruction is pre-stored in the main ROM 73 so as to correspond to each type of process to be called. The CALLS instruction has instruction identification data that indicates that it is a CALLS instruction, and address data that enables the management controller of the main ROM 73 to grasp the start address of the program of the process to be called. there is In this case, the number of bytes of the CALLS instruction differs depending on whether or not the start address specified as the address data is included in the 2-byte addresses “8000h” to “8BFFh” in the main ROM 73 . Specifically, if the start address specified as address data is not included in "8000h" to "8BFFh", that is, if it is included in "8C00h" to "93FFh", it becomes a 3-byte CALLS instruction, and the address data is If the specified start address is included in "8000h" to "8BFFh", it becomes a 2-byte CALLS instruction.

FIG. 98(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of a 3-byte CALLS instruction. The 3-byte CALLS instruction has a high byte UB11, a middle byte UB12 and a low byte UB13 of 1 byte each. The upper byte UB11 is set with instruction identification data indicating that it is a CALLS instruction, and the middle byte UB12 and lower byte UB13 are 2-byte data that is the start address of the program to be read as address data. is set. Any 2-byte address in the range of “8C00h” to “93FFh” in the main ROM 73 is set as the address data. For example, "8C00h" is set as the address data in the 3-byte CALLS instruction for reading the partial clear processing program. When executing a 3-byte CALLS instruction, the main MPU 72 can directly read a 2-byte address, which is the start address of the read target program, from the address data of the CALLS instruction.

FIG. 98(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of a 2-byte CALLS instruction. The 2-byte CALLS instruction has an upper byte UB21 and a lower byte UB22 of 1 byte each. Four bits from the most significant bit D7 in the upper byte UB21 to the bit D4 following the most significant bit D7 are set with instruction identification data indicating that the instruction itself is a CALLS instruction. The 12 bits consisting of 4 bits from bit D3 to the least significant bit D0 and the 8 bits of the lower byte UB22 contain the 4 bits following the most significant bit of the 2-byte data that is the start address of the program to be read. The removed 12-bit data is set as address data.

FIG. 98(d) shows a circuit configuration provided in the main side MPU 72 to provide the management controller of the main side ROM 73 with the 2-byte start address of the program to be read when the 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed. It is an explanatory view for explaining. The main MPU 72 is provided with a mask circuit 181 and an adder circuit 182 . When the main MPU 72 executes a 2-byte CALLS instruction, the 16-bit data of the CALLS instruction is provided to the mask circuit 181 . In the mask circuit 181, among the 16-bit data of the provided CALLS instruction, 4 bits from the most significant bit D7 in the upper byte UB21 to the bit D4 following the most significant bit D7 are cleared to "0". perform mask control on For example, when the CALLS instruction for reading the timer subtraction program is executed, the data after the mask control by the mask circuit 181 is executed becomes "0000h".

The data after mask control by the mask circuit 181 is provided to the adder circuit 182 . The addition circuit 182 performs addition control so that "8000h" is added to the data after mask control by the mask circuit 181 has been performed. The data after the addition control is executed becomes the start address of the program of the processing read out by the CALLS instruction. For example, when the CALLS instruction for reading the timer subtraction program is executed, the data after the mask control by the mask circuit 181 is executed as described above becomes "0000h". The data after the control is executed becomes "8000h". This data is the start address of the program for executing timer interrupt processing. The data after addition control by the addition circuit 182 is provided to the management controller of the main ROM 73 as address data, whereby the program of the processing targeted for reading by the CALLS instruction is read from the main ROM 73 .

As described above, the addresses in which the upper 4 bits of the 2-byte address are fixed to hexadecimal "8" are specified in the CALLS instruction by using the mask circuit 181 and the adder circuit 182 provided in the main MPU 72. By compressing the address data to 12 bits and reading it by a 2-byte CALLS instruction, compared to the configuration in which the program is read out using only a 3-byte CALLS instruction, the program in the main ROM 73 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the .

Here, the addresses whose upper 4 bits are fixed to hexadecimal "8" include not only "8000h" to "8BFFh" but also "8C00h" to "8FFFh". Theoretically, therefore, it is possible to read the program of the processing included in the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh" using the 2-byte CALLS instruction. However, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the 2-byte CALLS instruction is used to read the program of the processing included in the address range "8C00h" to "8FFFh", part of the address range The data configuration of the CALLS instruction for the address of . Therefore, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the address range of "8C00h" to "8FFFh" is configured to read the program by a 3-byte CALLS instruction. However, if the event of matching the data structure of other 2-byte instructions does not occur, the program of the address included in the address range of "8000h" to "8FFFh" including "8C00h" to "8FFFh" , and a 3-byte CALLS instruction may be executed when reading a program at an address included in the address range of "9000h" to "93FFh". .

As already explained, the processing to be read out by the 2-byte CALLS instruction includes the timer subtraction processing (step S5608), the in/out counter processing of the number of bets (step S5609), and the command output processing (step S5610). , port output processing (step S5611), management processing (step S5613), start waiting processing (step S5702), reception prohibition processing (step S5705), setting processing at start (step S5706), and external output setting processing (step S5711). These 2-byte CALLS instructions target program capacity is partially cleared (step S5504) and fully cleared (step S5505) and set value update processing (step S5506), etc.) are smaller than the capacity of each program. As a result, it becomes possible to ensure a large number of types of processing that enable the program to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction.

<Another form of the fourteenth embodiment>
・The address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction is not limited to "8000h" to "8BFFh", and may be "8000h" to "8FFFh". Even in this case, since the upper 4 bits are fixed at hexadecimal "8", the mask circuit 181 and the adder circuit 182 are used for the 12-bit address data specified by the 2-byte CALLS instruction. By adding the upper 4 bits of hexadecimal "8", the address to be read can be derived.

・It is not limited to the configuration in which a 2-byte CALLS instruction is applied to an address range where the upper 4 bits are fixed at hexadecimal "8". A 2-byte CALLS instruction may be applied to an address range fixed to a number other than "8".

・Multiple 2-byte CALLS instructions are prepared. One 2-byte CALLS instruction reads programs in the address range where the upper 4 bits are fixed as hexadecimal "8", and the other 2-byte CALLS instruction reads A configuration may be adopted in which a program in an address range in which the upper four bits are fixed to hexadecimal "9" is read.

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above fourteenth embodiment in the type of processing to be read out of the program by the 2-byte CALLS instruction. The configuration different from that of the fourteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourteenth embodiment is basically omitted. Moreover, in this embodiment, the execution contents of various processes in the main MPU 72 are based on the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. The processing contents of steps S5801 to S5811 are the same as steps S2701 to S2711 of the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 53) in the sixth embodiment. In this case, in the initialization processing of the second interval SC2 in step S5809 and the extinguishing processing of the interval display section 67 in step S5810, the address is specified by the CALLS instruction, and the program for executing these processes is transferred from the main ROM 73. read out.

FIG. 103 is a flow chart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The processing contents of steps S5901 to S5920 are the same as steps S3101 to S3120 of the AT processing (FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment. In this case, AT step S5902 game number addition processing, AT step S5903 update processing AT net increase, step S5911 remaining grant number addition processing, step S5916 freeze counter setting processing, step S5918 second In the initialization process of the section SC2 and the setting process of the section display section 67 in step S5919, the program for executing these processes is read from the main ROM 73 by specifying the address with the CALLS instruction.

FIG. 104 is a flow chart showing the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The processing contents of steps S6001 to S6017 are the same as steps S3201 to S3217 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) in the sixth embodiment. In this case, in the freeze counter setting process in step S6012, the second section SC2 initialization process in step S6014, the section display unit 67 turning off process in step S6015, and the ending handling process in step S6017, addresses are specified by the CALLS instruction. As a result, a program for executing these processes is read from the main ROM 73 .

FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73 in this embodiment.

Even in this embodiment, as in the fourteenth embodiment, when reading a program included in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh" in the main ROM 73, a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed and "8C00h ” to “93FFh”, a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed. In this case, the programs to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction are read more frequently than the programs to be read by the 3-byte CALLS instruction. In detail, partial clear processing, all clear processing, setting value update processing, addition processing of the number of games during AT, update processing of net increase during AT, subtraction processing of AT continuation counter, addition processing of remaining number of grants and ending correspondence A process including a program in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", such as a process, is read only in one process. Since the program of the process to be read only in these one processes is set in the address range of "8C00h" to "93FFh", a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading it.

On the other hand, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is read out in each of the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 102), the AT processing (FIG. 103), and the second control processing of the game section (FIG. 104). . Further, the light-off processing of the interval display section 67 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus processing (FIG. 102), the AT processing (FIG. 103), and the second control processing of the game interval (FIG. 104). In addition, the setting process to the freeze counter is read in each of the AT process (FIG. 103) and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 104). In addition to these processes, lottery processes and addition processes for the number of precursor games are read out in a plurality of processes. Since the program of the process to be read out in these multiple processes is set in the address range of "8000h" to "8BFFh", a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading the program.

With the above configuration, a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading a program of processing with a relatively low read frequency, and a 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading a program of processing with a relatively high read frequency. the instruction is executed. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main ROM 73 required to store the CALLS instruction.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the fourteenth embodiment in the contents of instructions for calling subroutines when processing using a program is executed in the main MPU 72 . The configuration different from that of the fourteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourteenth embodiment is basically omitted. Moreover, in this embodiment, the execution contents of various processes in the main MPU 72 are based on the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the programs stored in the main ROM 73 and the addresses of the main ROM 73 in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the fourteenth embodiment, not only a 3-byte CALLS instruction but also a 2-byte CALLS instruction are set. A 2-byte CALLS instruction is executed when reading a program stored in the address range from "8000h" to "8BFFh". Also, when reading a program stored in the address range from "8C00h" to "900Fh", a 3-byte CALLS instruction is executed. The data configurations of these 2-byte CALLS instruction and 3-byte CALLS instruction are the same as in the fourteenth embodiment.

In this embodiment, when reading a program stored in the address range from "9010h" to "93FFh", the CALLV instruction is executed instead of the 3-byte CALLS instruction. The CALLV instruction is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each type of process to be called.

FIG. 107(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the CALLV instruction. The CALLV instruction is 1 byte, and instruction identification data indicating that it is a CALLV instruction is set in the upper 4 bits D4 to D7 following the most significant bit D7, and the lower side following the least significant bit D0. 4 bits D0 to D3 are set with index data. The index data is used when specifying the address of the program to be read this time from the index table 183 pre-stored in the main ROM 73 .

FIG. 107(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index table 183. As shown in FIG. In the index table 183, index data having serial numbers from "1h" to "Fh" in hexadecimal are set, and addresses from "9010h" to "93FFh" are set in one-to-one correspondence with the index data. Address data, which are the start addresses of multiple programs set in the range, are set. Each index data is 4 bits and each address data is 2 bytes. 16 index data are set in the index table 183, and the address data associated with each of these index data are the addresses of 16 programs set in the address range of "9010h" to "93FFh". is the starting address.

FIG. 107(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the circuit configuration for providing the management controller of the main ROM 73 with the 2-byte start address of the program to be read when the CALLV instruction is executed. The main MPU 72 is provided with an index grasping circuit 184 and an address reading circuit 185 . When the main MPU 72 executes the CALLV instruction, the 8-bit data of the CALLV instruction is provided to the index recognition circuit 184 . The index grasping circuit 184 extracts data of the lower 4 bits D0 to D3 from the 8-bit data of the supplied CALLV instruction. The extracted lower 4-bit data D0-D3 are supplied to the address read circuit 185. FIG. The address reading circuit 185 identifies index data that matches the provided data of the lower 4 bits D0 to D3 among the index data of the index table 183 read from the main ROM 73, and reads the index data in the index table 183. Read the address data corresponding to This read address data corresponds to any one of "9010h" to "9315h", and is the start address of the program of the processing read out by the CALLV instruction. By providing the address data read by the address read circuit 185 to the management controller of the main ROM 73 , the program of the process read out by the CALLV instruction is read from the main ROM 73 .

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. The processing contents of steps S6101 to S6111 are the same as steps S2701 to S2711 of the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 53) in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing AT processing executed by the main MPU 72 . The processing contents of steps S6201 to S6220 are the same as steps S3101 to S3120 of the AT processing (FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. The processing contents of steps S6301 to S6317 are the same as steps S3201 to S3217 of the second control processing (FIG. 60) of the game section in the sixth embodiment.

Among the above processes, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is read out in each of the pseudo bonus process (FIG. 108), the AT process (FIG. 109), and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 110). . Further, the light-off processing of the interval display section 67 is read out in each of the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 108), the AT processing (FIG. 109), and the second control processing of the game interval (FIG. 110). In addition, the setting process to the freeze counter becomes a read target in each of the AT process (FIG. 109) and the second control process of the game section (FIG. 110). In addition to these processes, lottery processes and addition processes for the number of precursor games are read out in a plurality of processes. As described above, the processes to be read out in a plurality of processes include the initialization process of the second section SC2, the lighting process of the section display section 67, the setting process for the freeze counter, the lottery process for the number of predictive games, and the addition process. There are 16 The number of processes matches the number of index data set in the index table 183, that is, the number of processes that can be read out by the program by the CALLV instruction.

As shown in FIG. 106, the programs of the processes to be read out in a plurality of processes are stored in the address range from "8C00h" to "93FFh", which cannot be read out by the 2-byte CALLS instruction. Specifically, it is stored in the address range from "9010h" to "93FFh". As already explained, the address data associated with each of the 16 index data in the index table 183 are the start addresses of the 16 programs set in the address range from "9010h" to "93FFh". . In other words, the program of the process to be read in a plurality of processes is read by the CALLV instruction, which is a 1-byte instruction. This makes it possible to use the CALLV instruction, which has a smaller data capacity than the CALLS instruction, when reading a program for processing that is relatively frequently read. storage capacity can be reduced.

Since the address to be read by the 1-byte CALLV instruction is set to an address range that cannot be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction, it is not read by the 3-byte CALLS instruction. It is possible to minimize the number of addresses that Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to prepare the read command.

Similar to the 14th embodiment, the processes to be read out by the 2-byte CALLS instruction are the timer subtraction process (step S5608), the bet number in/out counter process (step S5609), and the command output process (step S5610), port output processing (step S5611), management processing (step S5613), start waiting processing (step S5702), reception prohibition processing (step S5705), setting processing at start (step S5706), and external output setting processing (Step S5711). Each program capacity of the processing targeted by these 2-byte CALLS instructions is part of the memory area stored in the address range "8C00h" to "900Fh" which is the target of the program read by the 3-byte CALLS instruction. The capacity is smaller than the capacity of each program for clear processing (step S5504), all clear processing (step S5505), and setting value update processing (step S5506). As a result, it becomes possible to ensure a large number of types of processing that enable program reading by a 2-byte CALLS instruction.

Note that the data capacity of the index data that can be set in the CALLV instruction is not limited to 4 bits. may be

Further, the addresses to be read by the CALLV instruction are not limited to addresses outside the address range to be read by the 2-byte CALLS instruction. may be configured to be the address of

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) In the first embodiment, the AT state ST5 is not limited to the configuration in which the AT state ST5 ends when the remaining number of game media provided in the AT state ST5 becomes "0". The AT state ST5 may end when the number of remaining continuous games in ST5 becomes "0", or when the predetermined number of wins established in the AT state ST5 reaches the upper limit. The AT state ST5 may be ended by the AT state ST5. Even in this case, in the case of the false omen state or the real omen state, the remaining number of continuous games in the AT state ST5 becomes "0", or the predetermined number of wins achieved in the AT state ST5 is the upper limit number of times. The AT state ST5 may be continued even if the AT state ST5 becomes.

(2) In the above-described first embodiment, the value of the AT continuation counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is "0" in the false portent state, and the AT state ST5 is continued. When winning, the number of grants selected in the direct hit winning is not limited to the configuration in which the number is granted immediately, and the number of grants is granted when the false omen state during execution ends. good too. In this case, even if game media are awarded in the situation where the false portent state continues, the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is maintained at "0", and the false portent state ends and the AT state is reached. Due to the awarding of game media generated in the situation where ST5 continues, the number of awarding due to the above-mentioned direct hit win is subject to subtraction. Therefore, the AT state ST5 tends to continue longer.

(3) In the above-described first embodiment, in the case of the false portent state, if the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a false portent winning, the number of remaining continuous games in the false portent state may be increased. good. For example, if a false omen is won in a false omen state, the initial number of continuous games of 10 games is reset as the remaining number of continuous games in the false omen state, thereby increasing the remaining number of continuous games. Alternatively, the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in the false omen state. If the event occurs in a false portent state and the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required to end the continuing AT state ST5 is substantially As a result, the player expects a false omen winning.

In addition, even if a false sign is won in a false sign state in a situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the AT does not increase the number of remaining continuous games in the false sign state. In the state where the remaining number of game media to be provided in state ST5 is "0", if a false omen win is obtained in the false omen state, the number of remaining continuous games in the false omen state may be increased. Thus, in a situation where the false portent state is provided as a mere performance, the AT state ST5 is continued by the false portent state while preventing an increase in the number of remaining continuous games in the false portent state even if a false portent win occurs. In such a situation, it is possible to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends due to the occurrence of the false omen winning.

(4) In the first embodiment described above, in the case of the false omen state, if the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a real omen win, the state is promoted to the omen state and the remaining omen state continues. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games is greater than the remaining number of continuous games in the false portent state up to that point. For example, if the real omen is won in the false omen state, the initial number of continuous games of 10 games is reset as the remaining number of continuous games in the real omen state, thereby increasing the remaining number of continuous games. Alternatively, the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in the false omen state. If the event occurs in the false portent state and the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required to end the continuing AT state ST5 is substantially Therefore, the player expects to win the main omen.

In addition, even if the real omen is won in the false omen state in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the remaining false omen state continues in the subsequent main omen state. The number of games is inherited, and in the event that the present sign is won in the false sign state in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is "0", the remaining number of continuing games in the present sign state after that is changed. It may be configured to increase the number of remaining games to be continued in the false portent state up to. Thus, in a situation where the false portent state is provided as a mere presentation, even if the main portent win occurs, the AT state ST5 by the false portent state is prevented from increasing the number of remaining games to be continued in the main portent state after that. continues, it is possible to substantially increase the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends by the occurrence of this omen win.

(5) In the above-described first embodiment, in the case of the main omen state, if the additional lottery process (step S1103) results in a false omen win or a main omen win, the number of remaining continuous games in the main omen state is increased. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs in the present omen state, the remaining continuation game number of 10 games, which is the initial number of continued games, is reset as the remaining number of games to be continued in the omen state. The number of games may be increased, or the remaining number of continuous games may be increased by adding 10 games, which is the initial number of continuous games, to the remaining number of continuous games in this precursor state. If the event occurs in this precursor state and the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is "0", the number of games required to end the continuing AT state ST5 is substantially As a result, the player expects a false omen win or a real omen win.

In addition, even if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs in this omen state in a situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is not "0", the number of remaining continuation games in this omen state is increased. However, if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs in this omen state in a situation where the remaining number of game media to be provided in the AT state ST5 is "0", the remaining number of continuous games in this omen state is counted. It is good also as a structure which makes it increase. As a result, in a situation where this precursory state is provided as a mere effect, even if a false omen win or a bona fide win occurs, the number of remaining games to be played in this agnostic state is not increased, and the AT by this precursory state. In the situation where the state ST5 continues, the number of games required until the continuing AT state ST5 ends can be substantially increased by the occurrence of false omen winning or real omen winning.

(6) In the above-described first embodiment, in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the false omen state or the real omen state, a direct hit is won in the additional lottery process (step S1103). In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a larger number of grants is more likely to be granted than in the case of direct hit winning in the additional lottery process (step S1103) in other situations. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of direct hit winning in the situation where the remaining number of game media to be given in the AT state ST5 is "0" in the false omen state or the real omen state.

(7) In the second and third embodiments, even if the index value IV=17 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R must be stopped first or the main A configuration may be adopted in which the advantage of adding 1 to the value of the transition advantage counter of the main side RAM 74 is not provided unless the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol on the line ML is stopped. . In addition, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the combination in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R must be stopped first, or "RED 7" will appear on the main line ML. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantage of adding 1 to the value of the transition advantage counter of the main side RAM 74 is not provided unless the combination of the symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "red 7" symbol is stopped. Also, even if the index value IV=18 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the combination in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the right reel 32R must be stopped first or the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML. , The advantage of adding 2 to the value of the transition advantage counter in the main side RAM 74 may not be granted unless the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol is stopped.

(8) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=17 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize is won only when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. can be established, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the first special replay prize can be established only when the middle reel 32M is first stopped, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel A configuration may be adopted in which the first special replay prize can be established when 32R is stopped for the first time.

(9) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize is won only when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. Alternatively, the configuration is such that the second special replay prize can be established, but it is not limited to this, and the first special replay prize or the second special replay prize is established only when the middle reel 32M is first stopped. Alternatively, the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize may be established when the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped.

(10) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the first special replay prize is won when the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time. can be established, the second special replay prize cannot be established, and when the middle reel 32M is stopped for the first time, the second special replay prize can be established, but the first special replay prize is established. It is good also as composition which becomes impossibility. In this case, when the index value IV=17 or 18 is won in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, and when the index value IV=17 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the first stop is the right reel. 32R, when the red 7 notification is executed to enable the player to recognize that the symbol "red 7" should be aimed at on the main line ML, and the index value IV=18 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. , the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is executed by making it possible for the player to recognize that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at. The second special replay winning is established when the index value IV = 18 is won in the first half of the situation, and the first special replay winning is established when the index value IV = 18 is won in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. It is possible to reduce the probability of

(11) In the above second and third embodiments, when the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize is established in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the replay winning is established as the first irregular notification sound. Although the configuration is such that a notification sound is output so that the player can recognize the event, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the first irregular notification sound, a notification sound that clearly indicates that the transition to the AT state ST5 is not triggered may be output, and a notification sound that clearly indicates that the current state is not the pseudo-bonus state ST4 is output. It is good also as a structure.

(12) In the above second and third embodiments, when the first special replay winning prize or the second special replay winning prize is established in a situation other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62. On the other hand, the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are configured so that the irregular notification is not performed, but the configuration is not limited to this, and in addition to the configuration in which the first irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, or Alternatively, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the first irregularity, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the first irregularity.

(13) In the second and third embodiments, when the second special replay prize is established in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, while the upper lamp 61 outputs the second irregular notification sound. And the image display device 63 has a configuration in which the irregular notification is not executed, but it is not limited to this, and in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the second irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, the upper lamp 61 , the image display device 63 may be configured to emit light corresponding to the second irregularity, or to display an image corresponding to the second irregularity in the image display device 63 .

(14) In the above-described third embodiment, in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62 when the first special replay prize is established even though the index value IV=18 is won. On the other hand, the upper lamp 61 and the image display device 63 are configured so that the irregular notification is not performed, but it is not limited to this, and in addition to the configuration in which the third irregular notification sound is output from the speaker 62, or Alternatively, the upper lamp 61 may emit light corresponding to the third irregularity, and the image display device 63 may display an image corresponding to the third irregularity.

(15) In the second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), red 7 is announced in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4. Although the BAR notification is executed in the latter half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the player wins with the index value IV=18 in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the player is urged to establish the first special replay prize by executing the red 7 notification, and the player wins with the index value IV=18 in the AT state ST5. In this case, the player may be prompted to establish the second special replay prize by executing BAR notification. In this case, when the index value IV=18 is won in a state other than the pseudo-bonus state ST4 and the first special replay prize is established, the corresponding irregular notification is executed, and the index value in a state other than the AT state ST5. When IV=18 is won and the second special replay prize is established, the corresponding irregular notification may be executed.

(16) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=17 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition advantage counter in the main side RAM 74 is reliably counted. Although the value is configured to be incremented by 1, it is not limited to this, and the lottery process is executed when the index value IV=17 is won, and when the lottery process wins, the main side RAM 74 1 may be added to the value of the transition advantageous counter in . In this case, when winning is won in the lottery process, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the red 7 notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at is executed, and the winning lottery process is executed. It is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed when the player is out of line.

(17) In the above-described second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition time in the main side RAM 74 is ensured. Although the value of the advantage counter is incremented by 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process is executed when the index value IV=18 is won. A configuration may be adopted in which 1 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 . In this case, when the lottery process wins, the first stop is the right reel 32R, and the red 7 notification indicating that the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at is executed, and the winning lottery process is executed. It is preferable that the red 7 notification is not executed when the player is out of line.

(18) In the above second and third embodiments, when the index value IV=18 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, the transition time in the main side RAM 74 is ensured. Although the value of the advantage counter is incremented by 2, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery process is executed when the index value IV=18 is won, and when the lottery process wins the lottery. A configuration in which 2 is added to the value of the transition advantageous counter in the main RAM 74 may be employed. In this case, when the lottery process wins, a BAR notification is executed indicating that the first stop is the right reel 32R and the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML should be aimed at. It is preferable that the BAR notification is not executed when the deviation occurs.

(19) In the above-described fourth and fifth embodiments, the display surface of the image display device 63 is horizontally divided into two areas in the first additional period to partition the left area A1 and the right area A2. However, the display surface of the image display device 63 may be divided into two in the vertical direction during the first superposition period to divide the area into an upper area and a lower area. Further, in the second superposition period, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into two in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, respectively, so that it is divided into an upper left area A11, an upper right area A12, a lower left area A13, and a lower right area A14. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display surface of the image display device 63 may be vertically divided into four in the second additional period to divide into four display areas. It is good also as a structure which divides into four display areas by dividing into four directions.

(20) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the display surface of the image display device 63 is divided into a plurality of display areas. However, it may be configured to occur in other circumstances. In addition, as effects for dividing the display surface of the image display device 63 into a plurality of display areas, a two-division effect and a four-division effect are set. , a 5-split effect, an 8-split effect, a 9-split effect, and the like may be present.

(21) In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the image data D1 at the time of division is copied to at least the second divided area DA2 at the time of division into two of the frame areas 106a and 106b to be rendered. , but not limited to this, the image data D1 at the time of division is drawn using the image data for the first divided area DA1 at the time of division into two, and the second division area DA2 at the time of division into two is drawn. On the other hand, the image data may be used to draw the image data D1 at the time of division. Even in this case, the image data used for drawing the image data D1 when divided into the first divided area DA1 when divided into two and the second divided area DA2 when divided into two are divided. Since the image data used for drawing the divided image data D1 is the same as the image data used for drawing the divided image data D1, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data read from the memory module 101 for drawing the divided image data D1. Become.

(22) In the above-described fourth and fifth embodiments, the same image is displayed in each of the left side area A1 and the right side area A2 on the display surface of the image display device 63 as the animation display G21, G22 for effect or the given number notification display G23. is displayed, it may be configured to display a different image. Even in this case, by displaying the stop order notification image G34 or the operation notification image G35 across the left area A1 and the right area A2, the stop order notification image G34 and the operation notification image G35 can be made conspicuous. It becomes possible.

(23) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(24) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or if the rotation is stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(25) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that medals are awarded when a small winning combination is won. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(26) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, RT games, CT games or ART machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a bonus state that is advantageous to the player.

(27) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. In addition, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and it is also possible to compose a pattern with a three-dimensional shape, etc., and it is possible to compose a pattern with a combination of these. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(28) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the above first to sixteenth embodiments may be mutually applied in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment. The configuration may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the fourteenth embodiment, or the characteristic configuration of the third embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fifth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment. A combination of the characteristic configuration of the above embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the tenth embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the thirteenth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment may In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to sixteenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A continuation criterion storage means (AT continuation counter 74e in the first embodiment) is generated based on the fact that the game is executed in an advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) that is advantageous to the player and an update opportunity (playing media is provided) occurs. information updating means (function for executing the process of step S1204 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for updating the continuation reference information stored in the
Terminating means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the termination information (function for executing the processing of steps S1213 to S1215 of the main side MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
Even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information when the advantageous game state is in a predetermined effect execution situation (false portent state), the advantageous game state is terminated without ending the advantageous game state by the termination means. State continuation means for continuing (function of making a negative determination in step S1212 of the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A1, in the case of the predetermined effect execution situation, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information, the advantageous game state is continued without ending. As a result, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous gaming state can continue. Further, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution situation from being terminated halfway along with the termination of the advantageous game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature A2. When the advantageous game state is in the predetermined performance execution situation, the continuation reference information becomes the end information, and the advantageous game state is continued, and the continuation reference information is the end information. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the advantageous game state is terminated when the predetermined effect execution state is terminated.

According to the characteristic A2, when the advantageous game state is continued even if the continuation reference information is end information due to the predetermined performance execution situation, or when the predetermined performance execution situation ends while the continuation reference information is the end information. The advantageous game state also ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing excessively.

Feature A3. Predetermined updating means (first function to execute the processing of step S1105 of the main side MPU 72 in the embodiment),
The predetermined update means updates the continuation reference information so as to move away from the end information based on the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity while the advantageous gaming state is continued by the state continuation means. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2.

According to feature A3, the continuation reference information is updated to the side away from the end information based on the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity in the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, the player expects that the predetermined opportunity will occur in the advantageous game state. In this case, even if the continuation reference information is end information due to the predetermined performance execution situation, if the advantageous gaming state is continued, and if a predetermined opportunity occurs in this continuing situation, the continuation reference information is updated away from the end information. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the predetermined opportunity will occur even in the situation where the game continues.

Feature A4. The predetermined effect execution state continues over a predetermined number of games, which is the number of games, and in each game in the predetermined effect execution state, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined effect execution state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

According to feature A4, the predetermined effect execution state continues over a predetermined number of games, which is the number of games, and in each game in the predetermined effect execution state, the execution content of the effect is determined in a manner corresponding to the predetermined effect execution state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a series of effects over a plurality of games in a predetermined effect execution situation. In this case, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the case of the predetermined effect execution situation, the advantageous game state is continued without ending, so in the predetermined effect execution situation It is possible to prevent a series of performances over a plurality of games from ending halfway along with the end of an advantageous game state.

Feature A5. Predetermined effect start means for starting the predetermined effect execution situation based on the occurrence of the effect start opportunity (function for executing the processing of steps S1116 to S1118 of the main side MPU 72 in the first embodiment),
The predetermined performance starting means is characterized in that even if the performance start opportunity occurs in the predetermined performance execution situation, the predetermined performance execution situation being executed is continued instead of newly starting the predetermined performance execution situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to the feature A5, even if an effect start opportunity occurs in a predetermined effect execution situation, the predetermined effect execution situation is continued without being newly started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined performance execution situation from continuing excessively.

Feature A6. The predetermined effect execution state continues over a predetermined number of games, which is the number of multiple games,
The game machine according to feature A5, characterized in that the predetermined performance starting means does not increase the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined performance execution situation even if the performance start opportunity occurs in the predetermined performance execution situation.

According to the characteristic A6, even if a performance start opportunity occurs in a predetermined performance execution situation, the number of remaining continuous games in the predetermined performance execution situation is not increased, so that the predetermined performance execution situation does not continue excessively. becomes possible.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the predetermined performance execution status does not trigger updating of the continuation reference information to a side away from the end information.

According to feature A7, even though the predetermined production execution situation does not trigger updating of the continuation reference information to the side away from the end information, it is assumed that the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the case of the predetermined production execution situation. Also, the advantageous game state is continued without ending. As a result, in a situation where the continuation reference information is not the end information, the predetermined effect execution situation having only a role as an effect that does not give a change to the profit of the player is changed to an advantageous game state in a situation where the continuation reference information is the end information. can be made to continue, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the predetermined effect execution situation.

Feature A8. The state continuation means terminates the advantageous game state by the termination means even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the case of a specific performance execution situation (main precursor state) in the advantageous game state. Continue the advantageous gaming state without
The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the specific effect execution status serves as a trigger for updating the continuation reference information to a side away from the end information.

According to the feature A8, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information in the specific performance execution situation, the advantageous game state continues, and the specific performance execution situation updates the continuation reference information to the side away from the end information. Opportunity. As a result, even if the continuation reference information becomes the end information, the player expects that the specific effect execution state is reached when the advantageous game state is continued due to the predetermined effect execution state or the specific effect execution state. It will be done.

Feature A9. When the continuation reference information is not the end information in the predetermined effect execution situation, the information updating means brings the continuation reference information closer to the end information based on the occurrence of the update opportunity due to execution of the game. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that the update to .

According to feature A9, when the continuation criterion information is not end information even in a predetermined performance execution situation, the game is executed and the continuation criterion information is updated closer to the end information based on the occurrence of an update opportunity. be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantage of being in the predetermined effect execution situation from becoming too high.

For the configuration of features A1 to A9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the above feature group A can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area according to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing medium provision processing and response processing at the end of the game in the main side MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
A special combination (index value IV=17 or 18 in the second and third embodiments) is set as a winning combination in the lottery process for the combination,
The pattern display control means, when the special combination is won, operates in a predetermined stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "red 7" symbol is aimed on the main line ML, or a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is aimed at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML). 1 stop and aim at the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML) based on the operation of the stop operation means, the predetermined stop result ("Red 7" symbol in the second and third embodiments) or a combination of "BAR" symbols) can be displayed,
This game machine is
Predetermined notification target situation (pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, second half of the pseudo bonus state ST4 when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) If the special combination is won in the above, a special notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in the predetermined stop mode (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols, Red 7 notification, BAR notification when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols) is executed (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "Red 7" symbols: The function of executing the processing of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1502 of the effect side MPU 92, and the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols. In the case of: the function of executing the processing of steps S1412 and S1413 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1504 of the effect side MPU 92),
A predetermined non-announcement situation in which the special combination is won but the special notification is not executed (if the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, the situation is not a pseudo bonus state ST4, the predetermined stop result is " BAR symbol combination, the situation is not the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the predetermined display notification is given based on the display of the predetermined stop result by operating the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode. (If the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols, the first irregular notification sound in the second and third embodiments or the third irregular notification sound in the third embodiment, the predetermined stop result is Predetermined display notification control means for executing a first irregular notification sound or a second irregular notification sound in the case of a combination of "BAR" symbols (predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols) If there is: the function of executing the processing of step S1704 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment and the function of executing the processing of step S1510 in the effect side MPU 92, step S1803 or step S1806 of the main side MPU 72 in the third embodiment When the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: the function of executing the process of step S1707 or step S1710 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment and the step S1510 of the effect side MPU 92 or A function of executing the process of step S1512, a function of executing the process of step S1809 or step S1812 of the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a special combination is won in a predetermined notification target situation, a special notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode. By operating the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode according to the notification, it is possible to display the predetermined stop result. In this case, the predetermined display notification is executed based on the fact that the stop operation means is operated in the predetermined stop mode and the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation in which the special combination is won but the special notification is not executed. be done. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined stop result has been displayed in a situation where the predetermined stop result should not have been displayed, and the player is not confused by the display of the predetermined stop result. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Therefore, it is possible to make the game preferably performed.

Feature B2. The pattern display means includes a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying the pattern,
The predetermined stop mode includes a mode in which the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order (first stop of the right reel 32R),
When the special combination is won, the predetermined stop result may not be displayed even if the stop operation means is operated so as to stop the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas in the predetermined stop order. is the configuration,
The predetermined display notification control means is configured to stop the predetermined stop even if the stop operation means is operated so that the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order in the predetermined non-notification situation. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the predetermined display notification is not executed when the result is not displayed.

According to feature B2, even if the variable display of patterns is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a predetermined non-notification situation, if the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the predetermined display notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation in which the predetermined display/notification is executed to the situation in which the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification state, thereby preventing the predetermined display/notification from being excessively executed. becomes possible.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the player is not penalized even if the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification situation.

According to feature B3, when a predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation, a predetermined display notification is executed, but no penalty is given to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent disadvantages from being caused to the player who causes the predetermined stop result to be displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation due to an operation error.

Feature B4. When a predetermined event, which is either winning the special combination or displaying the predetermined stop result, occurs in the predetermined notification target situation, a predetermined profit is given to the player, and the predetermined non- Predetermined profit providing means that does not provide the predetermined profit to the player even if the predetermined event occurs in the notification situation (when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment A function of executing the processing of step S1604 or step S1608, and when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: a function of executing the processing of step S1610 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by:

According to feature B4, when a predetermined event, which is either winning a special role or displaying a predetermined stop result, occurs in a predetermined notification target situation, a predetermined profit is given to the player, and a predetermined In the configuration in which the predetermined profit is not given even if the predetermined event occurs in the non-notification situation, the predetermined display notification is executed when the predetermined stop result is displayed in the predetermined non-notification state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the predetermined profit is not awarded despite the display of the predetermined stop result in the predetermined non-notification situation.

Feature B5. A specific profit giving means (predetermined When the stop result is a combination of "red 7" symbols: the function of executing the replay profit of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, when the predetermined stop result is a combination of "BAR" symbols: the second A function of executing the replay profit of the main side MPU 72 in the embodiment and a function of executing the processing of step S1604 or step S1608 of the main side MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the predetermined display notification is executed so as to allow the player to recognize that the specific profit has been awarded.

According to the feature B5, when a special winning combination is won in a predetermined non-notification situation and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a special combination winning and a predetermined stop result are displayed in a predetermined notification target state. In a configuration in which a specific profit that is less advantageous to the player than the predetermined profit that is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs, a specific profit is awarded to the player in a predetermined non-notification situation is won and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the specific profit has been awarded. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that a specific profit is given instead of a predetermined profit when a specific combination is won in a predetermined non-notification situation and a predetermined stop result is displayed.

Feature B6. Characteristic feature B5, characterized in that the specific profit giving means gives the specific profit to the player regardless of the stop result when the special role is won in the predetermined non-notification situation. game machine.

According to feature B6, in a configuration in which a specific profit is given to a player regardless of the stop result when a special combination is won in a predetermined non-announcement situation, a specific profit is awarded to a player in a predetermined non-announcement situation. When a winning result is displayed and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the specific profit has been awarded, so the predetermined stop result is displayed in a predetermined non-notification situation. It is possible to make the player aware that the being played does not affect the profit.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the specific benefit is a benefit of replay.

According to feature B7, in the configuration in which the benefit of replaying is given as the specific benefit, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects.

Feature B8. The symbol display control means, when the special combination is won, operates in a specific stop mode (a stop operation mode in which the right reel 32R is first stopped and a "red 7" symbol is aimed on the main line ML, in this case, a predetermined stop mode). is the first stop of the right reel 32R and a specific stop result (combination of "red 7" symbols, In this case, the predetermined stop result enables the combination of "BAR" symbols to be displayed,
In the game machine, when the special combination is won in a specific notification target situation (the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, in this case, the predetermined notification target situation is the second half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the specific stop mode is used. Predetermined notification control means (in the second embodiment The function of executing the processing of step S1410 to step S1411 of the main side MPU72, the function of executing the processing of step S1502 of the effect side MPU92, in this case, the special notification control means is the step S1412 of the main side MPU72 in the second embodiment ~ A function to execute the processing of step S1413, a function to execute the processing of step S1504 of the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the predetermined non-notification state is a state in which the special combination is won and the predetermined notification is being performed.

According to the feature B8, when the special role is won, the predetermined stop result is displayed based on the operation of the stop operation means in the predetermined stop mode, and the specific stop operation means is operated in the specific stop mode. In the configuration in which the stop result is displayed, a special notification is executed that enables the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a predetermined stop mode when winning a special role in a predetermined notification target situation. A predetermined notification is executed that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated in a specific stop mode when a special winning combination is won in a specific notification target situation. As a result, it is possible to change the type of the stop result prompting the stop display in the situation when the special role is won. In this case, a stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop mode in a situation where a predetermined notification is being executed to enable the player to recognize that the player should operate the stop operation means in the specific stop mode after winning the special combination in a specific notification target situation. When the means is operated and a predetermined stop result is displayed, a predetermined display notification is executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result to be reported has been displayed.

Feature B9. Predetermined profit giving means ( A function of executing the process of step S1610 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment);
Specified profit giving means ( A function of executing the process of step S1608 of the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment);
with
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the predetermined profit is more advantageous to the player than the specific profit.

According to feature B9, when a predetermined stop result corresponding to the provision of a predetermined profit with a relatively high degree of advantage is displayed in a specific notification target situation in which a specific profit with a relatively low degree of advantage can be awarded, a predetermined result is displayed. Display notification is executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the object to which the profit is to be given is not the predetermined profit.

Feature B10. In the predetermined notification target situation, the special combination is won and the special notification is executed, but the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop mode, and the specific stop result is displayed based on the specific display notification. (3rd irregular notification sound in the third embodiment) is provided (function for executing the processing of step S1806 of the main side MPU 72 in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature B8 or B9.

According to feature B10, in a situation where a special notice is being executed to enable the player to recognize that a special winning combination should be won in a predetermined notification target situation and the player should operate the stop operation means in a predetermined stop mode, in a specific stop mode. When the stop operation means is operated and the specific stop result is displayed, the specific display notification is executed. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that a stop result different from the stop result to be reported has been displayed.

For the configuration of features B1 to B10, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a pattern display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets the game execution status based on the operation of the start operation means;
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing medium provision processing and response processing at the end of the game in the main side MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
As a role to be elected in the lottery process of the above role,
A first stop result (a combination of "red 7" patterns in the second and third embodiments) can be displayed when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order. 1 role (index value IV = 17 in the second and third embodiments),
When the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, the first stop result can be displayed, and when the first stop result is not displayed, the second stop result (second 2, a combination of "BAR" symbols in the third embodiment) that can be displayed (index value IV = 18 in the second and third embodiments);
is set.

According to the feature C1, when the first combination is won, the first stop result can be displayed when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the second combination is won. In this case, when the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, the first stop result can be displayed, and when the first stop result is not displayed, the second stop result can be displayed. becomes. Thus, when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined order in a predetermined situation, the second combination is used to display the second stop result. It is possible to increase the probability that the first stop result can be displayed when the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order in a situation different from the situation of (1). If the probability of winning the first combination is set to a predetermined probability so that the probability of being able to display the first stop result is set to a predetermined probability, the first combination will be won with a predetermined probability even in the predetermined situation. However, since the first stop result can be displayed even when the second winning combination is won as described above, the first stop result can be displayed in a situation different from the above-mentioned predetermined situation. While setting the probability to a predetermined probability, it is possible to set the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the predetermined situation to be lower than the predetermined probability. And it becomes possible to produce such an effect by using the second combination that enables the second stop result to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make the game preferably performed.

Feature C2. The pattern display control means, when the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won, the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order. It is possible to display the first stop result when the stop operation means is operated at the first operation timing (timing aiming at the "red 7" symbol on the main line ML), and the second combination is performed. In the case of winning, when the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, and at the second operation timing (the timing at which the "BAR" pattern is aimed on the main line ML). The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the second stop result can be displayed when the stop operation means is operated.

According to the feature C2, when the first combination or the second combination is won, the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the stop operation means is operated at the first operation timing. When operated, the first stop result is displayed, and when the second combination is won, the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the stop operation means is operated at the second operation timing. If the second stop result is displayed. Thereby, when the second winning combination is won and the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, the first stop result can be displayed and the first stop result is not displayed. In the configuration in which the second stop result can be displayed at the end, it is possible to change the stop result to be displayed between the first stop result and the second stop result depending on the operation timing of the stop operation means.

Feature C3. A plurality of said symbols, regardless of whether the first winning combination is won in the first notification target situation (the first half of the pseudo-bonus state ST4) or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation. Stopping the variable display of the pattern in the display area in the predetermined stop order, and executing a first notification for allowing the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. 1 notification control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S1406 to S1408 and steps S1410 to S1411 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1502 of the effect side MPU 92);
When the second winning combination is won in the second notification target situation (the second half situation of the pseudo-bonus state ST4), the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of the pattern display areas is stopped in the predetermined stop order, and at the second operation timing. A second notification control means for executing a second notification that allows the player to recognize that the stop operation means should be operated (the process of steps S1412 to S1413 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment function to execute the processing of step S1504 of the effect side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C3, in the first notification target situation, the variable display of patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order regardless of whether the first prize is won or the second prize is won. At the same time, the first notification is executed so that the player can recognize that the stop operation means should be operated at the first operation timing. As a result, it is possible to display the first stop result regardless of whether the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation. On the other hand, in the second notification target situation, when the second winning combination is won, the variable display of the patterns in the plurality of pattern display areas is stopped in a predetermined stop order, and the stop operation means is operated at the second operation timing. A second notification is performed that makes it recognizable to the person. This makes it possible to display the second stop result when the second combination is won in the second notification target situation.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the first notification control means executes the first notification when the first combination is won in the second notification target situation.

According to feature C4, since the first notification is executed when the first combination is won not only in the first notification target situation but also in the second notification target situation, the first combination is won in the first notification target situation. It is possible to display the first stop result when the In other words, the probability that the first stop result can be displayed in the first notification target situation is the sum of the winning probabilities of the first and second hands, whereas the first stop result is displayed in the second notification target situation. The probability that the result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the first combination, and the probability that the second stop result can be displayed corresponds to the winning probability of the second combination.

Feature C5. In the first notification target situation, either the case where the first winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed, or the second winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed is displayed. The gaming machine according to feature C3 or C4, wherein the same first profit (adding 1 to the value of the transition advantage counter in the main side RAM 74) is awarded to the player.

According to feature C5, in the first notification target situation, the first winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed, or the second winning combination is won and the first stop result is displayed. Since the same first profit is awarded to the player in both cases, the first stop result is displayed regardless of whether the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation. In the configuration in which the player's stop operation is performed as described above, it is possible to make the advantage of displaying the first stop result in the first notification target situation constant.

Feature C6. First profit giving means (second implementation) for giving the first profit to the player regardless of whether the first winning combination or the second winning combination is won in the first notification target situation The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S1604 and S1608 of the main side MPU 72 in the form).

According to the feature C6, if the player wins the first or second hand in the first notification target situation, the first profit is given to the player regardless of the stop result after the variable display of the pattern. It is possible to prevent the provision of the first profit from disappearing due to a mistake in the stop operation.

Feature C7. A second benefit (transition in the main side RAM 74 The second profit giving means (the function of executing the process of step S1610 of the main side MPU 72 in the second embodiment) for giving the player the value of the time advantage counter by 2). The gaming machine according to C5 or C6.

According to feature C7, the second benefit is given to the player by the occurrence of the second target event, which is either winning the second winning combination or displaying the second stop result in the second notification target situation. , the player expects the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation.

Feature C8. The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit.

According to feature C8, since the second profit is more advantageous to the player than the first profit, winning the first or second hand in the first notification target situation or The player expects the second target event to occur in the second notification target situation rather than the display of the first stop result.

Feature C9. As the plurality of pattern display regions, a left pattern display region (left reel 32L), a middle pattern display region (middle reel 32M), and a right pattern display region (right reel 32R) are provided,
Characteristic features C1 to C1, characterized in that the pattern display area to be stopped first in the predetermined stop order is a predetermined pattern display area (right reel 32R) other than the left side pattern display area. The gaming machine according to any one of C8.

According to the feature C9, even if the first combination is won, the first stop result is not displayed unless the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area other than the left side pattern display area is stopped first, and the second combination is displayed. Even if the player wins the prize, the first stop result and the second stop result are not displayed unless the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined pattern display area other than the left side pattern display area is stopped first. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the first stop result and the second stop result will be displayed in a situation where the stop order of the variable display of patterns is not notified.

For the configuration of features C1 to C9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the characteristic group B and the characteristic group C can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary that the game be played favorably, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Display means (image display device 63 in fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 63a in fourth and fifth embodiments);
Display storage means (memory module 101 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) storing image data in advance;
Drawing data is set in the setting storage area (the first frame area 106a and the second frame area 106b in the fourth and fifth embodiments) using the image data, and the image signal corresponding to the drawing data is generated as described above. Display control means (the production side MPU 92 and VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments) for displaying an image on the display unit based on the output to the display means;
with
The display control means controls, in the setting storage area, a first setting area (first divided area DA1 when divided into two) corresponding to the first display area (left area A1) in the display section, and the setting storage area. , predetermined corresponding images (animation displays G21, G22 for effect, addition Predetermined drawing execution means (steps S2502 to S2505 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment are executed to set predetermined drawing data (image data D1 at the time of division) to enable display of number notification display G23). a function of executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2606 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment).

According to feature D1, by setting predetermined drawing data in each of the first setting area and the second setting area in the setting storage area, the first display area and the second display area in the display section correspond to each other in a predetermined manner. An image is displayed. As a result, when the predetermined corresponding image is displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area on the display section, the same predetermined corresponding image is displayed in each of the first set area and the second set area using the same image data. All you have to do is set the drawing data. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display on the display means.

Feature D2. The predetermined drawing execution means is copy execution means for copying the predetermined drawing data to the second set area (the function of executing the processing of step S2505 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment, the step S2505 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment). function of executing the processing of S2606).

According to feature D2, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data in the second setting area. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load compared to a configuration in which predetermined drawing data is set using image data for each of the first set area and the second set area.

Feature D3. The predetermined drawing execution means includes means for setting the predetermined drawing data in the first setting area using the image data (function for executing the processing of step S2504 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment),
The game machine according to feature D2, wherein the copy executing means copies the predetermined drawing data set in the first set area to the second set area.

According to feature D3, the predetermined drawing data is set in the second setting area by copying the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area using the image data to the second setting area. This makes it possible to set the predetermined drawing data in the second setting process using the predetermined drawing data set in the first setting area.

Feature D4. The predetermined drawing executing means is means for setting the predetermined drawing data in a storage area (development buffer 105) different from the setting storage area (step S2604 of the VDP 103 in the fifth embodiment) using the image data. function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the copy executing means copies the predetermined drawing data set in the different storage areas to the first set area and the second set area.

According to feature D4, predetermined drawing data is set using image data in a storage area different from the setting storage area, and the set predetermined drawing data is copied to each of the first setting area and the second setting area. be done. As a result, it is possible to create the predetermined drawing data to be copied to the first setting area and the second setting area without executing the drawing process to the setting storage area.

Feature D5. The display control means displays the same content in each of the first display area and the second display area in addition to displaying the predetermined corresponding image in each of the first display area and the second display area. Different correspondence drawing that makes it possible to display different corresponding images (remaining continuous game number image G31, acquired number display image G32, remaining awarded number display image G33, stop order notification image G34, and operation notification image G35) Data (image data D2 corresponding to the remaining continuous game number image G31, image data D3 corresponding to the acquired number display image G32, image data D4 corresponding to the remaining awarded number display image G33, image data corresponding to the stop order notification image G34 and image data D5 corresponding to the operation notification image G35) in the setting storage area (the function of executing the processing of steps S2506 to S2513 of the VDP 103 in the fourth embodiment; The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S2607 to S2614 of the VDP 103 in the form.

According to the feature D5, while displaying predetermined corresponding images in each of the first display area and the second display area, different correspondences that are not images displayed with the same content in each of the first display area and second display area are displayed. An image can be displayed.

Feature D6. The different correspondence setting means sets the setting area including the first setting area and the second setting area so that the different correspondence image is displayed in the display area including the first display area and the second display area. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the different corresponding drawing data is set.

According to the feature D6, since the different corresponding image is displayed in the display area including the first display area and the second display area, the first display area and the second display area are divided, but the display is not bound by the division. It is possible to do

Feature D7. The different correspondence setting means sets the different correspondence to the set area including the first set area and the second set area after the predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first set area and the second set area. The gaming machine according to feature D6, characterized by setting drawing data.

According to feature D7, after predetermined drawing data is set in each of the first set region and the second set region, different corresponding drawing data is set in the set region including the first set region and the second set region. , a different corresponding image is displayed in front of the predetermined corresponding image displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area so as not to be constrained by the division of the first display area and the second display area. . As a result, the predetermined corresponding image displayed in each of the first display area and the second display area and the different corresponding image displayed so as not to be constrained by the division of the first display area and the second display area respectively. can be brought to attention.

Feature D8. The display control means stores specific drawing data that enables a specific correspondence image to be displayed in a display area including the first set area and the second set area. 27(a) to 27(c) in the VDP 103). .

According to the feature D8, it is possible to generate a display period during which the specific correspondence image is displayed in a situation where the partitioning of the first display area and the second display area is not performed.

For the configuration of features D1 to D8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Display means (image display device 63 in fourth and fifth embodiments) having a display section (liquid crystal display section 63a in fourth and fifth embodiments);
Display control means for displaying an image on the display unit (the production side MPU 92 and VDP 103 in the fourth and fifth embodiments);
with
The display control means controls the display unit to have a plurality of display areas (left area A1 and right area A2 when split into two, upper left area A11, upper right area A12, lower left area A13 and lower left area A13 when split into four). lower right area A14), and in each of the plurality of display areas, partition side images (animation displays G21 and G22 for effect and grant number notification display G23 when divided into two, and when divided into four In a state where animation displays G41 and G42 for effect and award number notification display G43) are displayed, different corresponding images (remaining continuous game number image G31, Section corresponding control means for controlling the display means to display an acquired number display image G32, a remaining given number display image G33, a stop order notification image G34, and an operation notification image G35) (fourth and fifth embodiments) and a function of executing a display control process for the additional period of the effect side MPU 92 and a function of executing the drawing process of the divided image of the VDP 103).

According to the feature E1, in a state in which the partition side image is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas partitioned on the display unit, the corresponding image is not an image displayed with the same content in each of the plurality of display areas. is displayed. As a result, while drawing attention to the section-side images displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, display contents different from these section-side images are provided by separate corresponding images displayed independently of the plurality of display areas. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display on the display means.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the different corresponding image is displayed as if it exists in front of the plurality of display areas.

According to feature E2, in a configuration in which a separate corresponding image is displayed in a state in which a partition side image is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the corresponding separate corresponding image exists in front of the plurality of display areas. is displayed, it is possible to make the different correspondence image stand out.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the different correspondence image is displayed across a plurality of display areas so as to straddle boundaries of the plurality of display areas.

According to feature E3, the partition-side image is displayed within the range of each display area, while the different corresponding image is displayed across a plurality of display areas so as to straddle the boundaries of the plurality of display areas. be. This makes it possible to display the different correspondence image in a size larger than the partition side image.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the different correspondence image is an image for notifying the player of predetermined content.

According to the feature E4, the different correspondence image for informing the player of the predetermined content is displayed independently without being limited to a plurality of display areas, so that the predetermined content can be preferably notified. It becomes possible.

Feature E5. The display control means, based on the operation of the operation means (manipulation device 121 for effect) during the effective period of operation, provides a post-operation image (applied number notification display G23 in the case of 2-split, giving number notification display G43) is displayed on the display unit (function for performing display shown in FIG. 43(c) or FIG. 44(c) in VDP 103),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the different correspondence image is an image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the operation valid period.

According to feature E5, the different correspondence image that allows the player to recognize that the operation means should be operated during the valid operation period is independently displayed without being limited to a plurality of display areas. , it is possible to appropriately notify that the operation means should be operated.

Feature E6. Any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the number of the display areas displayed as the plurality of display areas is different between the first display state (during splitting into two) and the second display state (during splitting into four). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E6, since the number of display areas displayed as the plurality of display areas differs between the first display state and the second display state, the partition side image is displayed using the plurality of display regions. It is possible to diversify the display contents in the case of

Feature E7. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the section-side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data.

According to feature E7, since the division-side images in each of the plurality of display areas are displayed using the same image data, it is possible to display the division-side images while reducing the processing load.

For the configuration of features E1 to E7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the characteristic group D and the characteristic group E can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to display in a suitable manner on the display means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A game cycle (game) is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined start trigger (operation of the start lever 41 in a situation where game media are bet), and a predetermined end trigger (stop button for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R). 42 to 44), so that the game round ends based on the occurrence of the game round control means (steps S305 to S312 in the main side MPU 72) that controls the execution of each game round. function) and
Predetermined target game times (in the sixth embodiment, the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST4 without transition to the AT state ST5, in the eighth embodiment, the remaining number of grants in the AT state ST5 is A caution event that enables execution of a predetermined caution event (caution display by displaying a caution image G52) capable of calling a predetermined caution to a player in response to the occurrence of a game or a game in which an ending condition is satisfied. Control means (in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the attention display control process in the production side MPU 92, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4103 and S4109 in the production side MPU 92, the ninth embodiment Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S4305 and S4309 in the production side MPU 92),
with
A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the predetermined attention event can be continued when the next game round for the predetermined target game round is started in a situation where the predetermined attention event is being executed.

According to the feature F1, since the predetermined attention event is executed in response to the occurrence of the predetermined target game round, it is possible to prompt the player to give a predetermined attention in response to the occurrence of the predetermined target game round. In this case, when the next game round is started for the predetermined target game round in a situation where the predetermined caution event is being executed, the execution of the predetermined caution event can be continued. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the execution of the predetermined attention event is continued without being terminated when a new game round is executed, and it is possible to secure an opportunity for the player to recognize the predetermined attention event. Become.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the predetermined warning event is an event capable of calling the player's attention to the player's addiction to the game.

According to the feature F2, by executing the predetermined warning event, it is possible to call the player's attention to the addiction to the game. By providing the configuration of the feature F1, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the player to recognize an event that calls the player's attention to the player's addiction to the game.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the execution of the predetermined attention event may be terminated before the next game round is started for the predetermined target game round.

According to the feature F3, not only when the execution of the predetermined attention event is continued when the next game round is started for the predetermined target game round, but also when the next game round for the predetermined target game round It is possible to create a situation in which execution of the predetermined attention event is terminated before is initiated. This makes it possible to diversify the relationship between the execution of the predetermined attention event and the game round.

Feature F4. The attention event control means is means for terminating execution of the predetermined attention event based on the elapse of a predetermined duration from the start of execution of the predetermined attention event (effect in the sixth embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S3009 of the side MPU 92 .

According to the feature F4, the predetermined attention event is terminated based on the lapse of the predetermined predetermined duration from the start of its execution. It is possible to reliably secure the event over a period of time, and to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the predetermined caution event.

Feature F5. The predetermined target game round is a game round when a predetermined game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the sixth embodiment, AT state ST5 in the eighth and ninth embodiments) ends. A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

According to the feature F5, in a configuration in which a predetermined target game round occurs when the predetermined game state ends, a predetermined attention event is executed in response to the occurrence of the predetermined target game round, so the predetermined game state ends. When doing so, it is possible to urge the player to give a predetermined attention.

Feature F6. When the predetermined game state ends, an end corresponding display corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state (bonus end display in the sixth embodiment, AT end display in the eighth embodiment, end clear indication in the ninth embodiment) image G61, total number of games image G62, and total number of wins image G63) is executed (in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2804 and S2903 in the production side MPU 92; In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4102 and S4108 in the production side MPU 92, and in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4302, S4304, S4309 and S4310 in the production side MPU 92). ,
The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the execution period of the predetermined attention event can overlap all or part of the execution period of the termination correspondence display.

According to the feature F6, when the predetermined game state ends, the end correspondence display is performed, so that the player can clearly recognize that the predetermined game state ends. In this case, the execution period of the predetermined caution event may overlap all or part of the execution period of the termination correspondence display. As a result, it is possible to make the player who pays attention to the end-corresponding display also recognize the predetermined warning event.

Feature F7. The attention event control means is a means for starting the predetermined attention event in a situation where the end correspondence display is being executed (steps S2805 and steps S3002 to S3004 of the production side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment A gaming machine according to feature F6, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the feature F7, since the predetermined attention event is started in the situation where the display corresponding to the end is being executed, it is possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined attention event has been executed triggered by the end of the predetermined game state. becomes.

Feature F8. A situation in which the predetermined cautionary event ends before execution of the end-corresponding display ends, and a situation in which the predetermined cautionary event ends after execution of the end-corresponding display ends may occur. The gaming machine according to feature F6 or F7.

According to the feature F8, a situation where the predetermined caution event ends before the execution of the end-corresponding display ends, and a situation where the predetermined caution event ends after the execution of the end-corresponding display ends. It is possible to diversify the timing at which the predetermined warning event ends in relation to the end timing of the display corresponding to the end.

Feature F9. The end response control means displays the end response display based on occurrence of a specific trigger (game medium bet setting) necessary for newly starting a game round in a situation where the end response display is being executed. Means for terminating (in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2903 of the production side MPU 92, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4108 of the production side MPU 92, in the ninth embodiment, the production side A gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F8, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of steps S4309 and S4310 of the MPU 92 .

According to the feature F9, the display corresponding to the end is terminated based on the occurrence of the specific trigger necessary for newly starting the game round in the situation where the display corresponding to the end is being executed. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for an excessively long time.

For the configuration of features F1 to F9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Triggered by the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 based on the execution of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the role triggered by the operation of the player (the operation of the start lever 41) a predetermined game progress means (a function of executing a reel control process of the main side MPU 72) for progressing the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R);
A progress restriction situation (freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction opportunity (the end of the final game in the AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) Limit generating means (function for executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212 and S3213 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
Attention event control means (in the sixth embodiment, an effect a function of executing a control process for warning display in the AT state ST5 in the side MPU 92;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G1, it is possible to call the player for a predetermined attention by executing the predetermined target event. In this case, since the predetermined attention event is executed in the progress restriction situation where the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the predetermined attention event.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined warning event is an event capable of calling the player's attention to the player's addiction to the game.

According to the feature G2, the execution of the predetermined warning event makes it possible to call the player's attention to the addiction to the game. By providing the configuration of the feature G1, it is possible to draw the player's attention to an event that calls the player's attention to the player's addiction to the game.

Feature G3. The game machine according to feature G1 or G2, wherein the attention event control means starts execution of the predetermined attention event after the progress restriction situation is started.

According to the feature G3, since the execution of the predetermined caution event is started after the progress restriction situation is started, it is possible to start the execution of the predetermined caution event under the condition that the progress of the predetermined game is restricted.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the attention event control means terminates execution of the predetermined attention event before the progress restriction situation ends.

According to the feature G4, since the execution of the predetermined caution event ends before the progress restriction situation ends, it is possible to prevent the predetermined game from progressing during the predetermined caution event.

Feature G5. The attention event control means is means for terminating execution of the predetermined attention event based on the elapse of a predetermined duration from the start of execution of the predetermined attention event (effect in the sixth embodiment). function of executing the process of step S3009 of the side MPU 92).

According to feature G5, since the predetermined attention event is terminated based on the elapse of the predetermined predetermined duration from the start of its execution, the period during which the player confirms the predetermined attention event is set to the predetermined duration. It is possible to reliably secure the event over a period of time, and to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the predetermined caution event.

Feature G6. The restriction generation means generates the progress restriction situation when a predetermined game state (AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) ends,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the attention event control means executes the predetermined attention event in the progress restriction situation when the predetermined game state ends. .

According to the feature G6, when the predetermined game state ends, a progress restriction situation occurs and a predetermined attention event is executed in the progress restriction situation. As a result, it is possible to call the player for a predetermined attention when the predetermined game state ends.

Feature G7. When the predetermined game state ends, an end response control means (an effect in the sixth embodiment) for performing an end response display (AT end display in the sixth embodiment) corresponding to the end of the predetermined game state a function of executing the processing of steps S2804 and S2903 of the side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the end correspondence display can be continued even after the progress restriction situation ends.

According to the feature G7, when the predetermined game state ends, the display corresponding to the end is performed, so that the player can clearly recognize that the predetermined game state will end. In this case, since the end correspondence display can be continued even after the progress restriction situation ends, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the predetermined game state has ended.

Feature G8. The attention event control means is a means for starting the predetermined attention event in a situation where the end correspondence display is being executed (steps S2805 and steps S3002 to S3004 of the production side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment A gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing.

According to the characteristic G8, since the predetermined caution event is started in the situation where the display corresponding to the end is being executed, it is possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined caution event has been executed triggered by the end of the predetermined game state. becomes.

Feature G9. The termination response control means detects that a specific trigger (game medium bet setting) necessary for restarting the game cycle after the progress restriction situation ends in a situation where the termination response display is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature G7 or G8, further comprising means for terminating the end-corresponding display based on (a function of executing the process of step S2903 of the effect-side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment).

According to the feature G9, the display corresponding to the end is terminated based on the occurrence of the specific trigger necessary for newly starting the game round in the situation where the display corresponding to the end is being executed. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for an excessively long time.

For the configuration of features G1 to G9, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. When a predetermined game state (AT state ST5 in the sixth and seventh embodiments) ends, a predetermined warning event (a caution display by displaying a caution image G52) is executed to call the player for a predetermined caution. First attention event control means (function for executing the process of step S3310 of the effect side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment and the attention display control process),
Second attention event control means for executing the predetermined attention event when the predetermined game state continues (in the sixth embodiment, the function and attention A function of executing display control processing, a function of executing step S3504 and attention display control processing in the production side MPU 92 in the seventh embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H1, it is possible to prompt the player to give a predetermined attention when the predetermined game state ends by executing the predetermined caution event when the predetermined game state ends. Further, even when the predetermined game state continues, the execution of the predetermined caution event makes it possible to increase the frequency of execution of the predetermined caution event.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the predetermined warning event is an event capable of calling the player's attention to the player's addiction to the game.

According to the feature H2, the execution of the predetermined warning event makes it possible to call the player's attention to the addiction to the game. By having the configuration of the feature H1, it is possible to diversify the situations in which an event that calls the player's attention to the addiction to the game occurs.

Feature H3. Even if the predetermined game state continues, the predetermined game state is actually continued after the performance is executed to allow the player to recognize that the predetermined game state may end. Means for generating a resurrection corresponding effect (resurrection corresponding effect in the sixth and seventh embodiments) in which an effect that allows the player to recognize is executed (steps S3401 to S3407 in the effect side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) In the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3501 to S3507 in the production side MPU 92) is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the second caution event control means executes the predetermined caution event in a situation in which the resurrection corresponding effect occurs.

According to the feature H3, by executing the resurrection corresponding effect, it is possible to give the unexpectedness that the predetermined game state actually continues after making the player think that the predetermined game state ends. In this case, there is a possibility that the predetermined game state ends in the resurrection corresponding performance by executing the predetermined attention event in the same manner as when the predetermined game state actually ends in the situation where the resurrection corresponding performance occurs. It is easy for the player to think that the predetermined game state will end in the situation where the performance that allows the player to recognize is being executed.

Feature H4. The first attention event control means includes first termination means (a presentation in the sixth embodiment) for terminating execution of the predetermined attention event based on occurrence of a first end trigger (elapse of a predetermined display duration period). a function to execute the processing of steps S3005 to S3009 of the side MPU 92),
The second attention event control means is a second termination means (second The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S3408 of the effect-side MPU 92 in the embodiment of No. 6).

According to the feature H4, the end condition of the predetermined caution event executed when the predetermined game state ends and the predetermined caution event executed when the predetermined game state continues are different, thereby ending the predetermined caution event. Conditions can be adapted to each situation.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the second cautionary event control means terminates execution of the predetermined cautionary event based on occurrence of the first end trigger.

According to the feature H5, the predetermined attention event executed when the predetermined game state continues ends not only when the second end opportunity occurs but also when the first end opportunity occurs. As a result, the predetermined caution event executed when the predetermined game state continues can be terminated at the same timing as the predetermined caution event executed when the predetermined game state ends, but at a different timing. It is possible to terminate even if there is.

Feature H6. Characteristic feature H4 or H5, characterized in that the first termination opportunity is that a predetermined duration (predetermined display duration) elapses after execution of the predetermined caution event is started. game machine.

According to the feature H6, the predetermined attention event executed when the predetermined game state ends is terminated based on the elapse of the predetermined predetermined duration from the start of the execution, so the predetermined attention event It is possible to reliably secure a period for the player to confirm the above over a predetermined duration, and to reduce the processing load for specifying the trigger for ending the predetermined attention event.

Feature H7. The game according to any one of features H4 to H6, wherein the second end opportunity is the occurrence of a specific opportunity (a bet setting of a game medium) necessary for restarting a game round. machine.

According to the feature H7, the predetermined attention event executed when the predetermined game state continues is terminated based on the occurrence of the specific trigger necessary for newly starting the game round, so the predetermined attention event is not continued in a situation where a new game cycle is started.

Feature H8. Triggered by the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 based on the execution of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the role triggered by the operation of the player (the operation of the start lever 41) a predetermined game progress means (a function of executing a reel control process of the main side MPU 72) for progressing the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R);
A progress restriction situation (freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the occurrence of a restriction opportunity (the end of the final game in the AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) Limit generating means (function for executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212 and S3213 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
with
The first cautionary event control means causes the predetermined cautionary event to be executed in the restricted progress situation,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the second caution event control means executes the predetermined caution event in a situation other than the progress restriction situation.

According to the feature H8, the predetermined attention event executed when the predetermined game state ends is executed in a progress restricted situation in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted. can be prevented from starting or progressing. On the other hand, since the predetermined attention event that is executed when the predetermined game state continues is executed in a situation that is not a progress restriction situation, the predetermined game can be started or progressed even during the execution of the predetermined attention event. It becomes possible.

For the configuration of features H1 to H8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature group F, the feature group G, and the feature group H can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that games are played appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S705 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (step S604 of the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST4, AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition possible state function of executing the processing of, function of executing the processing of steps S2706 and S2707 of the main side MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
Advantageous notification control means (the function of executing the process of step S714 in the main MPU 72) for controlling the advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) so as to be in the notification state (lighting state) in the advantageous transition possible state;
When the advantageous transition possible situation ends, a specific opportunity in the game (in the sixth embodiment, stop rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST4, freeze period in the case of the AT state ST5 a notification termination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2710, S3119 and S3215 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) that terminates the notification state in the advantageous notification means based on the occurrence of an end); ,
with
As a trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation, the first situation ending trigger (when the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST4 in the sixth embodiment) and the second situation ending trigger (the sixth ) exists at least when the second interval SC2 ends with the end of the AT state ST5 in the embodiment of
When the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation ending trigger, and when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger, the specific trigger are different.

According to the feature I1, the game state can shift to an advantageous game state when the advantageous transition is possible, so the player expects that the advantageous transition is possible. In addition, since the advantageous notification means that is in the notification state in the advantageous transition possible situation is provided, it is possible to grasp whether or not the advantageous transition possible situation exists by checking the advantageous notification means. In this case, in a configuration in which there are at least a first situation termination trigger and a second situation termination trigger as triggers for ending the advantageous transition possible situation, the advantageous transition possible situation occurs based on the occurrence of the first situation termination trigger. Among the various triggers occurring in the game, the specific trigger for ending the notification state of the advantageous notification means is different between when the game ends and when the advantageous shift possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger. As a result, the timing for ending the notification state in the advantageous notification means can be set to an appropriate timing corresponding to the type of trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible state.

Feature I2. As the advantageous gaming states, there are at least a first advantageous gaming state (pseudo-bonus state ST4) and a second advantageous gaming state (AT state ST5) having relatively different degrees of advantage,
The first situation termination opportunity is an opportunity for termination of the advantageous transition possible situation in response to termination of the first advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the second situation ending trigger is a trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation in response to the ending of the second advantageous gaming state.

According to feature I2, the case where the advantageous shift possible situation ends in response to the end of the first advantageous gaming state, and the case where the advantageous shift possible situation ends in response to the end of the second advantageous gaming state. , the specific timing for ending the notification state of the advantageous notification means among the various timings that occur in the game is different. As a result, the timing of ending the notification state in the advantageous notification means can be set to an appropriate timing corresponding to the type of advantageous gaming state that triggers the termination of the advantageous transition possible state.

Feature I3. Equipped with pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns in each game,
The specific trigger when the favorable transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation ending trigger, and the said favorable transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein all of the specific opportunities occur at a timing after the timing at which the variable display of the pattern ends.

According to feature I3, there is a specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the occurrence of the first situation ending trigger, and a case where the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger All of the specific triggers occur at a timing after the timing when the variable display of the pattern ends. As a result, even if the timing for ending the notification state in the advantageous notification means is made to correspond to the type of trigger for ending the advantageous shift possible state, the notification by the advantageous notification means is made while the variable display of the pattern is being performed. It is possible to prevent the state from ending.

Feature I4. The second specific trigger (the end of the freeze period in the sixth embodiment), which is the specific trigger when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger, is the end of the first situation. 1 game than the first specific opportunity (stopping rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the sixth embodiment), which is the specific opportunity when the advantageous shift possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the opportunity The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the trigger occurs at a later timing within the range.

According to the feature I4, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger, one game is longer than the case where the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation ending trigger. The notification state in the advantageous notification means is ended based on the occurrence of the specific trigger that occurs at the later timing within the range of . As a result, it is possible to vary the period during which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends in the game in which the notification state ends, depending on the type of trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible state.

Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I4, wherein the second specific trigger is a trigger that occurs when a specific period (freeze period) elapses after the first specific trigger occurs.

According to the feature I5, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the occurrence of the second situation ending trigger, the advantageous notification is given more than the case where the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the first situation ending trigger. It is possible to reliably secure a long period of time during which the notification state of the means ends in the game.

Feature I6. Triggered by the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 based on the execution of the lottery process (FIG. 13) for the role triggered by the operation of the player (the operation of the start lever 41) a predetermined game progress means (a function of executing a reel control process of the main side MPU 72) for progressing the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R);
Restriction generation means (main a function of executing the processing of steps S3116, S3117, S3212 and S3213 of the side MPU 72;
with
The gaming machine according to feature I4 or I5, wherein the second specific opportunity is cancellation of the progress restriction situation.

According to feature I6, in a configuration in which a progress-restricted situation can occur based on the occurrence of a first specific opportunity in one game, when the advantageous shift possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the second situation end opportunity. , the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends when the progress restriction situation is cancelled. Thus, in a configuration in which the period during which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends in the game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends is varied according to the type of trigger for ending the advantageous transition possible situation, the notification state of the advantageous notification means is changed. It is possible to prevent a new game from starting before the end of the game.

Feature I7. As the advantageous game states, there are at least a first advantageous game state (pseudo bonus state ST4) and a second advantageous game state (AT state ST5) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game state,
The first situation termination opportunity is an opportunity for termination of the advantageous transition possible situation in response to termination of the first advantageous gaming state,
The game according to any one of features I4 to I6, wherein the second situation ending opportunity is a trigger for ending the advantageous shiftable situation in response to the ending of the second advantageous gaming state. machine.

According to the feature I7, the first advantageous gaming state ends when the advantageous shift possible situation ends in response to the ending of the second advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state. In the game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends, the timing at which the notification state ends is later than the timing at which the advantageous transition possible state ends in response to the action. As a result, it is possible to secure a long period in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means is continued when the advantageous shift possible state ends in response to the termination of the relatively advantageous advantageous gaming state.

For the configuration of features I1 to I7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the characteristic group I can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately perform notification according to the game situation, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S705 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (step of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (AT state ST5 in the sixth embodiment) that is advantageous to the player when the advantageous transition is possible a function to execute the processing of S2706 and step S2707;
Advantageous notification control means (the function of executing the process of step S714 in the main MPU 72) for controlling the advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) so as to be in the notification state (lighting state) in the advantageous transition possible state;
The notification state of the advantageous notification means is terminated based on occurrence of a specific trigger (end of the freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in the game when the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible state are terminated. Notification termination means (function for executing the processing of steps S3119 and S3215 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
Even if the advantageous gaming state continues, after the first effect (AT end display) that allows the player to recognize the possibility that the advantageous gaming state will end, is actually executed. A resurrection corresponding control means for generating a resurrection corresponding performance (resurrection corresponding performance in the sixth and seventh embodiments) in which a second performance (resurrection display) for allowing the player to recognize the continuation of the advantageous game state is executed. (In the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3401 to S3407 in the production side MPU 92, in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3501 to S3507 in the production side MPU 92),
with
The timing at which the second effect is started in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed is the timing before the timing at which the specific opportunity occurs in the game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends. game machine.

According to the feature J1, the game state can shift to an advantageous game state when the advantageous transition is possible, so the player expects that the advantageous transition is possible. In addition, since the advantageous notification means that is in the notification state in the advantageous transition possible situation is provided, it is possible to grasp whether or not the advantageous transition possible situation exists by checking the advantageous notification means. In addition, by executing the resurrection corresponding presentation, it is possible to give the unexpectedness that the predetermined game state is actually continued after the player is made to think that the predetermined game state is finished.

In this case, the timing at which the second effect is started in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed is the timing before the timing at which the specific opportunity occurs in the game in which the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends. As a result, even if the advantageous notification means is confirmed in the situation where the first effect is being executed, the first effect is not actually the effect being executed at the end of the advantageous game state, or is related to the resurrection corresponding effect. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether it is an effect or not. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the second effect will occur after the first effect is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature J2. Equipped with pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns in each game,
The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific trigger is a trigger that occurs when a specific period (freeze period) elapses from a predetermined timing at which the variable display of the pattern ends.

According to feature J2, when the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible state are terminated, the notification state of the advantageous notification means is terminated when a specific period elapses from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern in the game ends, In the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, the second effect is started at a timing before the timing at which a specific period elapses from a predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern ends. As a result, even if the advantageous notification means is confirmed in the situation where the first effect is being executed, the first effect is not actually the effect being executed at the end of the advantageous game state, or is related to the resurrection corresponding effect. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether it is an effect or not.

Feature J3. Based on the player's operation, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop button 42- 44 (stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R triggered by the operation of 44) progresses a predetermined game progress means (function for executing reel control processing of the main side MPU 72);
Progress restriction state (freeze period in the sixth embodiment) in which the start or progress of the predetermined game is restricted based on the predetermined timing in the game when the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible state are terminated ) (the function of executing the processes of steps S3116, S3117, S3212 and S3213 of the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) for generating
with
The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the progress restriction situation ends when the specific period of time has passed.

According to the feature J3, in the game when the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible state are terminated, the progress restricted state is reached and the progress restricted state ends until a specific period elapses from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern ends. In this case, the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends, so that in the game, the notification state of the advantageous notification means does not end until a specific period elapses from the predetermined timing when the fluctuation display of the pattern is certainly finished. On the other hand, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, the second effect is started at a timing before the timing when the specific period elapses from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern ends. As a result, even if the advantageous notification means is confirmed in the situation where the first effect is being executed, the first effect is not actually the effect being executed at the end of the advantageous game state, or is related to the resurrection corresponding effect. It is possible to make it impossible for the player to distinguish whether it is an effect or not.

Feature J4. In the game in which the resurrection support effect is executed, the resurrection support control means causes a switching support period (pre-resurrection period) set as a period shorter than the specific period to elapse from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern ends. Means for starting the second effect based on the fact that the process of step S3406 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S3405 based on the elapse of the pre-revival period of the effect-side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment. function).

According to the feature J4, in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed, the second effect is performed based on the elapse of the switching corresponding period set as a period shorter than the specific period from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern ends. Since it is started, it is possible to ensure that the second effect is started at a timing before the timing when the notification state of the advantageous notification means ends in the game when the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible state are terminated. It becomes possible.

Feature J5. The resurrection control means is necessary for starting a new game round even if the switching response period has not passed from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern ends in the game in which the resurrection response effect is executed. A means for starting the second effect based on the occurrence of a specific opportunity (game medium bet setting) (in step S3405 based on the occurrence of a bet on the next game of the effect side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) A gaming machine according to feature J4, characterized by comprising a function of making an affirmative determination and executing the processing of step S3406.

According to feature J5, in a game in which a resurrection corresponding effect is executed, even if the switching corresponding period has not elapsed from the predetermined timing when the variable display of the pattern ends, a specific opportunity necessary for starting a new game round is generated. Since the second effect is started based on what has been done, it is possible to diversify the trigger for starting the second effect.

Feature J6. Means for executing the first effect before the specific opportunity occurs in the game when the advantageous game state and the advantageous transition possible state end (step S3309 of the effect side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of (1).

According to feature J6, since the first effect is executed before the specific opportunity occurs in the game when the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation are terminated, the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous transition possible situation are terminated. It is possible to make the player recognize it. In this case, the first effect is executed before the second effect is executed in the game in which the resurrection corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible for the player to expect the advantageous game state to continue while the first effect is being executed.

For the configuration of features J1 to J6, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the characteristic J group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Advantageous transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S2706 and S2707 of the main MPU 72) for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state (AT state ST5 in the eighth embodiment) advantageous to the player;
The first target number (remaining given number counted by the AT continuation counter 74e), which is a number that can change as the game is executed in the advantageous gaming state, becomes the end target number ("0"). Based on, pre-end setting means (in the eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3909 of the main side MPU 72, which is set to the pre-end state of the advantageous gaming state (end waiting period in the eighth embodiment) 9, the function of executing the process of step S4209 of the main MPU 72);
Based on the fact that the second number of targets (the number of remaining games counted by the end waiting counter), which is a number that can fluctuate as the game is executed in the pre-end state, becomes the number of end targets ("0"). , the advantageous end means for terminating the advantageous gaming state (in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3912 and S3913 of the main MPU 72; in the ninth embodiment, steps S4212 and S4213 of the main MPU 72 function to execute the processing of
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic K1, when the first target number becomes the end target number in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is not ended, but the state before the end of the advantageous game state is entered, and in the state before the end, the When the number of 2 targets becomes the number of termination targets, the advantageous game state ends. As a result, the object to be noticed in order to specify the end opportunity in the advantageous game state is changed in the middle, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.

Feature K2. The first target number is the number of remaining game values that can be granted or increased in the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the second target number is the number of remaining games that can be executed in the pre-end state.

According to the feature K2, the player pays attention to whether or not the number of remaining game values is the end target number before the pre-end state in the advantageous game state, and the pre-end state is reached in the advantageous game state. In this case, the player pays attention to whether or not the number of remaining games is the number to be finished. In general, it is easier for the player to understand whether the number of remaining games is the number of games to be finished rather than whether the number of remaining game values is the number to be finished. By structuring that the pre-end state ends when the number of games reaches the end target number, the advantageous game state ends in a configuration in which the target to be noticed is changed in the middle in order to specify the end opportunity in the advantageous game state. This makes it easier for the player to identify the opportunity.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the pre-end state ends after one game.

According to the feature K3, the pre-end state ends in one game, so it is possible to prevent the pre-end state from continuing excessively.

Feature K4. When the pre-end state is started, an end corresponding display (AT end display in the eighth embodiment, explicit end display in the ninth embodiment) corresponding to the end of the advantageous gaming state is started. End correspondence control means (the function of executing the processing of step S4102 of the production side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4302 of the production side MPU 92 in the ninth embodiment) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K3.

According to feature K4, since the end-corresponding display is started when the pre-end state is started, the end-corresponding display is more convenient for the player than the configuration in which the end-corresponding display is started when the pre-end state ends. It is possible to increase the chances of checking.

Feature K5. The end correspondence display includes a result correspondence display (total game number image G62, total winning number image G63) corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the result of the game executed in the pre-end state is not reflected in the contents of the result correspondence display.

According to feature K5, since the display corresponding to the end includes the display corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state, the player who confirms the display corresponding to the end can only know that the advantageous gaming state ends. Instead, it is possible to grasp the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state. In this case, the result of the game executed in the pre-end state is not reflected in the contents of the result correspondence display in the end correspondence display. As a result, in a configuration in which a long display period is secured for the display corresponding to the end including the display corresponding to the result, it is possible to prevent the content of the display corresponding to the result being started from being changed in the middle.

Feature K6. The end correspondence display does not include the result correspondence display (total game number image G62, total winning number image G63) corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state,
When the game in the pre-end state is executed, the gaming machine provides a result corresponding display ( (total number of games image G62, total number of wins image G63) is performed (function for executing the processing of step S4304 of the effect side MPU 92 in the ninth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature K4.

According to the feature K6, the display corresponding to the result of each game executed in the advantageous gaming state is not included in the display corresponding to the end, and if the game in the pre-end state is executed, A result correspondence display corresponding to the result of each game executed in the current advantageous game state, including the executed game, is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform the result correspondence display corresponding to the overall result of the advantageous game state in the configuration in which the display period for the display corresponding to the end is secured long.

Feature K7. Equipped with pattern display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns in each game,
The gaming machine according to characteristic K6, wherein the result correspondence control means starts the result correspondence display when the variation display of the pattern ends in the game in the pre-end state.

According to the feature K7, when the variation display of the symbols ends in the game in the pre-end state, the display corresponding to the result is started. becomes.

Feature K8. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S705 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Situation terminating means for terminating the advantageous transition possible situation based on occurrence of a situation termination opportunity (ending condition satisfied) in the advantageous transition possible situation (function of executing the processing of steps S3214 and S3215 in the main MPU 72) When,
with
The advantageous transition means shifts the game state to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition possible state exists,
When the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, the pre-end state is the state even if the first target number is not the end target number in the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein the advantageous gaming state ends without occurrence.

According to the feature K8, the game state can shift to an advantageous game state when the advantageous transition is possible, so the player expects that the advantageous transition is possible. Moreover, since the advantageous shift possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end trigger, it is possible to prevent the advantageous shift possible situation from continuing excessively. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the occurrence of the situation end opportunity, the pre-end state occurs even in a situation where the first target number is not the end target number in the advantageous gaming state. The advantageous game state ends without As a result, it is possible to prevent the advantageous game state from continuing in spite of the end of the advantageous shift possible state in the configuration in which the state before the end is reached when the advantageous game state ends. .

For the configuration of features K1 to K8, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the above characteristic group K can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to increase the attention of the players to the advantageous game states that are advantageous to the players, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Based on the occurrence of an update opportunity (won any of the index values IV = 1 to 13 in the role lottery process (Fig. 13)) in a predetermined game state (AT state ST5 in the eighth embodiment) , information updating means (main in the eighth embodiment) for updating the termination trigger information (numerical information of the AT continuation counter 74e) in the termination trigger storage means (AT continuation counter 74e) so as to approach the termination target information ("0"). a function of executing the processing of step S3906 of the side MPU 72);
After the end trigger information becomes the end target information, means for terminating the predetermined game state (the function of executing the processing of steps S3912 to S3914 of the main side MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment);
When a predetermined update opportunity (winning one of the index values IV = 1 to 9 in the role lottery process (Fig. 13)) occurs, the player performs a grant corresponding operation (first bell win or second win). When the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in the stop order enabling establishment of two bell prizes is performed, a predetermined privilege (providing the game medium of "15") is given to the player, and the predetermined renewal opportunity is provided. is generated and the player does not perform the granting operation, the predetermined privilege providing means (step S3710 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment) prevents the predetermined privilege from being provided to the player. function to execute the processing of
with
The information updating means updates the end trigger information regardless of whether the predetermined update trigger occurs, when the player performs the grant corresponding operation, or when the grant corresponding operation is not performed. is updated closer to the end target information by common numerical information (“12” which is the result of subtracting “3”, which is the number of bets, from “15”).

According to the feature L1, the end trigger information in the end trigger storage means is updated to the end target information based on the occurrence of the update trigger in the predetermined game state, and the end trigger information becomes the end target information. Based on this, the predetermined game state ends. In this case, when a predetermined renewal opportunity occurs and the player performs a granting operation, the predetermined privilege is granted to the player, and when the predetermined renewal opportunity occurs, the player In a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is not given to a player when a grant corresponding operation is not performed by the player, when a predetermined update trigger occurs, the player performs a grant corresponding operation and the grant corresponding operation is performed. In either case, the end trigger information is updated closer to the end target information by the common numerical information. As a result, when the predetermined update opportunity occurs, regardless of whether or not the predetermined privilege is granted, the end trigger information is updated to the side closer to the end target information by the common numerical information, so that the player's It is possible to prevent the end time of the predetermined game state from being delayed depending on the operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to make the game preferably performed.

Feature L2. Predetermined display control means (the effect side in the eighth embodiment) that controls the display of the predetermined display means (image display device 63) so that the display corresponding to the end trigger (remaining number display image G12) corresponding to the end trigger information is performed MPU 92),
The predetermined display control means is
When the predetermined update opportunity occurs and the player performs the granting operation, the value displayed in the end opportunity correspondence display is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information. A first update control means (a function of executing the processing of step S3802 of the effect-side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) that causes the display to be performed in the first update display mode (sequential update shown in FIG. 66(A)); ,
When the predetermined update opportunity occurs and the player does not perform the operation corresponding to the grant, the value displayed in the display corresponding to the termination opportunity corresponds to the value corresponding to the common numerical information. The second update control means (step S3607 of the production-side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) for performing the update display in the second update display mode (visibility lowering effect G66 shown in FIG. 66B and batch update) and a function to execute the processing of step S3804);
The gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature L2, the end trigger information in the end trigger storage means is updated to the end target information based on the occurrence of the update trigger in the predetermined game state, and the end trigger information becomes the end target information. In the configuration in which the predetermined game state is terminated based on the predetermined display means, a display corresponding to the termination timing corresponding to the termination timing information is performed by the predetermined display means. As a result, the player can predict the end time of the predetermined game state by checking the display corresponding to the end trigger.

In this case, when a predetermined update opportunity occurs and the player performs a grant corresponding operation, the value displayed in the end opportunity correspondence display is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information. When the display is performed in the first update display mode, and when a predetermined update opportunity occurs and the player does not perform a grant corresponding operation, the value displayed in the end opportunity correspondence display is displayed in common. The update display for the value corresponding to the numerical information is performed in the second update display mode. As a result, when a predetermined update opportunity occurs, regardless of whether or not a predetermined benefit is granted, the termination trigger information is updated to the side closer to the end target information by the common numerical information. irrespective of whether or not the predetermined privilege has been granted, the value displayed in the display corresponding to the termination opportunity is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information, and the display mode of the update display is changed so that the predetermined privilege It is possible to make an appropriate display mode corresponding to whether or not it has been given.

Feature L3. The second update display mode is characterized in that the update display for the value corresponding to the common numerical information is a display mode that is more difficult for the player to recognize than the first update display mode. game machine.

According to the feature L3, the display mode of the update display in the case where the value displayed in the display corresponding to the end trigger is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information in the second update display mode is higher than that in the first update display mode. Since the display mode is difficult for the player to recognize, the termination trigger information is updated to the side closer to the termination target information by the amount of the common numerical information even though the predetermined update trigger has occurred but the predetermined benefit is not given. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that.

Feature L4. The second update display mode is a display mode in which a period required to complete the update display for the value corresponding to the common numerical information is shorter than that in the first update display mode. The gaming machine according to feature L2 or L3.

According to feature L4, in the second update display mode, the update period is shorter than that in the first update display mode when updating the value displayed in the display corresponding to the termination opportunity by the value corresponding to the common numerical information. Because of this display mode, the end trigger information is updated to the side closer to the end target information by the common numerical value information even though the predetermined update opportunity has occurred but the predetermined benefit is not given. It is possible to reduce the possibility that

Feature L5. The second update control means is
Visibility lowering means (the step of the production-side MPU 92 in the eighth embodiment) that sets the visibility of the content displayed on the predetermined display means to a lower visibility state (visibility lowering effect G66) function to execute the processing of S3607);
Update execution means for updating and displaying a value corresponding to the common numerical information of the value displayed in the end trigger correspondence display in the visibility deterioration state (the effect side in the eighth embodiment A function of executing the processing of step S3804 of the MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature L5, when a predetermined privilege is not granted even though a predetermined update opportunity occurs, the visibility of the content displayed on the predetermined display means is lowered than before, and the visibility is lowered. In the low visibility state, the value displayed in the end trigger correspondence display is updated for the value corresponding to the common numerical information, so that the end trigger information has been updated to the end target information. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize.

Feature L6. Equipped with a plurality of pattern display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying patterns,
The addition corresponding operation is an operation to stop the variable display of the pattern in the plurality of pattern display areas in a predetermined order,
The visibility lowering means specifies that the order of stopping the variable display of the pattern is different from the predetermined order even in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is not stopped in all of the pattern display areas. When the visibility is reduced,
The update executing means updates and displays the value displayed in the display corresponding to the termination opportunity by the value corresponding to the common numerical information when the variable display of the pattern in all the pattern display areas is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature L5, characterized in that is performed.

According to feature L6, in the configuration in which a predetermined privilege is given when a predetermined update opportunity occurs and when the variable display of patterns is stopped in a predetermined order, the variable display of patterns in all the pattern display areas is performed. Even if the display is not stopped, if it is specified that the stop order of the variable display of the pattern is different from the predetermined order, the visibility is reduced. As a result, the player recognizes that the visibility has decreased due to the wrong stopping order. In this situation, when the variable display of the patterns in all the pattern display areas is stopped, the value displayed in the display corresponding to the end trigger is updated by the value corresponding to the common numerical information, It is possible to update the display corresponding to the end opportunity in a situation where the degree of attention of the player to the predetermined display means is low due to the low visibility state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the termination trigger information has been updated so as to approach the termination target information even though the predetermined benefit is not given.

Feature L7. The predetermined renewal opportunity is generated based on winning a predetermined combination (index value IV=1 to 9) in the combination lottery process,
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, wherein the awarding corresponding operation is an operation to stop the variable display of the pattern in a predetermined mode when the predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature L7, when the predetermined combination is won and the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern is performed in a predetermined manner, a predetermined privilege is granted, and when the predetermined combination is won and the predetermined manner is In a configuration in which a predetermined privilege is not provided when an operation to stop the variable display of the pattern is performed in a different mode, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects as described above.

For the configuration of features L1 to L7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention having the characteristic group L can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the games are played appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group M>
Feature M1. a predetermined revolving body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R);
a driving means (stepping motor 142) for rotating the predetermined rotating body;
drive control means for driving and controlling the drive means (function for executing reel control processing and stepping motor control processing of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment);
with
The drive control means is
Acceleration control means for executing acceleration control for accelerating the predetermined rotating body (executing steps S4503 to S4511, steps S4601 to S4607, and steps S4903 to S4914 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment function) and
Constant speed control means for executing constant speed control for rotating the predetermined rotating body at a constant speed after the completion of the acceleration control (executing the processing of steps S4518 and S4521 of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) function) and
Stop control means (main-side MPU 72 stop control in the tenth embodiment) for executing stop control for stopping the rotation of the predetermined rotating body when a predetermined stop opportunity (operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44) occurs function to execute processing for
with
The acceleration control means controls the acceleration of the predetermined orbiting body when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined operating state before the completion of stopping of the predetermined orbiting body, and when the supply of operating power is restarted. A game machine characterized by comprising post-supply starting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4903 to S4914 of the main side MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) for newly starting acceleration control.

According to feature M1, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined operating situation before the completion of the stoppage of the predetermined orbiting body, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is performed. is started anew. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is resumed, it is possible to start the new acceleration of the predetermined orbiting body without waiting until the rotation abnormality of the predetermined orbiting body is detected, and the supply of the operating power is stopped. After restarting, it is possible to shorten the period required from the completion of the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body to the start of the constant speed rotation. Therefore, it is possible to favorably play a game utilizing the rotation of the revolving body.

Feature M2. Means for newly starting the acceleration control of the predetermined rotating body when it is specified that the rotation of the predetermined rotating body is not performed normally (the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment). The gaming machine according to feature M1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of step S4528.

According to the feature M2, when it is specified that the rotation of the predetermined orbiting body is not performed normally, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is newly started. If an anomaly occurs, it can be counteracted by a new start of rotation. In this case, with the configuration of feature M1, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a predetermined operating situation before the completion of stopping of the predetermined rotating body, the supply of operating power is restarted. In this case, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is newly started. As a result, when the supply of the operating power is restarted, it is possible to start a new acceleration of the predetermined orbiting body without waiting until the rotation abnormality of the predetermined orbiting body is detected, and the supply of the operating power is resumed. It is possible to shorten the period required from the completion of the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body to the start of the constant-speed rotation.

Feature M3. The post-supply start means is adapted to restart the supply of the operating power even after the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is completed and the supply of the operating power is stopped in the predetermined operating situation. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, wherein the acceleration control of the predetermined revolving body is newly started at a time.

According to the feature M3, even if the supply of the operating power is stopped after the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is completed, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body is renewed when the supply of the operating power is restarted. Therefore, when the supply of operating power is restarted, the acceleration control of the predetermined orbiting body may be newly started without specifying whether the acceleration control is completed or not. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature M4. A winding body (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) different from the predetermined winding body is provided,
When the supply of operating power is stopped in the predetermined operating situation after the completion of the stop of the another rotating body and before the completion of the stopping of the predetermined rotating body, the acceleration control means any one of the characteristics M1 to M3, wherein the acceleration control for the predetermined winding body is newly started without executing the acceleration control for the other winding body when the supply of the The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature M4, when the supply of the operating power is stopped in a predetermined operation state before the completion of the stoppage of the predetermined orbiting body and in the state of the completion of the stoppage of the other orbiting body, the operating power is restarted, the acceleration control is newly started for the predetermined winding body without executing the acceleration control for another winding body. As a result, it is possible to prevent the revolving body, which has already stopped, from rotating again, while allowing only the revolving body that has been in a predetermined operation state to quickly rotate at a constant speed.

Feature M5. Predetermined motion storage means (the rotating flag and each stop completion flag of the main side RAM 74 in the tenth embodiment) for storing the predetermined motion information (information of "1") when the predetermined rotating body is in the predetermined motion state 164a-164c) and
a means (power supply device 54) for supplying power during a power outage that enables the predetermined operation information to be stored and held in the predetermined operation storage means in a situation where the supply of operating power is stopped;
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature M5, when the predetermined rotating body is in the predetermined operating state, the predetermined operation storage means for storing the predetermined operation information is supplied with the power during the power failure, so that the supply of the operating power is started. In this case, it is possible to specify whether or not to newly start the acceleration control for the predetermined rotating body only by specifying whether or not the predetermined motion information is stored in the predetermined motion storage means.

For the configuration of features M1 to M5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R);
a driving means (stepping motor 142) for rotating the rotating body;
Drive control means for driving and controlling the drive means (function for executing reel control processing and acceleration control processing of the main side MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment);
with
The driving means is a stepping motor (stepping motor 142) that rotates the rotating body by being excited,
The drive control means controls a special excitation pattern (a part of the pseudo-stopping table 171) that excites a specific phase (excitation of B phase) after performing excitation of a predetermined phase (excitation of A phase) on the drive means. (excitation pattern of) is repeatedly generated (the function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 and steps S5114 to S5119 of the main MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment),
The special control means generates a non-excitation period in which the driving means is not excited after the predetermined phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and before the specific phase is excited. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature N1, a situation occurs in which a special excitation pattern in which a specific phase is excited after a predetermined phase is excited for the driving means is repeated. It becomes possible. In this case, a non-excitation period occurs after the excitation of the predetermined phase in the special excitation pattern and before the excitation of the specific phase. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using the rotation of the revolving body while suppressing the temperature rise of the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to favorably play a game utilizing the rotation of the revolving body.

Feature N2. The non-excitation period is equal to or less than the period during which the predetermined phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and is equal to or less than the period during which the specific phase is excited in the special excitation pattern. The game machine described.

According to feature N2, the non-excitation period is equal to or less than the period during which the predetermined phase is excited in the special excitation pattern and is equal to or less than the period during which the specific phase is excited in the special excitation pattern. It is possible to prevent the period during which the revolving body is stopped from becoming excessively long during the period during which the performance is being performed.

Feature N3. When the special excitation pattern is repeatedly generated, the special control means does not excite the drive means after the specific phase is excited and before the predetermined phase is excited. The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized by generating an excitation period.

According to feature N3, in a situation where the special excitation pattern is repeated, not only after the excitation of the specified phase and before the excitation of the specific phase, but also after the excitation of the specified phase and after the excitation of the specified phase A non-excitation period also occurs before performing As a result, it is possible to perform an effect using the rotation of the revolving body while suppressing the temperature rise of the driving means.

Feature N4. The non-excitation period that occurs after the excitation of the specified phase and before the excitation of the specific phase, and the period after the excitation of the specified phase and before the excitation of the specified phase. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the generated non-excitation period is the same or substantially the same.

According to the feature N4, in a situation where the special excitation pattern is repeated, not only does the non-excitation period occur after the excitation of the predetermined phase but before the excitation of the specific phase, but also after the excitation of the specific phase occurs. In the configuration in which the non-excitation period also occurs before the excitation of the predetermined phase, these non-excitation periods are the same or substantially the same. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a configuration for controlling the non-excitation period, so the configuration for the control can be simplified.

For the configuration of features N1 to N4, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the feature group M and the feature group N can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those illustrated above, it is necessary to appropriately play games using the rotation of the revolving body, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group O>
Features O1. Target specifying means (step of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment) for specifying the selection target to be the lottery target among a plurality of types of selection targets (various addresses set in the AT transition lottery table 172 in the twelfth embodiment) A function to execute the processing of S5307 to S5309);
Lottery set information (various lottery determination values set in the AT transition lottery table 172 in the twelfth embodiment) in which lottery numerical information (various lottery determination values set in the AT transition lottery table 172 in the twelfth embodiment) is set in association with the plurality of types of selection targets (in the twelfth embodiment Information storage means (main-side ROM 73 in the twelfth embodiment) for pre-storing the AT transition lottery table 172);
Information reading means (the process of step S5310 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment) that reads out the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection object specified by the object specifying means using the lottery gathering information functions to perform) and
Using the lottery numerical information read by the information reading means, a success/failure determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5311 and S5312 of the main MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment) for performing a success/failure determination;
with
In the lottery gathering information, the selection target ("k' address) is set.

According to the feature O1, the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection object specified as the lottery object is read using the lottery gathering information, and the winner is determined using the read lottery numerical information. executed. In this case, the group information for lottery is set with selection targets set with numerical value information for lottery that will surely be determined to be lost in the winning/losing determination. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which winning is not achieved in the winning/failing determination without preparing a determination process for determining whether to execute the winning/failing determination. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the lottery process.

Feature O2. In the lottery gathering information, the selection object (“k+1” to “k+5” in the AT transition lottery table 172 of the twelfth embodiment) in which the lottery numerical information that can be determined as winning in the win/loss determination is set ” address) are set. The gaming machine according to feature O1.

According to feature O2, in a configuration in which a plurality of selection targets set with lottery numerical information that can be determined to be a winning lottery is set in the lottery gathering information, it is determined that the lottery is certainly lost in the lottery determination. A selection object for which lottery numerical information to be determined is set is set in the lottery gathering information. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described by simply adding selection targets that are certain to be lost to the set information for lottery prepared for setting multiple selection targets that are likely to win. becomes.

Feature O3. The plurality of types of selection objects are set in a predetermined order in the lottery set information,
The target specifying means specifies an offset value with respect to the first order of the predetermined order in order to specify in which order the selection target is to be the lottery target in the lottery gathering information. The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2.

According to feature O3, by using the configuration for specifying the offset value with respect to the first order in the lottery set information, it is possible to create a situation in which the winner is surely lost in the winning/failing determination.

Feature O4. The target identifying means ensures that in a predetermined game situation (a situation in which "1" is set in the AT shift determination flag of the main side RAM 74), it is determined that it is definitely out of the above-mentioned win-or-fail determination. The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3, wherein the selection target for which lottery numerical information is set is specified as the lottery target.

According to the feature O4, in the predetermined game situation, the winner is surely lost in the win/fail judgment. Therefore, it is specified whether or not the game situation is the prescribed game situation, and if the game situation is the prescribed game situation, the win/fail judgment is not executed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the winning event in the winning/failure determination in a predetermined game situation without preparing the determination processing.

Feature O5. The target identifying means is set with the lottery numerical information that can be determined as winning in the winning determination in a specific game situation (the value of the AT transition confirmation flag of the main side RAM 74 is "0"). The selection target corresponding to the game content event (the result of the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination) is specified as the selection target, and in the predetermined game situation, which of the game content events is specified. The gaming machine according to feature O4, wherein the selection target for which the lottery numerical information is set and which is definitely determined to be lost in the win-or-fail determination is specified as the lottery target.

According to the feature O5, in a configuration in which the winning or not in the win/fail judgment is generated according to the game content event in the specific game situation, in the predetermined game situation, no matter what the game content event is, the win/fail judgment is made without fail. becomes. As a result, even if it is not necessary to prepare the determination processing of specifying whether or not the predetermined game situation exists and preventing execution of the win-or-fail determination in the case of the predetermined game situation, the winner is won by the win-or-fail judgment in the predetermined game situation. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such an event.

For the configuration of features O1 to O5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic P group>
Feature P1. A lottery information group (13th Information storage means (main side ROM 73) for storing in advance the first initial grant number lottery table 173 and the second initial grant number lottery table 174) in the embodiment of
Information reading means for reading the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that is the lottery target in the lottery information group (function for executing the process of step S5406 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) When,
Predetermined success/failure determination means (main MPU 72 a function of executing the processes of steps S5407 and S5408 of
By updating the selection target numerical information to be the selection target numerical information in the next order in the lottery information group when the predetermined right or wrong determination is out, the selection target numerical information is updated. Selective update means (function for executing the process of step S5409 of the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) for making the target for the predetermined right/wrong determination;
with
As the lottery information group, the information storage means stores a first lottery information group (first initial grant number lottery table 173 in the thirteenth embodiment) used in a predetermined game situation (normal AT) and a specific game situation. At least the second lottery information group (second initial grant number lottery table 174 in the thirteenth embodiment) used in (special AT) is stored,
The plurality of selection target numerical information is set in the first lottery information group,
A gaming machine, wherein a plurality of selection target numerical information, which are a part of the plurality of selection target numeric information and have serial numbers, are set in the second lottery information group.

According to the feature P1, in a predetermined game situation, the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group is sequentially drawn, and the selection target numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information set as the lottery target is the first lottery numerical information. 1. A lottery information group is read out and a predetermined win-or-fail judgment is performed. In addition, in the specific game situation, the selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is sequentially drawn, and the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information set as the lottery is the second lottery information. It is read out from the group and a predetermined suitability determination is performed.

In this case, the first lottery information group contains a plurality of selection target numerical information, while the second lottery information group contains only a portion of the plurality of selection target numerical information. A plurality of selection target numerical information that are consecutive numbers are set. As a result, even if the number of selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is less than the number of selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group, these selections are made. It becomes possible to share target numerical information. Therefore, the lottery process can be favorably performed.

Feature P2. The selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group has a maximum value equal to the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group. The gaming machine according to feature P1, wherein the value is a numerical value larger than the minimum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group and is serial number information.

According to feature P2, the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is the same as the maximum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group. This is numerical information whose minimum value is greater than the minimum value of the selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group and which is a serial number. As a result, even if the number of selection target numerical information set in the second lottery information group is less than the number of selection target numerical information set in the first lottery information group, these selections are made. It is possible to match the maximum value of the target numerical information, and it is possible to sequentially select the target numerical information having the common maximum value as the target of the predetermined right/wrong determination.

Feature P3. Means (main side A function to execute the processing of step S5402 of the MPU 72),
The information reading means is configured to read the lottery numerical information corresponding to the selection target numerical information of the value stored in the target storage means,
Characteristic P2 characterized in that the selection update means is configured to subtract 1 from the value stored in the target storage means when the predetermined win/loss judgment results in a failure in the situation of the predetermined gaming situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature P3, when the predetermined win/loss determination is started in either the predetermined game situation or the specific game situation, the common selection target numerical value is set in each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group. A maximum value of information is set in the target storage means. Then, the lottery numerical value information corresponding to the selection target numerical value information of the value stored in the object storage means is read from the first lottery information group or the second lottery information group, and the read lottery numerical value is read. A predetermined suitability determination is performed using the information. When the predetermined right/wrong judgment fails, the value stored in the object storage means is decremented by 1, and the selection target numerical information of the value after the subtraction of 1 becomes a new lottery target, and the predetermined right/wrong judgment is executed. be done. Since the maximum value of the selectable numerical information is common between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group in this way, when the first lottery information group is referred to and when the second lottery information group is referred to, It is possible to perform the predetermined suitability determination with a common processing configuration in any case where the information group is referred to.

Feature P4. When the predetermined success/failure determination is performed by reading the lottery numerical information from the second lottery information group, any of the selection target numerical information in the second lottery information group is determined to have won in the predetermined success/failure determination. The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3 characterized by being determined.

According to the feature P4, even if the second lottery information group is configured to have a plurality of selection target numerical information that are part of the plurality of selection target numerical information and are serially numbered, When the predetermined success/failure determination is performed by reading the lottery numerical information from the second lottery information group, any of the selection target numerical information in the second lottery information group is determined to have won the predetermined success/failure determination. In a situation in which the second lottery information group is referred to, it is possible to prevent selection target numerical information not set in the second lottery information group from being subject to the predetermined success/failure determination.

Feature P5. In the information storage means, a result correspondence information group (13th The initial grant number table 175) in the embodiment is stored in advance,
This gaming machine is a means for reading out and using the result correspondence information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that has been won in the predetermined success/failure judgment from the result correspondence information group (the step of the main side MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P4, characterized in that it has a function of executing the processing of S5411.

According to the feature P5, in the configuration in which the result correspondence information corresponding to the selection target numerical information that was the lottery target when the winning result is determined by the predetermined win-or-fail judgment, the result correspondence information is read out from the result correspondence information group and used. Since the lottery information group has a configuration in which a plurality of selection target numerical information that are part of the plurality of selection target numerical information and are serial numbers are set, the second lottery information group is used. Even in a situation where the predetermined success/failure determination is performed, it is possible to use the result correspondence information group used when the predetermined success/failure determination is performed using the first lottery information group as it is.

For the configuration of features P1 to P5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the feature group O and the feature group P can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to ensure that the lottery process is favorably performed, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1. Program storage means (main in the 14th to 16th embodiments) for pre-storing read instructions (CALLS instructions in the 14th and 15th embodiments, and CALLS and CALLV instructions in the 16th embodiment) for reading programs. side ROM 73),
program execution means for reading out the program targeted by the read command and executing the process by the program (function for executing various read commands of the main side MPU 72 in the 14th to 16th embodiments);
with
The read command includes a first read command (3-byte CALLS command in the 14th to 16th embodiments) and a second read command (2-byte CALLS command in the 14th and 15th embodiments) having different data amounts. 2-byte CALLS instruction or CALLV instruction in the sixteenth embodiment).

According to the feature Q1, the first read command and the second read command are set as the read commands for reading the program so that the data amounts are different. As a result, the program size can be reduced by using the read instruction with the smaller amount of data, and the read instruction with the larger amount of data can be used in situations where the read instruction with the smaller amount of data cannot be used. can be properly read out. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute the processing using the program.

Feature Q2. Both the first read command and the second read command are data capacities in units of bytes,
The gaming machine according to feature Q1, wherein the second read command has a data volume smaller than that of the first read command by a predetermined number of bytes.

According to feature Q2, in a configuration in which the first read command and the second read command have different data capacities, both of them have data capacities in units of bytes, so they can be handled as instructions in units of bytes.

Feature Q3. The second read instruction is an instruction (2-byte CALLS instruction) and
The first read instruction is an instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the fourteenth to sixteenth embodiments) for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature Q1 or Q2.

According to feature Q3, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at addresses within a predetermined range in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is stored at addresses outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This is an instruction to read the program that is stored. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read according to the types of read commands with different data capacities.

Feature Q4. The address included in the predetermined range is a predetermined number of bits continuing from the most significant bit including the most significant bit of the address, and the upper range bits (upper 4 bits) that are part of the address. The gaming machine according to feature Q3, wherein the addresses have the same numerical information.

According to feature Q4, the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is a predetermined number of bits continuous from the most significant bit including the most significant bit of the address, and part of the bits of the address. Addresses with the same numerical information in a certain high-order range of bits. As a result, it is possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits of the addresses of the programs to be read by the second read instruction identical.

Feature Q5. The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read command,
Information of specified bits (12 bits excluding the high-order 4 bits), which are bits excluding the high-order range bits of the predetermined address of the program to be read, is set in the second read command. The gaming machine according to feature Q4, characterized by:

According to the feature Q5, in a configuration in which the numerical information of the high-order range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read instruction uses the upper The information of the designated bit, which is the bits excluding the range bit, is set. As a result, compared to the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set, the address information set in the second read instruction is reduced, and the data capacity of the second read instruction is reduced. It becomes possible to make it less than the first read instruction.

Feature Q6. The program execution means is means for deriving a predetermined address of the program to be read by combining the numerical information of the upper range bits with the information of the specified bits set in the second read command. The game machine according to feature Q5, characterized by comprising the mask circuit 181 and the adder circuit 182 of the 16th embodiment.

According to feature Q6, the second read instruction is executed in a configuration in which the second read instruction is set with the information of the specified bits, which are the bits of the predetermined address to be read, excluding the upper range bits. In such a case, the specified address of the program to be read is derived by combining the numerical information of the upper range bits with the information of the specified bits set in the second read command. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the second read command is set with the specified bit information that is a part of the predetermined address instead of the entire predetermined address, the second read command can derive the entire predetermined address. Become.

Feature Q7. The second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command,
The program according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the program to be read by the second read command is a program whose execution frequency is higher than that of the program to be read by the first read command. The game machine described.

According to feature Q7, in a configuration in which the second read instruction has a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction, the program read by the second read instruction is larger than the program read by the first read instruction. Since the program is frequently executed, it is possible to reduce the data volume of the read instruction for reading the program with high execution frequency.

Feature Q8. The second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command,
The program according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the program to be read by the second read command has a smaller data capacity than the program to be read by the first read command. The game machine described.

According to feature Q8, in a configuration in which the second read instruction has a smaller data capacity than the first read instruction, the program read by the second read instruction is larger than the program read by the first read instruction. Since the program is a program with a small data capacity, it is possible to ensure a large number of programs that can be read by the second read instruction with a relatively small data capacity.

Feature Q9. Correspondence information group (first Index table 183 in the 16th embodiment) is provided in advance (storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the 16th embodiment),
The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read command,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q8, wherein the identification information is set in the second read command.

According to the feature Q9, a correspondence relationship information group in which a correspondence relationship between a predetermined address necessary for reading a program and identification information having a smaller data capacity than the predetermined address is set is stored in advance. The identification information is set in the read command instead of the predetermined address itself. This makes it possible to make the data volume of the second read command smaller than that of the first read command in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set.

Characteristics Q10. The program execution means includes means (the index grasping circuit 184 and the address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading the address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read command from the correspondence information group. The gaming machine according to feature Q9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q10, in a configuration in which identification information is set in the second read command, when the second read command is executed, the address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read command is It is read from the correspondence relation information group. Accordingly, in a configuration in which identification information having a smaller data capacity than the predetermined address is set in the second read command instead of the entire predetermined address, the second read command can derive the entire predetermined address. becomes possible.

Feature Q11. Correspondence information group in which a correspondence relationship between an address necessary for reading a program stored in the program storage means and identification information (index data) having a smaller data capacity than the address is set (sixteenth embodiment) (index table 183 in the 16th embodiment) (storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the 16th embodiment),
The second read instruction is an instruction (a 2-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading a program stored in a predetermined range ("8000h" to "8BFFh") of addresses in the program storage means. can be,
the first read instruction is an instruction (a 3-byte CALLS instruction in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means;
The second read command has a smaller data capacity than the first read command,
The read command includes a third read command (CALLV command in the sixteenth embodiment) in which the identification information is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q8, wherein the program corresponding to the identification information is stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means.

According to feature Q11, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is stored in an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This is an instruction to read the program that is stored. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read according to the types of read commands with different data capacities.

Further, a correspondence relation information group in which a correspondence relation between a predetermined address necessary for reading a program and identification information having a smaller data capacity than the predetermined address is set is stored in advance. The identification information is set instead of the predetermined address itself. This makes it possible to make the data volume of the third read command smaller than that of the first read command in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set.

Further, the program corresponding to the identification information set in the correspondence information group is stored in the predetermined range whose address is specified by the first read instruction, not the predetermined range whose address is specified by the second read instruction in the program storage means. is stored outside the As a result, of the first read command and the second read command, the addresses in the range not to be read by the second read command with a relatively small data capacity are read by the third read command with a data capacity smaller than that of the first read command. It is possible to read out.

Feature Q12. The program execution means includes means (the index grasping circuit 184 and the address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading the address corresponding to the identification information set in the third read command from the correspondence information group. The gaming machine according to feature Q11, characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q12, in a configuration in which identification information is set in the third read command, when the third read command is executed, the address corresponding to the identification information set in the second read command is It is read from the correspondence relation information group. Accordingly, in a configuration in which identification information having a smaller data capacity than the predetermined address is set in the third read command instead of the entire predetermined address, the third read command can derive the entire predetermined address. becomes possible.

Feature Q13. The address included in the predetermined range is a predetermined number of bits continuing from the most significant bit including the most significant bit of the address, and the upper range bits (upper 4 bits) that are part of the address. An address with the same numerical information,
The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read command,
Information of specified bits (12 bits excluding the high-order 4 bits) that are bits excluding the high-order range bits of the predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the second read command,
The game machine according to feature Q11 or Q12, wherein the third read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command.

According to feature Q13, the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is a predetermined number of bits continuous from the most significant bit including the most significant bit of the address, and part of the bits of the address. Addresses with the same numerical information in a certain high-order range of bits. As a result, it is possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits of the addresses of the programs to be read by the second read instruction identical.

In addition, in a configuration in which the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read instruction excludes the upper range bits from the predetermined address of the program to be read. The specified bit information is set. As a result, compared to the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set, the address information set in the second read instruction is reduced, and the data capacity of the second read instruction is reduced. It becomes possible to make it less than the first read instruction.

In addition, in the configuration where the second read command has a smaller data volume than the first read command as described above, the third read command has a smaller data volume than the second read command. This makes it possible to diversify the types of read commands from the viewpoint of data capacity.

For the configuration of features Q1 to Q13, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group R>
Feature R1. program storage means (main ROM 73 in the 14th to 16th embodiments) for pre-storing read instructions (CALLS instruction and CALLV instruction in the 14th to 16th embodiments) for reading programs;
program execution means for reading out the program targeted by the read command and executing the process by the program (function for executing various read commands of the main side MPU 72 in the 14th to 16th embodiments);
In a configuration with
Correspondence information group in which a correspondence relationship between an address necessary for reading a program stored in the program storage means and identification information (index data) having a smaller data capacity than the address is set (sixteenth embodiment) (index table 183 in the 16th embodiment) (storage area for storing the index table 183 of the main ROM 73 in the 16th embodiment),
The read command includes a specific read command (CALLV command in the sixteenth embodiment) in which the identification information is set instead of the entire predetermined address of the program to be read. game machine.

According to feature R1, a group of correspondence relation information in which a correspondence relation between a predetermined address necessary for reading a program and identification information having a data capacity smaller than that of the predetermined address is set is stored in advance. The identification information is set in the instruction instead of the entire predetermined address. This makes it possible to reduce the data volume of the specific read command compared to a configuration in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set. Therefore, it is possible to preferably execute the processing using the program.

Feature R2. The program execution means comprises means (the index grasping circuit 184 and the address reading circuit 185 in the sixteenth embodiment) for reading the address corresponding to the identification information set in the specific read command from the correspondence information group. The gaming machine according to feature R1, characterized in that

According to feature R2, in a configuration in which identification information is set in a specific read command, when a specific read command is executed, an address corresponding to the identification information set in the specific read command is used as correspondence relationship information. read out from the group. As a result, in a configuration in which identification information having a smaller data capacity than the predetermined address is set in the specific read command instead of the entire predetermined address, it is possible to derive the entire predetermined address by the specific read command. becomes.

Feature R3. The read command includes a first read command (3-byte CALLS command in the sixteenth embodiment) and a second read command (2-byte CALLS command in the sixteenth embodiment) having a smaller data capacity than the first read command. instructions),
the second read command is a command for reading a program stored in a predetermined range of addresses ("8000h" to "8BFFh") in the program storage means;
the first read command is a command for reading a program stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature R1 or R2, wherein the program corresponding to the identification information is stored at an address outside the predetermined range in the program storage means.

According to feature R3, the second read instruction is an instruction for reading a program stored at addresses within a predetermined range in the program storage means, and the first read instruction is stored at addresses outside the predetermined range in the program storage means. This is an instruction to read the program that is stored. This makes it possible to vary the range of addresses to be read according to the types of read commands with different data capacities.

Further, the program corresponding to the identification information set in the correspondence information group is stored in the predetermined range whose address is specified by the first read instruction, not the predetermined range whose address is specified by the second read instruction in the program storage means. stored outside the As a result, the addresses in the range not to be read by the second read command having a relatively small data capacity among the first read command and the second read command are read by the specific read command having a data capacity smaller than that of the first read command. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature R4. The address included in the predetermined range is a predetermined number of bits continuing from the most significant bit including the most significant bit of the address, and the upper range bits (upper 4 bits) that are part of the address. An address with the same numerical information,
The entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the first read command,
Information of specified bits (12 bits excluding the high-order 4 bits) that are bits excluding the high-order range bits of the predetermined address of the program to be read is set in the second read command,
The gaming machine according to feature R3, wherein the specific read command has a smaller data capacity than the second read command.

According to feature R4, the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is a predetermined number of bits continuous from the most significant bit including the most significant bit of the address, and part of the bits of the address. Addresses with the same numerical information in a certain high-order range of bits. As a result, it is possible to make the numerical information of the upper range bits of the addresses of the programs to be read by the second read instruction identical.

In addition, in a configuration in which the numerical information of the upper range bits in the address of the program to be read by the second read instruction is the same, the second read instruction excludes the upper range bits from the predetermined address of the program to be read. The specified bit information is set. As a result, compared to the first read instruction in which the entire predetermined address of the program to be read is set, the address information set in the second read instruction is reduced, and the data capacity of the second read instruction is reduced. It becomes possible to make it less than the first read instruction.

In addition, in the configuration where the second read command has a smaller data volume than the first read command as described above, the specific read command has a smaller data volume than the second read command. This makes it possible to diversify the types of read commands from the viewpoint of data capacity.

Feature R5. The program execution means is means for deriving a predetermined address of the program to be read by combining the numerical information of the upper range bits with the information of the specified bits set in the second read command. The gaming machine according to feature R4, characterized by comprising the mask circuit 181 and the addition circuit 182 of the 16th embodiment.

According to feature R5, the second read instruction is executed in the configuration in which the second read instruction is set with the information of the specified bits, which are the bits excluding the upper range bits of the predetermined address to be read. In such a case, the specified address of the program to be read is derived by combining the numerical information of the upper range bits with the information of the specified bits set in the second read command. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the second read command is set with the specified bit information that is a part of the predetermined address instead of the entire predetermined address, the second read command can derive the entire predetermined address. Become.

For the configuration of features R1 to R5, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B10, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D8, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F9, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H8, features I1-I7, features J1-J6, features K1-K8, features L1-L7, features M1-M5, features N1-N4, features O1-O5, features P1-P5, features Q1-Q13, features R1- Any one or a plurality of configurations of R5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the above feature group Q and feature group R can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko machine is provided with a storage section for storing game balls, and the game balls stored in the storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and directed to a game area in response to a player's shooting operation. is fired. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or a process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player is executed. be.

In a slot machine, when a game value such as medals is betted and a new game is started by operating a start lever, a lottery process is executed by a control means. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately execute processes using programs, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine 31... Reel unit 32L... Left reel 32M... Center reel 32R... Right reel 41... Start lever 42-44... Stop button 54... Power supply device 63... Image display device 63a... Liquid crystal display unit 67 Section display unit 72 Main MPU 73 Main ROM 74 Main RAM 74e AT continuation counter 92 Rendering MPU 101 Memory module 103 VDP 105 Buffer for development 106a First frame area 106b Second frame area 121 Operation device for presentation 142 Stepping motor 164a to 164c Stop completion flag 171 Pseudo stop table 172 AT transition Lottery table 173 First initial grant number lottery table 174 Second initial grant number lottery table 175 Initial grant number table 181 Mask circuit 182 Adder circuit 183 Index table 184 Index comprehension circuit , 185 ... address reading circuit, A1 ... left side area, A2 ... right side area, A11 ... upper left side area, A12 ... upper right side area, A13 ... lower left side area, A14 ... lower right side area, D1 ... image data at the time of division, D2-D5...Image data DA1...First partitioned area DA2...Second partitioned area G21, G22...Video display for effect G23...Display of number of rewards, G31...Remaining continuous game number image, G32...Acquisition number Display image, G33... Remaining grant number display image, G34... Stop order notification image, G35... Operation notification image, G41, G42... Animation display for effect, G43... Grant number notification display, G52... Caution image, G61... End indication image, G62... total number of games image, G63... total acquisition number image, G66... visibility lowering effect.

Claims (9)

game round control means for controlling the execution of each game round so that the game round is started based on the occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity and the game round is ended based on the occurrence of a predetermined end opportunity;
caution event control means for executing a predetermined caution event capable of calling a predetermined caution to a player in response to occurrence of a game round of a predetermined target;
with
A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the predetermined attention event can be continued when the next game round for the predetermined target game round is started in a situation where the predetermined attention event is being executed. 2. A gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said predetermined attention event is an event capable of calling the player's attention to addiction to the game. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a situation can occur in which the execution of the predetermined attention event is terminated before the next game round for the predetermined target game round is started. The caution event control means comprises means for terminating the execution of the predetermined caution event when a predetermined duration has elapsed after the start of execution of the predetermined caution event. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the predetermined target game round is a game round when a predetermined game state ends. Completion response control means for performing an end response display corresponding to the termination of the predetermined game state when the predetermined game state is terminated,
6. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the execution period of the predetermined attention event can overlap all or part of the execution period of the termination correspondence display. 7. The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein said attention event control means comprises means for starting said predetermined attention event in a situation where said end correspondence display is being executed. A situation in which the predetermined cautionary event ends before execution of the end-corresponding display ends, and a situation in which the predetermined cautionary event ends after execution of the end-corresponding display ends may occur. The gaming machine according to claim 6 or 7. The end-handling control means includes means for ending the end-handling display based on occurrence of a specific trigger necessary for newly starting a game round in a situation where the end-handling display is being executed. 9. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 6 to 8, characterized in that:

Images